User guide

Power Focus 4000

Atlas Copco Industrial Technique AB
9836 3123 01
Edition 24 (SW W10.16/W14.3)
2015-06

Copyright Atlas Copco Industrial Technique AB

Note! This manual can be altered without further notice.
For further information log in to Atlas Copco www.atlascopco.com

Table of content

Contents
Power Focus 4000
1
Introduction ..........................................................................................................13
1.1
1.2

Safety and operating instructions ..............................................................................13

Revision history .........................................................................................................13

System overview ..................................................................................................15

2.1

Power Focus system overview ..................................................................................15

2.1.1 PF 4000 .......................................................................................................................................16
2.1.2 PF 3000/3100/3102 .....................................................................................................................17

2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5

RBU ...........................................................................................................................18
ToolsTalk ...................................................................................................................19
Communication .........................................................................................................19
Tensor tools ...............................................................................................................20
2.5.1 Tool accessories ..........................................................................................................................22

2.6
2.7

Hardware accessories ...............................................................................................23

Software accessories ................................................................................................24
2.7.1 ATS ..............................................................................................................................................24
2.7.2 ACTA 4000 ...................................................................................................................................25

2.8

New functionalities ....................................................................................................26

Connecting and installing the system ................................................................27

3.1

Required hardware and software ..............................................................................27

3.1.1 Power Focus ................................................................................................................................27

3.2
3.3

Installing and connecting the physical parts of the system .......................................28

Grounding principles .................................................................................................28
3.3.1 Connecting the controller .............................................................................................................28
3.3.2 Recommended additional ground bonding ..................................................................................30
3.3.3 Tool cable resistance ...................................................................................................................31

3.4

Connecting devices ...................................................................................................32

3.4.1 Backplane connections ................................................................................................................32
3.4.2 Front underside connections ........................................................................................................33
3.4.3 RBU ..............................................................................................................................................33
3.4.4 Tool connection and start-up ........................................................................................................35
3.4.5 Printer ..........................................................................................................................................38
3.4.6 Serial RS232 #1 ...........................................................................................................................39
3.4.7 Serial RS232 #2 ...........................................................................................................................39

9836 3123 01

Table of content
3.4.8 Ethernet TCP/IP ...........................................................................................................................40
3.4.9 Tool connector ..............................................................................................................................40
3.4.10 Digital inputs ................................................................................................................................41
3.4.11 Digital outputs (relays) .................................................................................................................42
3.4.12 24 VDC output .............................................................................................................................44
3.4.13 I/O Bus #1 ....................................................................................................................................44
3.4.14 I/O Bus #2 ....................................................................................................................................45
3.4.15 Remote start connector ................................................................................................................45
3.4.16 Mains power connector ................................................................................................................46

Power Focus user interfaces ..............................................................................47

4.1

PF Graph ...................................................................................................................47
4.1.1 Front panel ...................................................................................................................................47
4.1.2 Display .........................................................................................................................................49
4.1.3 Programming PF Graph ...............................................................................................................51

4.2

PF Compact ..............................................................................................................55
4.2.1 Front panel ...................................................................................................................................55
4.2.2 Display .........................................................................................................................................56
4.2.3 Indicator lights ..............................................................................................................................57
4.2.4 Keypad .........................................................................................................................................57

Getting started with ToolsTalk ............................................................................61

5.1
5.2

Installing ToolsTalk ....................................................................................................61

ToolsTalk overview ....................................................................................................61
5.2.1 Menu list .......................................................................................................................................62
5.2.2 Selection panel ............................................................................................................................66
5.2.3 Toolbar .........................................................................................................................................66
5.2.4 PF Map ........................................................................................................................................69

5.3

Configuring ToolsTalk settings ...................................................................................70

5.3.1 Communication ............................................................................................................................71
5.3.2 Application ...................................................................................................................................72
5.3.3 Printout .........................................................................................................................................74
5.3.4 PF List ..........................................................................................................................................75

5.4

Connecting the PC to the controller ..........................................................................75

5.4.1 Ethernet connection .....................................................................................................................76
5.4.2 Serial connection .........................................................................................................................76
5.4.3 USB connection ...........................................................................................................................76
5.4.4 Connecting controller and ToolsTalk ............................................................................................77

9836 3123 01

Table of content
5.4.5 Disconnecting controller and ToolsTalk ........................................................................................77
5.4.6 Cordless tools (only Power Focus) ..............................................................................................78

5.5

Storing programming on file ......................................................................................78

5.5.1 Store PF to file .............................................................................................................................79
5.5.2 Read PF from file .........................................................................................................................79

5.6

Working offline ...........................................................................................................80

5.6.1 Configuring a tool offline ..............................................................................................................81

5.7

Miscellaneous ToolsTalk tasks ..................................................................................82

5.7.1 New user for an existing ToolsTalk installation .............................................................................82
5.7.2 Connecting ToolsTalk to controller without network connection ...................................................83

Pset ........................................................................................................................85
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7

Introduction ...............................................................................................................85
Creating new Pset/Opening Pset ..............................................................................88
Autoset ......................................................................................................................89
Quick programming ...................................................................................................90
Programming help .....................................................................................................91
Programming .............................................................................................................91
Control strategies ......................................................................................................95
6.7.1 Tq con ..........................................................................................................................................96
6.7.2 Tq con/ang mon ...........................................................................................................................97
6.7.3 Ang con/tq mon ............................................................................................................................97
6.7.4 Tq con/ang con (AND) / (OR) ......................................................................................................98
6.7.5 Reverse ang .................................................................................................................................99
6.7.6 Rotate spindle forward/reverse ..................................................................................................100
6.7.7 Click wrench ...............................................................................................................................100
6.7.8 Home position forward and reverse ...........................................................................................101
6.7.9 Yield control (Yield) ....................................................................................................................101
6.7.10 Yield/Tq con (OR) ......................................................................................................................102
6.7.11 DS con .......................................................................................................................................103
6.7.12 DS con/tq mon ...........................................................................................................................104
6.7.13 Snug gradient .............................................................................................................................104
6.7.14 PVT comp with snug ..................................................................................................................105
6.7.15 4-step tq con/4-step ang con .....................................................................................................106

6.8

Tightening strategies ...............................................................................................108

6.8.1 One stage ..................................................................................................................................108
6.8.2 Two stage ...................................................................................................................................108

9836 3123 01

Table of content
6.8.3 Quick step ..................................................................................................................................109
6.8.4 Ergo ramp ..................................................................................................................................109
6.8.5 Additional control options ...........................................................................................................109
6.8.6 Rehit detection ...........................................................................................................................110

6.9

Programming+ .........................................................................................................111
6.9.1 Current monitoring .....................................................................................................................112
6.9.2 PVT selftap ................................................................................................................................113
6.9.3 PVT monitoring ..........................................................................................................................114
6.9.4 PVT compensate .......................................................................................................................115
6.9.5 Options .......................................................................................................................................116
6.9.6 Gradient monitoring ...................................................................................................................119
6.9.7 Yield control ...............................................................................................................................120
6.9.8 Post view torque ........................................................................................................................122

6.10 Pset setup ...............................................................................................................123

Multistage ............................................................................................................125
7.1
7.2

Introduction .............................................................................................................125
Create new Multistage/Open Multistage .................................................................126

Job .......................................................................................................................129
8.1
8.2
8.3

Introduction .............................................................................................................129
Job concepts ...........................................................................................................129
Job configuration .....................................................................................................131
8.3.1 Creating a Job group .................................................................................................................131
8.3.2 Creating a new Job ....................................................................................................................131
8.3.3 Select Job ..................................................................................................................................133

8.4
8.5

Functions in Job monitor .........................................................................................136

Unlock the tool ........................................................................................................137

Controller ............................................................................................................139
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4

Introduction .............................................................................................................139
Information ..............................................................................................................140
Configuration ...........................................................................................................142
Network ...................................................................................................................145
9.4.1 Cell and Net configuration ..........................................................................................................146

9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8

COM Ports ..............................................................................................................150

Display ....................................................................................................................152
Memory ...................................................................................................................153
Accessibility .............................................................................................................157

9836 3123 01

Table of content

10

Tool ......................................................................................................................159
10.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................159
10.2 Tool information .......................................................................................................160
10.3 Tool configuration ....................................................................................................161
10.3.1 Tool start and Accessory bus .....................................................................................................162
10.3.2 Sound and buzzer ......................................................................................................................163
10.3.3 Tool function buttons ..................................................................................................................165
10.3.4 Blue LED ....................................................................................................................................166
10.3.5 Tool illuminator and lights ...........................................................................................................166
10.3.6 Radio and Connection ...............................................................................................................167
10.3.7 Work object LED ........................................................................................................................168

10.4 Tool diagnostic ........................................................................................................169

10.4.1 Sensor tracking ..........................................................................................................................170
10.4.2 Transducer calibration ................................................................................................................170

10.5 Tool maintenance ....................................................................................................171

10.5.1 Calibration and Service (including Pulsor service) .....................................................................172
10.5.2 Open-end tuning ........................................................................................................................173
10.5.3 Wear indicator ............................................................................................................................174
10.5.4 ACTA ..........................................................................................................................................174
10.5.5 Motor tuning ...............................................................................................................................175
10.5.6 Disconnect tool ..........................................................................................................................176
10.5.7 Hot swap ....................................................................................................................................177
10.5.8 Air sensor tuning and Tool drift alarm ........................................................................................178
10.5.9 Tool drift alarm ...........................................................................................................................178

10.6 Tool lock functionality ..............................................................................................184

10.6.1 Locking of tools from an external source in time critical applications ........................................185
10.6.2 Intentional locking of tools ..........................................................................................................185
10.6.3 Definition of a locked tool ...........................................................................................................185
10.6.4 Tool locking event codes ............................................................................................................185

11

Accessories ........................................................................................................187
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5

12

Introduction .............................................................................................................187
Digital I/O ................................................................................................................187
I/O bus .....................................................................................................................191
Tool bus ...................................................................................................................196
Printer ......................................................................................................................198

Sync .....................................................................................................................201

9836 3123 01

Table of content

12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4

Introduction .............................................................................................................201
Sync prerequisites and limitations ...........................................................................202
Hardware configuration ...........................................................................................203
Sync configuration ...................................................................................................205
12.4.1 Sync members configuration .....................................................................................................206
12.4.2 Sync reference configuration .....................................................................................................206

12.5 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................207

13

Identifier ..............................................................................................................209
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4

Introduction .............................................................................................................209
Identifier concepts ...................................................................................................209
Identifier prerequisites and details ..........................................................................211
Configuration of identifier functions .........................................................................213
13.4.1 Configuring identifiers ................................................................................................................213
13.4.2 Configuring a work order ............................................................................................................216
13.4.3 Configuring result parts ..............................................................................................................218
13.4.4 Additional identifier functions .....................................................................................................218

14

FieldBus ..............................................................................................................221
14.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................221
14.2 General setup ..........................................................................................................222
14.2.1 Parameters in General setup .....................................................................................................223
14.2.2 View fieldbus information ...........................................................................................................225

14.3 From PF setup and to PF setup ..............................................................................226

14.3.1 FieldBus modes .........................................................................................................................227

14.4 Storing fieldbus configuration ..................................................................................228

14.5 Disable fieldbus carried signals ...............................................................................228
14.6 FieldBus data format ...............................................................................................228
14.6.1 Bit map select (Endian Mode) ....................................................................................................228
14.6.2 FieldBus data types ...................................................................................................................229

14.7 FieldBus timing ........................................................................................................234

14.7.1 FieldBus general update ............................................................................................................234
14.7.2 S and ST Cable tools .................................................................................................................236
14.7.3 ST Wrench tools .........................................................................................................................237
14.7.4 STB tools ...................................................................................................................................239

14.8 FieldBus selector configuration ...............................................................................240

14.8.1 Set selector LED ........................................................................................................................240
14.8.2 Selector information ...................................................................................................................241

9836 3123 01

Table of content
14.8.3 Selector Control Green (Red) Light ...........................................................................................241
14.8.4 Functionalities of externally controlled socket selector ..............................................................242
14.8.5 Setting of socket selector into HW external control mode .........................................................242

14.9 Select Pset from fieldbus and set batch size ..........................................................243
14.10FieldBus information ...............................................................................................244
14.10.1ProfiBus-DP ...............................................................................................................................244
14.10.2DeviceNet ..................................................................................................................................248
14.10.3InterBus/InterBus2MB ................................................................................................................253
14.10.4ModBusPlus ...............................................................................................................................256
14.10.5EtherNet/IP ................................................................................................................................260
14.10.6Modbus/TCP ..............................................................................................................................263
14.10.7ControlNet ..................................................................................................................................264
14.10.8Profinet .......................................................................................................................................266
14.10.9FL-Net ........................................................................................................................................270
14.10.10CC-Link ......................................................................................................................................272

15

Logic configurator ..............................................................................................281

15.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................281
15.2 Process description (an example) ...........................................................................282
15.3 Logic operators and function blocks ........................................................................282
15.3.1 Logic gates .................................................................................................................................282
15.3.2 Function blocks ..........................................................................................................................284

15.4 Logic Configurator setup .........................................................................................286

15.4.1 Simulation ..................................................................................................................................293

16

Monitors ..............................................................................................................295
16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4

Introduction .............................................................................................................295
Result monitor .........................................................................................................296
Job monitor .............................................................................................................298
Operator monitor and Picture monitor .....................................................................299
16.4.1 Operator monitor ........................................................................................................................299
16.4.2 Picture monitor ...........................................................................................................................302

16.5 Identifier monitor .....................................................................................................304

16.6 Get all results ..........................................................................................................307

17

Trace ....................................................................................................................309
17.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................309
17.2 Trace window ..........................................................................................................309

18

Statistics .............................................................................................................313

9836 3123 01

Table of content

18.1
18.2
18.3
18.4
18.5
18.6
18.7

19
20

Introduction .............................................................................................................313
Statistic alarm ..........................................................................................................315
Trend deviation alarm ..............................................................................................316
Calculation of UCL and LCL ....................................................................................317
Calculation of mean values .....................................................................................317
Calculation formulas ................................................................................................317
Constants for calculation of SPC variables .............................................................319

Power Focus quick reference guide .................................................................321

Digital I/O and fieldbus items ............................................................................323
20.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................323
20.2 Digital output (relay) and fieldbus items from controller ..........................................323
20.3 Digital input and fieldbus items to controller ............................................................353

21

Parameter list ......................................................................................................367

21.1 Pset .........................................................................................................................367
21.1.1 Programming .............................................................................................................................367
21.1.2 Programming + ..........................................................................................................................373
21.1.3 Pset setup ..................................................................................................................................377
21.1.4 Statistic programming ................................................................................................................378
21.1.5 Programming .............................................................................................................................381

21.2 Multistage ................................................................................................................384

21.2.1 Setup ..........................................................................................................................................384
21.2.2 Multistage programming ............................................................................................................385

21.3 Job ..........................................................................................................................387

21.3.1 Setup ..........................................................................................................................................387
21.3.2 Programming .............................................................................................................................388

21.4 Controller .................................................................................................................391

21.4.1 Information .................................................................................................................................391
21.4.2 Configuration ..............................................................................................................................391
21.4.3 Network ......................................................................................................................................393
21.4.4 COM Ports .................................................................................................................................396
21.4.5 Display .......................................................................................................................................396
21.4.6 Memory ......................................................................................................................................397
21.4.7 Accessibility ...............................................................................................................................398

21.5 Tool ..........................................................................................................................399

21.5.1 Information .................................................................................................................................399
21.5.2 Configuration ..............................................................................................................................401

10

9836 3123 01

Table of content
21.5.3 Diagnostics ................................................................................................................................405
21.5.4 Maintenance ..............................................................................................................................406
21.5.5 Buzzer configuration ..................................................................................................................411
21.5.6 Sound configuration ...................................................................................................................411

21.6 Accessories .............................................................................................................411

21.6.1 Digital I/O ...................................................................................................................................411
21.6.2 I/O bus .......................................................................................................................................412
21.6.3 Tool bus ......................................................................................................................................413
21.6.4 Printer ........................................................................................................................................413

21.7 Sync ........................................................................................................................414

21.7.1 Programming .............................................................................................................................414

21.8 Identifier ..................................................................................................................415

21.8.1 Identifier setup ...........................................................................................................................415

21.9 Fieldbus ...................................................................................................................416

22

Event codes ........................................................................................................421

22.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................421
22.2 Event code list .........................................................................................................424
22.2.1 E001-E099 Rundown failures ....................................................................................................424
22.2.2 E100-E199 Event related errors ................................................................................................426
22.2.3 E200-E299 User input events ....................................................................................................437
22.2.4 E300-E399 Statistical events .....................................................................................................442
22.2.5 E400-E499Communication events ............................................................................................449
22.2.6 E500-E599 Hardware events (tool) ............................................................................................453
22.2.7 E600-E699 Hardware events .....................................................................................................459
22.2.8 E700-E799 Hardware events .....................................................................................................460
22.2.9 E800-E899 Software events ......................................................................................................461
22.2.10E900-E999 Events MMI .............................................................................................................464

22.3 Subinformation for event codes ..............................................................................464

22.3.1 E120 ...........................................................................................................................................465
22.3.2 E126 ...........................................................................................................................................465
22.3.3 E128 ...........................................................................................................................................466
22.3.4 E150 ...........................................................................................................................................467
22.3.5 E156 ...........................................................................................................................................467
22.3.6 E403, E404, E405 and E406 .....................................................................................................467
22.3.7 E710 ...........................................................................................................................................467

9836 3123 01

11

Introduction

Introduction

The first sections describe the system with hardware and software accessories, how to connect, and the
user interface.

The main part of the user guide describes how to use the ToolsTalk software to configure the controller.

The last part of the user guide lists the parameters and event codes used in PF.

1.1

Safety and operating instructions

T WARNING Read all warnings and all instructions. Failure to follow all the instructions may result
in electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury.
Ensure that you read and understand all instructions:

Safety Information delivered together with the different parts of the system.
Product Instructions for installation, operation and maintenance of the different parts of the system.
All locally legislated safety regulations with regard to the system and parts thereof.
Save all safety information and instructions for future reference.

T WARNING Do not change system parameters at random.

Changed parameters may result in risks of personal injury when handling the tool.
Included screenshots of the product interface only show examples of parameter settings or other configurations and are NOT intended to be generally applicable, unless otherwise stated.

T NOTICE! Changing parameters may lead to a decrease in tool performance and may also slow down
the production.
Contact your Atlas Copco representative if questions regarding the safety and operating instructions
arise.

1.2

Revision history

Apart from editorial updates, this manual has been revised as follows.

9836 3123 01

13

Introduction

Updates to reflect functional changes: Contact Atlas Copco for a release description for the current release.

14

9836 3123 01

System overview

System overview

This section includes an overview of the system, and a brief description of the options and accessories. For
more information about the available system parts and their functionality, contact your Atlas Copco
representative and consult the relevant user guide or catalog.

2.1

Power Focus system overview

Power Focus is a control and monitoring systems for advanced tightening technology using electrical tools.
The system is designed for the modern assembly industry with high demands and stringent quality and efficiency requirements, and offers full modularity through the combination of hardware and software.
This manual handles ToolsTalk but is also applicable for Power Focus Graph. When programming
on a Power Focus Graph display, refer to the corresponding section in ToolsTalk.

9836 3123 01

15

System overview

2.1.1

PF 4000

PF 4000 is a control system suitable for most Tensor tools. Unlike its predecessor, PF 3100, PF 4000 is

available in one model with two versions (Compact and Graph) that can handle all torque levels.
Advanced control functions built into Power Focus 4000 prevent the operator from deviating from the required
process. When it receives assembly information, the programmed Job function automatically selects the
correct tightening sequence and parameters. When combined with barcode scanning for component identification, the Job function offers traceable, zero-fault process control.
The controller is equipped with a USB connector for laptop access. It is located on the front of the unit for
maximum accessibility. Communication is also possible over serial RS232, Ethernet TCP/IP and various
fieldbus types.

16

9836 3123 01

System overview
PF 4000 Graph has an easy-to-read LCD color display. Statistical

data is collected, analyzed and presented on the screen. Changes

and trends in the assembly process are indicated by diagnostics
and statistical alarms, such as SPC monitor charts and capability
(Cpk) alarms. Alpha-numeric keys allow on-unit setup and easy
checking of traces and statistics. PF 4000 Graph model has a very
compact design, and a standardized mounting plate ensures easy
installation at every workstation.
Completing the range, PF 4000 Compact has a basic operator
interface with six-button keyboard and LED display. Preprogrammed using ToolsTalk PF and with a PC as the interface,
it offers the same functionality as the Graph model.

PF 4000 Compact

PF 4000 Graph

For technical data, dimensions drawings, connections and spare parts list, see Product Information
for PF4000 (9836 3113 00).

2.1.2

PF 3000/3100/3102

The PF 3000 is a control system for Atlas Copco Tensor S and DS tools. PF 3100 is a control system for
Atlas Copco Tensor ST tools (including functionality for S and DS tools). PF 3102 is the control system for
Atlas Copco Tensor SL tools.
Tensor STB tools require a communication kit to work with Power Focus 3100. The kit consists of a
serial port adapter (access point); cable connector (supplies the serial port adapter with power).

Two different hardware units are available, Graph and Compact.

PF 3000 Compact offers minimum hardware expenditure and is easily stackable for multiple tool configurations. PF 3000 Graph models offer full stand-alone programming via an integrated keyboard and large

display located on the front panel of the unit. PF Graph can also be used as a terminal for one or more PF
Compact controllers.

9836 3123 01

17

System overview

PF 3000 Compact

PF 3000 Graph

For technical data, dimensions drawings, connections and spare parts list, see Product Information
for PF3000 (9836 2156 01).
For PF 3102 controllers (SL tool drivers) only the Compact model is available.

2.2

RBU

RBU (Rapid Backup Unit) unlocks a specified level of functionality and acts

as a back-up unit for the configuration of the controller. There are different
types of RBU; Gold, Silver, Bronze, X (for ETX tool functionality) and DS
(for Tensor DS tool functionality). The RBU Gold unlocks the full capacity
and functionality of the controller. Combine the RBU giving the required
functionality with the chosen hardware.
For a list of the current RBU functionality, contact your Atlas Copco
representative.
When an RBU is plugged in to an empty controller, the RBU configuration is transferred to the
controller. This allows the quick installation and replacement of controllers on the assembly line.

18

9836 3123 01

System overview

2.3

ToolsTalk

ToolsTalk, a PC software package developed by Atlas Copco, offers easy and user-friendly

programming and real time monitoring of controller units. ToolsTalk is based on extensive
experience and thorough analysis of existing manufacturing industry needs.
ToolsTalk can be installed on standard PCs running Windows XP, Windows 7 (32-bit), or
Windows 7 (64-bit) and communicates with the controller via the serial port or via Ethernet
TCP/IP. The real time monitoring functions include access to Cpk, Traces, Operator monitor,
etc.

2.4

Communication

Built-in communication provides efficient use of modern communication technologies with Atlas
Copco products. The system can be built to suit the users needs, from a simple system offering
many functions, to a complete factory system. Using open standards like TCP/IP, it is possible
to connect and communicate with external systems and allows global communication.

Communicate with one controller at a time via the serial connection or with a complete network
of controller units via the built-in TCP/IP connection.
9836 3123 01

19

System overview

The controller communicates with a range of accessories via the internal I/O bus. Controller units
and accessories can be combined according to the customers requirements.
The controller can be configured to communicate via the most common buses on the market;
ProfiBus, DeviceNet, InterBus, etc. Real time communication is done over a proprietary I/O bus
for tool synchronization. Several outputs can be activated for communication with PLCs and
other external equipment. Each controller has four relay contacts, four optic isolated inputs and
a 24 V DC / 1 A internal power supply for external control circuits. All inputs and outputs can
be configured using the ToolsTalk software. The number of digital inputs and outputs can be
increased using an I/O Expander on the I/O bus.
With Power Focus, full networking capability is available in the controller as an integrated
function, in relation to both hardware and software. ToolsNet is Windows NT compatible, which
offers easy to use, effective database and data collection functions, using standard databases like
SQL, Oracle and Microsoft Access. The controller can be connected to a network for central
programming and data collection using ToolsNet. With the modular concept, the Power Focus
is the building block used to create complete and cost efficient solutions that satisfy the various
needs of modern industrial assembly operations.
Note! When connecting the Power Focus to an ethernet network it is recommended not to use
Hubs due to the risk for the Power Focus to be overloaded with too much data traffic. Use
Switches or Routers instead.

2.5

Tensor tools

This is a brief overview of Atlas Copco Tensor tools and tool accessories. See tool specific information for
a complete list of tools and options for each tool. Tensor tools are not applicable for Pulsor Focus.
Tensor STB communicates with the tightening controller systems through wireless digital

communication, built on IRC (Industrial Radio Communication) technique. For information regarding
Tensor STB features see User guide for Tensor STB.
Tensor ST tools communicate with controllers through digital communication, allowing new tool

features and greater flexibility due to not so many wires and leads. Compared with a Tensor S tool,
it is also lighter with improved accessibility.
Tensor SL is a range of low torque transducerized tools based on Tensor ST technology.
Tensor S tools are available in different configurations and motor types. Fixtured applications can

easily be installed and integrated with standard Atlas Copco components.

The ultra-compact ETX tool is designed for fixtured applications.
20

9836 3123 01

System overview

Atlas Copcos Tensor DS tools have no transducer. Instead of receiving an electrical signal from a
strain gauge, the tool derives the torque from several relevant parameters, such as voltage, speed,
temperature and current.
An open-end tool (or tube nut tool) is a Tensor tool
equipped with an open-ended head. It is used to
tighten nuts on tubes and similar applications. The
open-end is available for several, but not all, tools.

T WARNING Open-end tools can only be used

with lock-off lever for personal safety reasons.

Tool parts
Figure shows Tensor ST.

STwrench is a torque wrench that can be controlled

by the Power Focus. The STwrench communicates

with the tightening controller systems through
wireless digital communication, built on IRC
(Industrial Radio Communi-cation) technique.
For information regarding the Power Focus STwrench system see User guide for STwrench.

9836 3123 01

21

System overview

2.5.1

Tool accessories

See Atlas Copco tool specific information for a list of options for each tool.
ST scanner is placed on the tool and works as a barcode reader. For more

information about the function of identifiers, see section Identifier.

GPIO (General purpose I/O) is a digital input and output connector. The four

buttons combined with four LEDs can each be configured as a digital input and/or
digital output.

ST selector has two different modes, mode 1 and mode 2. In Mode 1, the selector

only utilizes the tool accessory bus as GPIO. This mode only supports a maximum
of 15 Psets (1-15). In Mode 2, the selector takes full advantage of the bus
capabilities.
For more information about the ST selector, see section ST-selector connection

TLS ST Tag is an external positioning unit for positioning of the tool in the

surroundings. The unit also has a 7-color LCD indicator for sending status messages
to the operator.

22

9836 3123 01

System overview

2.6

Hardware accessories

The concept features a number of accessories that simplify the guidance and follow-up of performed tightenings. The accessory functions can be set up using ToolsTalk or a PF Graph unit.
The benefit of using serial bus-based accessories (I/O bus) is that they can be connected in series, from accessory to accessory rather than hard wiring each accessory to the controller. This arrangement increases
flexibility and quick installation.The controller uses 24 V DC, 1 A to power the bus, which is also used to
power external I/O's. If more current is needed, the bus must be powered externally. Every device has a 24
V DC input for this purpose.
I/O Expander enables the connection of several inputs and relays when more than

those built-in are required. There are 8 inputs and 8 relays with the same
functionality as the four built-in I/O's. Each input and relay can be configured
individually.
I/O Expander, sealed

The sealed I/O Expander is designed for more demanding environments than I/O
Expander. It will add eight digital inputs as well as four digital and four relay
outputs to your system.
Indicator Box is a flexible display indicator used together with our Start handle

for indication of status signals from the controller. The box can easily be connected
to the Power Focus with premade cablings.
Socket Selector is a socket tray with LEDs that can be used to guide the user

through, for example, a Job sequence. When using more than one Pset it is very
convenient to use a selector. When a socket is lifted, the corresponding Pset will
be selected.
The Socket Selector is available with four or eight sockets, and communicates on
the I/O bus.
Operator Panel is an external device for PF. It is a general purpose lamp- and

switchbox, replacing the customer specials that are made today. The Operator
Panel communicates directly with Power Focus and the device configuration is
made in ToolsTalk PF.

9836 3123 01

23

System overview
Stacklight ESL-04 is a flexible light and switch device designed to interface with

controllers equipped with an I/O Bus.

Stacklight DSL-03 is a simple and customizable light and switch device, designed

to interface with controllers equipped with Internal I/O connectors instead of I/Obus.
The stacklight comes with features such as buzzer, rotating light etc.

MiniDisplay is a compact remote interface. It runs the Operator Guidance

application program to give the operator visual support. It is equipped with a touchscreen and is fully configurable. The MiniDisplay is connected through Ethernet
and does not support I/O-bus communication.
The RE alarm (Lamp/sound box) indicates the tightening status to the operator.

2.7

Software accessories

2.7.1

ATS

The ATS (Assembly Tools Software) works together with the controller to complete the tightening process.
The following software products are part of ATS.
ToolsNet

24

9836 3123 01

System overview

ToolsNet works together with the controllers and the selected database, MS SQL
Server or Oracle to collect, store and visualize all historic tightening-related data.
ToolsNet allows the user to get reports on shifts, lines, individual vehicles or
controllers for process improvement purposes. All the reports can easily be exported
to Excel.

ToolsNet can be used as a standalone product or together with the other modules
from the ATS.
Factory Overview

Factory Overview is the portal to the tightening process. It visualizes the whole process and makes
it possible to monitor all tightening applications from one central place. Factory Overview can be
used both as a standalone product and together with the other modules from the ATS.
Event Monitor

Event Monitor offers real-time event reporting from the controllers in a centralized and filtered
format.
Event Monitor can be used both as a standalone product and together with the other modules from
the ATS.
Open Protocol

The PF open protocol can be run using Ethernet or serial communication. It is a full duplex protocol,
which means that data can be exchanged in both directions simultaneously. Every communication
partner must be able to operate a send and receive facility simultaneously.
The torque controller is the server and the station computer the client. The torque controller can
accept up to 5 connections at a time. The protocol used is TCP/IP.

2.7.2

ACTA 4000

An ACTA 4000 performs a full range of functions, from simple torque checks to
advanced graphic tightening analysis. It comes in different models and it is easy
to upgrade.
ACTA 4000 measures torque, angle, and pulses and facilitates the conduction of
statistical analyses of the tightening process. An ACTA 4000, together with the
ToolsTalk QAT PC utility, is a complete SPC tool.

9836 3123 01

25

System overview

2.8

26

New functionalities

9836 3123 01

Connecting and installing the system

Connecting and installing the system

This section will take you through connecting and installing the system.
The major steps are:

Make sure that all required hardware and software is included.

Install and connect the physical parts of the system
Connect different devices to the controller.
Learn about the system user interfaces (see chapter System user interfaces).
Install the ToolsTalk software on a PC running Microsoft Windows .
It is possible to select installation of multiple instances of ToolsTalk. This means it is possible to open
several ToolsTalk instances at the same time in your desktop.

Connect the computer to the controller by using ToolsTalk . For Pulsor C, this step can be skipped if Tool
setup will be started from the Pulsor Focus front panel.
After completing the steps above you can start using the system. It is recommended to read chapters 3 and
4 before starting to use the tool.

3.1

Required hardware and software

3.1.1

Power Focus

Installation checklist:

Power Focus unit

Power cable
RBU
1 tool cable Power Focus to tool
Power Focus tool
ToolsTalk software (Recommended)

9836 3123 01

27

Connecting and installing the system

3.2

Installing and connecting the physical parts of the

system
Lock

Wall

Pulsor Focus

For Pulsor Focus installation: Before performing step 9 below, make sure the Tool Control Box is fit
with the correct air sockets. A socket that is locked when no air hose is connected, i.e. a female
socket, must be used for the Tool Control Box air outlet to the tool. If possible, use the ErgoQic fitting
already mounted on delivery.
For more information concerning air quality, air lubrication etc. please refer to the Product Instructions
document for the Tool Control Box.

For more information concerning connecting different devices, see section Connecting devices.

3.3

Grounding principles

3.3.1

Connecting the controller

1. Open the controller and detach the strap and ground wire. Carefully separate the back panel by gently
pushing the locking spring.

2. Attach the back panel of the controller onto the wall or steel plate with four toothed lock washers and
four M6 screws. If mounting on a wall, make sure to use correct wall bracket (plug and screw). If
mounting on a steel plate, make sure that the thickness of the plate is minimum 2 mm.

28

9836 3123 01

Connecting and installing the system

3. Make sure to bond the back panel to ground (only Power Focus) ; see Recommended additional ground
bonding

4. Carefully lift the controller to the back panel and reattach the strap and make sure that the strap is holding
the controller correctly. Reconnect the ground wire

5. Connect the TCB cable (only Pulsor C), tool cable, power cable and all other cables needed for the installation.
Strap any loose cables to minimize the risk of injury due to tripping on the cables.

6. Connect the RBU.

7. Check the GFI (Ground Fault Interrupter) is switched on.
8. Close the controller and lock it.
9. Connect the power cable to a power supply (115/230 V).

9836 3123 01

29

Connecting and installing the system

3.3.2

Recommended additional ground bonding

Only applicable for Power Focus. The recommendations in this chapter must be verified by a qualified
electrician.
By bonding both the controller cassis and work piece to earth is a way to ensure that the tool and work piece
are at equal potential. Proper bonding secures the potential even if the power cord is unplugged or if there
is a socket ground failure. A ground bonding also serves as a secondary return channel for leakage currents.
Neglecting proper bouding of controller and/or work piece may cause arcing due to electrostatic discharge
or failures.
If the controller is mounted on a ground bonded metal structure the toothed lock washers and mounting
screws will normally secure the controller bonding. Check the bonding path by measuring the resistance
between a ground point and any metal part on the controller chassis or the metal clip for the ground wire on
the back panel. Try to keep the resistance of the bounding path below 0.1 ohm. If the measured resistance
is high an additional ground bond wire may be attached to the back panel as in figure below or by using a
metal screw.
As the leakage current increases with cable length, bonding of the controller and a regularly check of both
ground bonding path and earth grounding in mains socket is strongly recommended for cable lengths above
17m.

30

9836 3123 01

Connecting and installing the system

Also, when using a FieldBus in the Power Focus proper grounding principles needs to be addressed. Further
information can be found in the FieldBus chapter and/or in web sites for organisations that are responsible
for each individual Fieldbus standard.

3.3.3

Tool cable resistance

When installing a system for ST, STR, S or DS tools it is recommended to check that there is a low resistance
between earth and tip of tool.
The length of the tool cable affects the earth resistance. By using the table below an expected additional
resistance from cable length can be calculated.
If the measured resistance is much higher than expected there might be problems with connectors, broken
wires etc.
PF4000
ST Machine cable

13 mOhm/m

S/DS Machine cable 6 mOhm/m

9836 3123 01

31

Connecting and installing the system

PF4000
Extension cable

3.4

6 mOhm/m

Connecting devices

This section describes the connections on the controller backplane. It also describes the start-up process for
the controller and the tools.

3.4.1

Backplane connections

Digital input + internal 24 V DC

Relays

Ground Fault Interrupter (GFI)

Serial #1 (RS 232) to MC-card

I/O Bus #1

I/O Bus #2

Remote start (only for Power

Focus)

Main fuse

Main fuse power connector

10

Ground connection

11

Fieldbus card (optional)

12

RBU

13

Ethernet

14

Serial #2 (RS232) to CC-card

32

9836 3123 01

Connecting and installing the system

15

Printer

16

Tool output

3.4.2

Front underside connections

In addition to backplane connections, PF4000 has a USB connection on the front underside.

3.4.3

RBU

Connect the RBU to the 15-pin connector on the back panel of the controller (see figure above).

T WARNING Make sure that the power is switched off when connecting and disconnecting the
RBU.
T WARNING Pulsor Focus cannot be used with a Power Focus RBU.
The RBU unlocks the software you need and works as a backup memory for your controller setup data.
The pin configuration is propriety information for Atlas Copco. This connector cannot be used for other
purposes.
Connector: 15-pin DSUB female.
Function: For connection of Atlas Copco RBU.

3.4.3.1

MAC address

Controller Ethernet address: 00-50-D6 -XX-YY-ZZ (from serial RBU).

N
e!ot

Cell network connection requires Power Focus units with identical RBU types inserted.
The RBU serial number is also part of the controller Ethernet MAC address.
Example RBU with serial number C00015767:

C00015767 (decimal) -> 003D97 (hexadecimal)

C00015767 (hexadecimal) -> 00-50-D6-00-3D-97 (MAC address)
3.4.3.2

Start-up instructions

At start-up, the controller checks for differences between the controller and RBU configurations. If an inconsistency is detected the user is prompted to select either the controller or RBU configuration. This makes it

9836 3123 01

33

Connecting and installing the system

possible to move/copy configurations between controller units by using the RBU. The user is also given the
possibility to clear both configurations.
N
e!ot

When changing RBU type it is only possible to load the configuration from the RBU.
Press the plus (+) or minus (-) buttons on the PF Compact or Pulsor Focus unit to toggle between the selections.
Confirm selection with the Enter button. Press the corresponding soft button to make a selection on the PF
Graph unit.
The table describes the selections available and how to choose configuration. If the controller and the RBU
are incompatible for other reasons than a configuration mismatch (for example, they have an older software
version), either the controller unit or the RBU is considered as NOK.
Status

Message at start up Action

Controller and RBU matches

No message

The memory areas of PF and the RBU are identical, and the checksums
are correct.

Controller and RBU does not

match

Clear / RBU / PF

The memory areas of PF and the RBU show correct checksums, but they
are different. You need to decide which memory content to use before
continuing, or whether to clear both.

Controller OK
RBU NOK

PF / Clear / Stop

The memory area of PF shows correct checksum, but the checksum of the
RBU is incorrect, which could indicate a hardware problem. You can select
between using PF setup or clear the memories.

Controller NOK
RBU OK

RBU / Clear / Stop

The memory area of the RBU shows correct checksum, but the checksum
of PF is incorrect, which could indicate a hardware problem. You can
select between using the RBU setup or clear the memories.

Controller NOK
RBU NOK

Clear / Stop

The memory areas of both PF and the RBU show incorrect checksums,
which could indicate a hardware problem. Your option is to clear the
memories.

T WARNING Changing RBU will clear the tightening result database.

N
e!ot

Selecting "Stop" will only prevent the result database from being erased if the RBU has been changed within
the same brand (provided the previous RBU is re-inserted). A change between a Gold and a differently
branded RBU will clear the result database even if selecting "Stop". If the Pulsor Focus unit is turned on
with no RBU the tightening result database will be cleared without a query to the user.

34

9836 3123 01

Connecting and installing the system

3.4.4

Tool connection and start-up

3.4.4.1

Tools with cable connection

ST and SL tools are used together with a

cable, especially designed for the particular
tool type. The cables are equipped with
memory devices used for storing
information about the tool cable, number
of tightenings etc. This information can be
viewed in the Accessories branch.
An ST tool can be connected and replaced
when the PF is powered up. For S tools,
use T460 Disconnect to replace tool
without losing data.

3.4.4.2

Tensor STB

For connection of the wireless Tensor STB, ensure the correct tool connection is
configured before starting the pairing procedure. See PF parameters under Tool >
Configuration > Connection and Tool > Configuration > Radio. For instructions on
the pairing procedure, see Tensor STB documentation.

1. Bus connector (hidden)

2. Buzzer
3. LEDs
4. Function button
5. Battery
6. Direction ring
9836 3123 01

35

Connecting and installing the system

7. Tool trigger
N
e!ot

Check tool documentation for compatibility between tool, PF and RBU.

3.4.4.3

Start-up instruction for open-end tools

The start-up instruction is recommended every time an open-end tool connected PF is

started up (rebooted), or a hot swap of the tool has been made. The advantages of this
are a faster tool rotation to the open-end position, possibility to select C230 OE forward
positioning, and automatic generation of alarms. Note that the operator has the possibility
to perform tightenings without completing the start-up configuration.
To do a start-up configuration, follow these steps:

1. Reboot PF (or make a tool hot swap).

2. Press the tool trigger on the open-end tool once. The tool head rotates slowly in order
to find a reference position. The tool should now alternate between tightening and
positioning when pressing the tool trigger.

3. Perform ten consecutive tool trigger pressings without installing on a joint; five
tightenings and five positionings, and let the open-end head rotate at least 360 degrees
for every tightening. Note that during this setup phase the OE positioning type is
torque based reverse and the max torque positioning limit is not valid.

4. After five correct tightenings and five correct positionings, the open-end head should
rotate with a faster speed meaning that correct reference point had been set.
If an open-end positioning fails (which happens if positioning is performed with a tool
head fixed on the tube), more tightenings and positionings are needed.
N
e!ot

To perform an open-end tuning, see section Open-end tuning.

3.4.4.4

Wireless tools

For wireless tools, performing a start-up configuration every time the battery is changed
would be ineffective for the operator. Therefore, there is no start-up configuration for
STB. Instead, when the trigger is first pressed after a battery change, the tool rotates
slowly in order to find its reference position. Alternatively, if the operator has selected
open-end tuning on PF before pressing the trigger, an open-end tuning is run. After a
successful open-end positioning or open-end tuning, the tool is ready.

36

9836 3123 01

Connecting and installing the system

3.4.4.5

ST GPIO connection

The four buttons combined with four LEDs can each be configured as a digital input and/or digital output.
Pibn

Function

Input

Output

Duration

Time

1-4

Input or output

Logical function

Logical function

Output duration

Duration time

3.4.4.6

ST-selector connection

Keep the left button on the selector pressed when powering up (this is done by hot swapping
the tool or powering up PF). The selector will now enter the configuration mode.
Press the right button on the selector to toggle between mode 1 and 2. Confirm mode
selection by pressing the left button.
Pin

Function (input)

Pset Select bit 3

Pset Select bit 2

Pset Select bit 1

Pset Select bit 0

If Mode 1 is selected the number of Psets (1-15) to use must now be set. Press the right
button to select the number of Psets to use. Use the left button to confirm. The selector is
now ready to use. When using mode 1 parameter T210 Mode must be set to GPIO with
the GPIO device configured according to the table to the right. Parameter C200 Pset must
also be set to DigIn.
If Mode 2 is selected the T210 Mode must be set to ST bus. Parameter C200 Pset also
must be set to ST selector. The selector has a number of configurable parameters (see
table below).
Selector parameter

Selections

Left button and right button

Off: button disabled.

Next Pset: select next Pset.
Previous Pset: select previous Pset.

LED status

Off and On

Display(1)

Off: display disabled.

Pset no.: displays selected Pset number.
Pset target: displays selected Pset target value (torque
or angle).

9836 3123 01

37

Connecting and installing the system

Selector parameter

Selections
Result: displays the tightening result.
Pset no. + result: toggles between Pset number and
tightening result (2).
Pset target + result: toggles between Pset target and
tightening result (2).
Pset no. + Pset target: toggles between Pset number
and target (2).
Pset no. + Pset target + result: toggles between Pset
number, target and tightening result (2).

(1)

Event codes always displayed, except for Off

(2)

The Pset number (or Pset target) is displayed until a tightening result is generated. The tightening result
is displayed until the next tightening is started or a new Pset is selected. In mode Pset no. + Pset target the
Pset number and target toggle will show on the display until a result is generated.

3.4.5

Printer

Connector: 25-pin DSUB female.

Function: Parallel printer
Electrical data: Normal TTL levels.
High level signal: 1
Outputs: High > 2.4 V; Low < 0.4 V
Inputs: High > 2.0 V; Low < 0.8 V
Pin

Function

Pin

Function

Pin

Function

Strobe

10

Acknowledge

19

Ground

Data bit 0

11

Busy

20

Ground

Data bit 1

12

Paper end (out of paper)

21

Ground

Data bit 2

13

Select

22

Ground

Data bit 3

14

Auto feed

23

Ground

Data bit 4

15

Error

24

Ground

Data bit 5

16

Initialize printer

25

Ground

Data bit 6

17

Select input

Data bit 7

18

Ground

38

9836 3123 01

Connecting and installing the system

3.4.6

Serial RS232 #1

Connector: 9-pin DSUB female.

Function: RS232 serial.
Pin

Function

Not used

RD, Receive data

TD, Transmit data

Not used

GND

Not used

Not used

DigIn. Not used

Dig out. Not used

Note: Problems can arise when connecting advanced external electronic devices to this port.

At the booting process of the Power Focus, some signals are sent out on this port until the unit is fully booted.
(This is by design and for debug purposes for developers). Therefore, there is a risk that problems can arise
when connecting advanced external electronic devices to this port such as programmable printers, scanners
etc. If that happens, and in all cases where external equipment is used, serial port #2 is recommended.

3.4.7

Serial RS232 #2

Connector: 9-pin DSUB female.

Function: RS232 serial.
Pin

Function

Not used

RD, Receive data

TD, transmit data

+5V max 200 mA

GND

Not used

9836 3123 01

39

Connecting and installing the system

Pin

Function

Not used

Not used

Not used

Note: Problems can arise when connecting advanced external electronic devices to this port

At the booting process of the Power Focus, some signals are sent out on this port until the unit is fully booted.
(This is by design and for debug purposes for developers). Therefore, there is a risk that problems can arise
when connecting advanced external electronic devices to this port such as programmable printers, scanners
etc. If that happens, and in all cases where external equipment is used, serial port no. 2 is recommended.

3.4.8

Ethernet TCP/IP

Connector: Shielded RJ45 for 10-baseT connection.

Function: 10 Mbit half duplex Ethernet communication.
Pin

Function

Out inverse

Out

In inverse

----

----

In

----

----

3.4.9

Tool connector

Connector: (16 + 4) pin

Function: For connection of Pulsor cable and TCB cable.
Pin

Description

Not Used

Not Used

40

9836 3123 01

Connecting and installing the system

Pin

Description

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

+15VDC

GND (0V)

GND (0V)

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

RS485 B

RS485 A

Not Used

GND

Safety power ground

3.4.10

Digital inputs

Connector: 10-pin detachable screw terminal. Mating connector: Phoenix MCVR 1.5/10 -ST- 3.81 or

compatible.
Function: Isolated opto-coupled digital input. Logical function is set in the configuration of the controller.
Electrical data: "High" input (10 - 40) VDC. Current needed to activate input is 5 mA at 24 V.

This input can be connected to run both positive and negative logic (active high or active low).
Isolated 24 VDC output. (19 V - 30 V) 1 A maximum load. This output can be used to feed external equipment
such as Stack lights and buzzers. Atlas Copco I/O Bus accessories are also powered from this output.

9836 3123 01

41

Connecting and installing the system

Pin

Function

13

Digital input 1 +

14

Digital input 1 -

15

Digital input 2 +

16

Digital input 2 -

17

Digital input 3 +

18

Digital input 3 -

19

Digital input 4 +

20

Digital input 4 -

21

+ 24 VDC isolated

22

GND (+24VDC isolated)

3.4.11

Digital outputs (relays)

Connector: 112-pin detachable screw terminal. Mating connector Phoenix MCVR 1.5/12-ST-3.81 or com-

patible.
Function: Two way dry contact relays. Isolated outputs. Logical function is set in the configuration of the

Pulsor Focus.
Electrical data: Max 50 V DC/AC. Switching load: min 1 mA, max 500 mA resistive load.

42

9836 3123 01

Connecting and installing the system

Pin

Function

Relay 1 Normally open

Relay 1 common

Relay 1 Normally closed

Relay 2 Normally open

Relay 2 common

Relay 2 Normally closed

Relay 3 Normally opened

Relay 3 common

Relay 3 Normally closed

10

Relay 4 Normally opened

11

Relay 4 common

12

Relay 4 Normally closed

9836 3123 01

43

Connecting and installing the system

3.4.12

24 VDC output

Isolated 24 VDC output. (19 V - 30 V), 1 A maximum load. This output can be used to feed external equipment
such as stack lights and buzzers. Atlas Copco I/O bus accessories are also powered from this output.

3.4.13

I/O Bus #1

Connector: 9-pin DSUB male.

Function: To connect Atlas Copco I/O Bus accessories. Parallel with I/O Bus connector #2.

There is a range of accessories that connect over the proprietary controller I/O Bus, for example:

Selector (socket tray)

RE-Alarm
I/O Expander
To have a well functioning I/O Bus, always use bus terminations. All accessories and controller units are
equipped with two parallel connectors. When all cables are connected, place a termination in the empty
connectors. I/O Bus connectors #1 and #2 are fully parallel and can be used in any combination. If nothing
is connected to the I/O Bus there is no need for terminations.
For I/O bus Sync configuration, see section Sync.

44

9836 3123 01

Connecting and installing the system

Pin

Function

+24 V iso

Signal Low

0 V (+8V iso)

0 V (+24 V iso)

Not used

0 V (+8V iso)

Signal High

Not used

+8 V iso. (for I/O Bus only)

3.4.14

I/O Bus #2

Connector: 9-pin DSUB male.

Function: To connect Atlas Copco I/O Bus accessories. Parallel with I/O Bus connector #1.

3.4.15

Remote start connector

Only applicable for Power Focus.

9836 3123 01

45

Connecting and installing the system

Connector: 4-pin detachable screw terminal. Mating connector phoenix MCVR 1.5/4-ST-3.81 or compatible.
Function: Remote start input for use with external start switch. To run tool in reverse, first close the reverse

switch and then close the start switch. Pin 1 and 2 must be connected at power on to be able to use the builtin tool trigger. If remote start is to be controlled from other inputs (I/O Expander, Sync, fieldbus or digital
input), pins 2 and 4 must be connected at power on.
Pin

Function

Tool built-in start switch

Common

Remote reverse

Remote start

Remote start is not available for Tensor STB tools.

T WARNING Make sure that the power is switched off when changing the remote start connector.

3.4.16

Mains power connector

Connector: IEC320
Electrical data: Input voltage (90 - 120) VAC, (200 - 240) VAC, (50 - 60) Hz. Auto select of voltage input

span.

46

9836 3123 01

Power Focus user interfaces

Power Focus user interfaces

This section describes the PF user interface. Except for differences in the user interface, PF Graph and PF
Compact have the same functionality and capacity.
For a description of connections, see section Connecting devices, or documents Product Information
for PF3000 (9836 2156 01), or Product Information for PF4000 (9836 3113 00).

4.1

PF Graph

PF Graph can be programmed in ToolsTalk PF, through a pre-programmed RBU, or by using the function

buttons on the front panel. Another PF can also be programmed by the Graph unit if both controllers are
members of the same cell. A Pset can also be programmed directly via the units Auto set function.

4.1.1

Front panel

The front panel of PF Graph consists of a display, indicator lights, keys and a red and white power switch.

9836 3123 01

47

Power Focus user interfaces

Number

Part

Description

Indicators

Eight indicators

Display

The front panel has a configurable color display. A power-save

function deactivates the backlighting on the display if it is not
used for 30 minutes.

Soft keys

Five soft keys with functionality according to the display

Function keys
and keyboard

Used to program PF.

Power switch

Red and white power switch.

4.1.1.1

Indicators

Indicator

Description

OK

The OK light indicates when the result of the tightening is within the specified limits.
The indicator remains active until the next cycle starts.
OK flash light indicates that it is safe to disconnect the tool. The LED goes off when
the tool is disconnected.

n x OK

The n x OK light indicates when the number of approved tightenings corresponds to

the number (batch size) programmed into PF. The indicator remains active until the
next cycle starts.

NOK

The NOK red light indicates when at least one result of the tightening falls outside the
specified limits. The light is active until the next cycle starts. NOK flashing red indicates
that it is NOT safe to disconnect the tool. The LED goes off after three seconds.

JOB OK

The JOB OK light indicates when the result of the Job is finished. The light remains
active until the next cycle starts or when the system is reset.

ALARM

The ALARM indicates that an alarm message needs to be acknowledged. The light is
active until the message is cleared. The alarm light can also flash indicating an active
alarm that does not need to be acknowledged, i.e. service indicator alarm.

STAT

The STAT light indicates when the calculated values fall outside statistical control
limits. The light remains active until the values are within the control limits or the
memory has been reset.

Autoset (arrow
target)

The Auto set light indicates when the Auto set programming function is active. The
light goes off when Auto set is finished.

PROG.
If PF is in programming mode the Programming control light (illustrated by an open
CONTROL(padlock padlock) flashes green. Programming control can be undertaken via the unit itself, via
symbol)
another PF Graph or via ToolsTalk PF. A steady green light indicates that the
programming keys on the front panel are unlocked.

48

9836 3123 01

Power Focus user interfaces

4.1.1.2

Soft keys and keypad

Key

Description

Soft keys

Each soft key is used to select an option or a menu block from the display.

Channel [+/-]

Select another controller within the configured cell.

Pset [+/-]

In result mode: Select Pset to use if C200 is set to PF keyboard. In programming mode:
Select Pset or Job to configure.

Question Mark [?]

Pressing the Question mark key displays information about the software, RBU type
and the connected tool.

Print symbol

Press the Print key to do a print-out to a connected printer.

Arrows

Up and down arrows: Scroll up and down in the menus

Left arrow: Leave current option or view
Right arrow: Execute selected function, select current option or view

RESULT

Select result mode. Menu block View has options for the result view.

PROG

Select programming mode.

OK

OK is used to execute selected functions and acknowledge event.

CANCEL

Cancel the current operation and return to the previous view.

Keypad

Numeric keypad. Press repeatedly to toggle between letters and numbers

CL

Clear the last input letter or number.

ENTER

Enter is used to activate inputs in the programming blocks

4.1.2

Display

PF 4000 Graph features a large back-lit 72 x 96 mm color display with a dialog box-like interface to allow
accurate measurement readings and simple programming.
As from Power Focus 4000 software version W10.13, the Graph model has a new default display called the
Simple view. Some information has been removed from the header, apart from the Pset name that is still
shown in the middle. Furthermore several menu blocks are removed from the bottom bar. By pressing the
"Type" menu block, the original Graph display can be achieved by selecting "1 channel". The selected view
is made the default one after this.

9836 3123 01

49

Power Focus user interfaces

Header with three fields: channel number and

current Pset or Job, Pset name, and number
of tightenings (in batch). If the field is lightblue, this indicates that the displayed
information is inactive or from another PF.
Result or Programming dialog box. Available
result view options are shown under the View
menu block. This figure shows the Last
Results view for one channel.
The last result lower windows are
configurable.
Menu blocks representing programming tree
functions, short-cuts, arrows. The menu
blocks are controlled by the soft keys below.

4.1.2.1

Menus

The Menu blocks are located at the bottom of the display. Each soft key is used to select a menu block.
When selecting a menu block with more than
one item, a pull-up menu appears on the
display.
To select an option, do one of the following:

Keypad: Press the digit on the numeric

keypad that corresponds to the desired
option.

Soft keys: Scroll up or down using the soft

keys under the arrows. Then press the soft
key under Enter, or press ENTER on the
keypad.

Arrows: Scroll up or down using the

arrows. Then press the right arrow to
confirm the selection.

50

9836 3123 01

Power Focus user interfaces

4.1.2.2

Data input

To access the data input boxes, do one of the

following:

Highlight it and then press ENTER.

Press the digit on the numeric keypad that
corresponds to the option.
To enter data, do the following:

If it is a text box, use the keypad and press

until the desired figure, letter or symbol
appears. Press ENTER to confirm and exit
the data field

Text box

If it is a selection list, do one of the

following:

Use the soft keys under the arrows to

highlight the desired parameter. Press
ENTER to confirm and exit the
selection list.

Press the digit on the numeric keypad

that corresponds to the desired
parameter to confirm and exit the
selection list.
Press Store to save the changes in the
controller and stay in the current display.

Selection list

Press OK to confirm changes and return one

level up in the menu tree. More changes can
be made before storing.
Press Cancel to cancel any changes and leave
the dialog box.

4.1.3

Programming PF Graph

To program PF Graph, do the following:

Press PROG. The padlock symbol starts blinking to show that the PF Graph has programming control, and
the programming menu is displayed. Select and fill in applicable parameters.

9836 3123 01

51

Power Focus user interfaces

If another person or program has programming control, a message is displayed.

When a change has been made, Store is shown in a lighter color. Press the soft key below Store to confirm
changes.
Press RESULT to return to the result view.

4.1.3.1

Programming another PF

To program another PF through PF Graph, both channels have to be members of the same cell. The cell
configuration is done through ToolsTalk PF.
Press the Channel -/+ to access other controllers in the cell from the menu tree in the programming mode or
from the result view. Do the applicable programming.

4.1.3.2

Changing IP address

To change IP address on a controller in the

network, do the following:
Press PROG and then 4,3,0,0 to open the IP
address dialog box.
Use the keypad to enter the correct IP address.
Press Store and then RESULT to confirm
changes and return to the result view.
To change IP address on other channels in the
cell, do the following:
Press Channel -/+ to access the correct
controller. This can be done from the menu
tree in the programming mode, or from the
result view.
Change the IP address.
Press Store and then RESULT to confirm
changes and return to the result view.

4.1.3.3

Programming the last result view

The last result view can be programmed to show different parts of the last result, and also to show the result
from one or two channels.

52

9836 3123 01

Power Focus user interfaces

Press PROG and then 4,5,1 to open the result

view.
Press 0 or 1 to select one or two channels.
The programming mode for the result view
is displayed.
Press the number in the area to edit, then press
Enter to open the selection list for the result
view area. Make a selection and proceed with
the other result view areas.
To view more than one channel, press 3 or 4
to access the lower part of the result view.
Select another PF with Channel -/+, and
another Pset with Pset -/+.
Press Store and then RESULT to confirm
changes and return to the result view.

In the result view, press the Type soft key and select two channels to show the result from
two channels. The upper part displays the viewed channel and the lower any selected channel
in the cell. R means running Pset.

9836 3123 01

53

Power Focus user interfaces

4.1.3.4

Print reports

The print key opens the print menu.

If print is selected from, for example the
controller menu, the controller report is preselected.

4.1.3.5

Trace

One or multiple traces can be shown in the PF Graph display.

To show traces select Trace in the View menu
block. Select which type of chart to view via
the Type menu block.

54

9836 3123 01

Power Focus user interfaces

In Torque over time trace mode it is possible

to plot several traces in the same chart. This
is done by accessing the Select menu block
and activating Multiple Traces. The last ten
traces are displayed in the chart. The chart is
scaled according to the reference. If a
reference is not selected the chart is scaled
according to the first plotted trace.

In Multiple Traces mode a tightening trace

can be set as a reference by using the Select
reference command. The last tightening trace
is set as the reference. When a reference is
selected, all traces except the reference is
cleared. The reference that is shown in red
color is stored in the memory and is available
after reboot. In Select reference mode the last
nine traces and the references are displayed
in the chart.

4.2

PF Compact

PF Compact can be programmed in ToolsTalk PF, through a pre-programmed RBU, or programmed using
the cell function on a PF Graph. A Pset can also be programmed directly via the units Auto set function.
Except for differences in the user interface, PF Compact has the same functionality and capacity as the Graph
model.

4.2.1

Front panel

The front panel of PF Compact consists of a display, indicator lights, keys and a red and white power switch.
The display is set up using parameter C512 Compact display.

9836 3123 01

55

Power Focus user interfaces

Number

Part

Description

Display

The front panel

contains a 4-digit, 7segment display.

Power Switch

Red and white power

switch.

4.2.2

Display

After a tightening, result is presented on the display in configured presentation unit. If the presentation value
is bigger than 9999, display shows EEEE.
Engineering unit

Convert factor

Nm

Nm to Ozfin

141.6

Nm to Lbfin

8.851

Nm to Lbfft

0.737562

Nm to Kgfm

0.101972

Nm to Kgfcm

10.197162

Torque is presented as real numbers in the following format. The decimal point indicates that the number is
a torque value.
Torque (engineering unit)

No of decimals

0.00 9.99

10.00 99.99

100.0 999.9

.1000 .9999

In the 1000-9999 interval, a decimal point is located to the left of the first digit to distinguish torque
values from angle values which do not have a decimal point. The reason to the left position is HW
related on the display card.

Angle values are presented as integers in the interval 0-9999 degrees. When a tightening result is composed
by torque and angle, the display alternating shows the torque and angle result (changes every 0.8 sec)
During tightening, the P-set number is displayed. Events are presented on the display with an event code,
being a 3 digit number preceded with an E

56

9836 3123 01

Power Focus user interfaces

4.2.3

Indicator lights

Indicator

Description

OK

The OK light indicates when the result of the tightening is within the specified limits.
The indicator remains active until the next cycle starts.
OK flash light indicates that it is safe to disconnect the tool. The LED goes off when
the tool is disconnected.

NOK

The NOK red light indicates when at least one result of the tightening falls outside the
specified limits. The light is active until the next cycle starts. NOK flashing red indicates
that it is NOT safe to disconnect the tool. The LED goes off after three seconds.

JOB OK

The JOB OK light indicates when the result of the Job is finished. The light remains
active until the next cycle starts or when the system is reset.

n x OK

The n x OK light indicates when the number of approved tightenings corresponds to

the number (batch size) programmed into PF. The indicator remains active until the
next cycle starts.

ALARM

The ALARM indicates that an alarm message needs to be acknowledged. The light is
active until the message is cleared. The alarm light can also flash indicating an active
alarm that does not need to be acknowledged, i.e. service indicator alarm.

PROG.
If PF is in programming mode the Programming control light (illustrated by an open
CONTROL(padlock padlock) flashes green. Programming control can be undertaken via the unit itself, via
symbol)
PF Graph or via ToolsTalk PF. A steady green light indicates that the programming
keys on the front panel are unlocked.
If PF Compact keypad is locked, the only keys on the controller that can be used are
question mark and enter. (If the keypad is unlocked, steady green, any key can be
accessed.)
Autoset (graph
symbol)

The Auto set light indicates when the Auto set programming function is active. The
light goes off when Auto set is finished.

STAT

The STAT light indicates when the calculated values fall outside statistical control
limits. The light remains active until the values are within the control limits or the
memory has been reset.

4.2.4

9836 3123 01

Keypad

57

Power Focus user interfaces

Key

Description

Plus [+]

Navigates through menus on the display and increases numbers.

Minus [-]

Navigates through menus on the display and decreases numbers.

Autoset (arrow
target)

Press the Autoset key to enter Autoset programming mode. Aset/Ft alternates in the
display and the Autoset LED comes on.
Press Enter. Change the P113 Final target value (if required) by pressing the +/- keys.
Press Enter to select the P113 Final target. Aset is shown in the display.
Perform a number of tightenings. When Autoset is ready, the selected Pset number is
displayed and the Autoset LED goes out.
To abort Autoset press the Autoset key (exit and no save).

Question Mark [?]

Pressing the Question mark key displays the following information:

RBU License level: rbu toggle with RBU type. Au = Gold, Ag = Silver and Br =
Bronze.Software version: rEL followed by version number rolls on the display from
right to left.
Tool model name: type toggles with the tool model name.Current Pset: Pset toggles
with the current Pset ID, e.g. P1.
Current Job: Job toggles with the current Job ID, e.g. J3.

Enter

The Enter key is used to execute selected functions and for event acknowledgement.

Function Key [F]

Description

General

Press F (Function key) to display functions. To display function F1 press F once, to

display function F2 press F twice etc. Press Enter to access and edit a function. When
finished, press F repeatedly to display result mode again (or else it takes 30 seconds
for the screen to update automatically).
Note: The functionality is dependent on the RBU version.

F1Setting Final
Target value

F1/Ft alternates in the display. If no Pset is selected F1/---- is displayed.

Press Enter to select a new P113 Final target value. Change the value by pressing the
+/- keys.
Press Enter to save and exit. Press F to exit (no save).

F2Setting Torque
Tune Factor

F2/tunE alternates in the display if the selected P100 Control strategy is equal to DS
control. Otherwise F2/---- is displayed.
Press Enter to access the torque tune factor. Change the value by pressing the +/ keys
(range 80% - 220%, default value 100%).
Press Enter to save and exit. Press F to exit (no save).

F3Motor tuning

Press the F key three times. F3/tool alternates in the display if a tool is connected.
Otherwise F3/---- is displayed.
Press Enter to activate the motor tuning process. The display shows the process status
during progress, (1 to 7).
Press the Tool trigger to start motor tuning. The trigger must be pressed during the
entire process.
Release Tool trigger or press F to abort the motor tuning process.
When the motor tuning process ends, done (for succeeded) or Err (for failed) is
displayed.

58

9836 3123 01

Power Focus user interfaces

Function Key [F]

Description
After a few seconds F3/tool starts alternating on the display.

F4Selecting Pset

F4/Pset alternates in the display if the C200 Pset is set to PF keyboard. Otherwise F4/--- is displayed.
Press Enter to access the available Psets. Browse existing Psets by pressing the +/keys.
Press Enter to select a Pset and exit.
Press F to exit (no selection).
F5/batS alternates in the display, indicating that a Pset is selected. Otherwise F5/---is displayed.
Press Enter to access the Batch Size value (range 0 - 99). Change the batch size value
by pressing the +/- keys.
Press Enter to save and exit.
Press F to exit (no save).
F6/DISC alternates in the display if a tool is connected. Otherwise F6/---- is displayed.
If safe to disconnect tool is rolling on the display press Enter. The tool may now be
disconnected.
If Fail is displayed, DO NOT disconnect the tool. Press F or Enter to exit.
Press the F key seven times. F7/stun alternates in the display.
Press Enter to activate the Sync motor tuning process. The display shows two numbers
simultaneously during progress. The number to the left is the percentage of Sync
member that has finished motor tuning, and the number to the right is the process status
(1 to 7).
Press the Tool trigger on the Sync reference to start Sync motor tuning. The trigger
must be pressed during the entire process.
Release the Tool trigger or press the F key to abort the motor tuning process.
When the motor tuning process ends, done (for succeeded) or Err (for failed) is
displayed. After a few seconds F7/stun starts alternating on the display.
Press the F key eight times.F8/IP alternates in the display.
Press Enter. Addr is shown. Press Enter to edit the first part of the IP address.
Increase/decrease the number by pressing the Plus/Minus keys. Press Enter to confirm
and edit the second part of the address. Repeat the procedure for all remaining IP
address parts.
Press Enter. Sub is shown. Press Enter to edit the first part of the subnet mask.
Increase/decrease the number by pressing the Plus/Minus keys. Press Enter to confirm
and edit the second part. Repeat the procedure for all remaining subnet parts.
Press Enter. rout is shown. Press Enter to edit the first part of the default router.
Increase/decrease the number by pressing the Plus/Minus keys. Press Enter to confirm
and edit the second part. Repeat the procedure for all remaining router parts.
Event code E857 Reboot needed before changes take effect will be blinking on the
display when finished, if any changes have been made. Press Enter to acknowledge
the event.
Restart PF.

F10Wireless tool
pairing mode

9836 3123 01

Press the F key ten times. F10/pair alternates in the display.

59

Power Focus user interfaces

Function Key [F]

Description
Press Enter to activate the pairing process. The display shows the process status during
progress (1 to 5).
Event code E550 Radio contact with tool established, tool accessible is shown on the
display when finished.

60

9836 3123 01

Getting started with ToolsTalk

Getting started with ToolsTalk

ToolsTalk is an application that acts as an interface between the user and the controller. It is used for
programming and monitoring the controller from a PC.
With ToolsTalk installed, users can communicate with the controller via the serial port (RS232) as well as
over the Ethernet.
Ethernet communication makes the management of the system easy and efficient, since ToolsTalk can be
installed on a PC anywhere in the network.
ToolsTalk serves as an interface between the user and the controller. With ToolsTalk, users can create and
edit instructions and settings for the controller. The settings needed to control the tightening process performed
by the controller include; tightening strategies, control parameters, torque parameters, angle parameters,
speed and ramp parameters and time parameters.
The settings are transferred to the controller using an Ethernet connection, the serial port, or using the USB
port on PF 4000 and Pulsor Focus. Process data can be collected from the controller and monitored in
real-time. ToolsTalk makes management of the system easy and efficient, since the software can be installed
on any PC on the network.
ToolsTalk is fully compatible with Microsoft Windows and supports widely accepted communication protocols
such as; Ethernet, TCP/IP and RS232 (serial communication).

5.1

Installing ToolsTalk

ToolsTalk is easy to install:

1. Insert the installation CD and follow the instructions.

It is possible to select installation of multiple instances of ToolsTalk. This means it is possible to open
several ToolsTalk instances at the same time in your desktop.

2. Open ToolsTalk by selecting Start > Program > Atlas Copco Tools AB > ToolsTalk <variant>.

5.2

ToolsTalk overview

Almost every function in ToolsTalk has its own window. The figure below shows the ToolsTalk interface
with menu list, selection panel, toolbar and PF Map.

9836 3123 01

61

Getting started with ToolsTalk

There are several ways to start a function in ToolsTalk. With almost all functions, it is possible to use a menu
item in the menu list. Click on a symbol in the toolbar or double-click on the text in PF Map.
Menu list
Selection panel
Toolbar

PF Map

5.2.1

Menu list

The following options are available in the PF Menu list.

An additional menu appears in the Menu list when opening a function window. For example, when opening
a Pset window, a new menu named "Pset" appears in the menu list.

62

9836 3123 01

Getting started with ToolsTalk

Illustration

9836 3123 01

Name

Description

File

Read and store files, print and exit ToolsTalk from

the File menu.
If, for example, the Pset window is active, options
for reading and storing Pset appear in the File
menu.

Edit

Create a new Pset, Multistage, Job, Sound and

Logic Configurator from the Edit menu.

Focus

The Focus menu specifies the type of connection

to use when connecting to the controller. Choose
between an Ethernet connection and a Serial
connection. The Offline mode allows access to
ToolsTalk without the need for a connection to a
controller.

63

Getting started with ToolsTalk

Illustration

64

Name

Description

Options

The Options menu includes:

ToolsTalk interface settings: View Toolbar,
Settings, Change language and Change Manual.
See section Configuring ToolsTalk for more
information.
Get Event Log: Retrieves the event log from the
connected controller.
Service Log: A dialog appears according to
below. This feature can be used when there has
been a system error (a bluescreen or OSE error
etc.) and logfiles has been requested by Atlas
Copco for analysing.
Forced release progcontrol terminates the
connection to the current controller and enables
another user to take programming control over
the controller.
Forced release progcontrol disconnects another
ToolsTalk when programming control
(progcontrol) over the database in the controller
is needed, for example for a configuration change.
Forced release progcontrol can not disconnect a
controller interface in the programming view.
Reboot PF. A pop-up window prompts for
confirmation before reboot.

Service
log

Select the items to be stored in the folder under

the specified path. The item Get all results is not
selected per default due to the fact that it can be
large and take long time to download.The item
Dump log includes info from latest fatal errors in
the system if there has been any. This information
is strictly for the Power Focus 4000 software
developers to interpret. The stored files are named
Dump... and the date and time is also evident from
the file name.

9836 3123 01

Getting started with ToolsTalk

Illustration

Name

Description

Window Set properties for windows and icons from the

Window menu as well as enable and open the
Activate menu.

Activate The Activate menu contains a list of all available

functions (Pset, Job, Multistage, etc).

Help

9836 3123 01

The Help menu allows access to the ToolsTalk

help file. Pressing F1 on the keyboard gives access
to the help file from any window. About
ToolsTalk brings up details about the version of
the ToolsTalk program in use.

65

Getting started with ToolsTalk

5.2.2

Selection panel

Illustration

5.2.3

Menu option

Description

Selected Controller

The following options are available: Serial

connection, Ethernet connection and
Offline mode.

Running Job

If parameter C201 Job) is set to

Ethernet/Serial mode, it is possible to
select a job to run from this window.

Running Pset

If parameter C200 Pset is set to

Ethernet/Serial mode, it is possible to
select a Pset or Multistage to run from this
window.

PF List

To simplify the Ethernet connection to a

controller, use the PF List. Select an item
and ToolsTalk connects to the
corresponding controller. The information
in the list contains; name, IP address and
port number.

Toolbar

The toolbar icons are short-cuts to the basic functions in ToolsTalk. See the corresponding section in this
manual for a detailed description of each function.
Icon

66

Name

Description

Pset

This icon opens the Pset programming window.

A Pset contains all the necessary information controller needs to
perform a tightening. There are a number of parameters included in
a Pset, among them; control parameters, torque parameters, angle
parameters etc.
Click on the arrow to the right to select between existing Psets (shown
along with number and name).

9836 3123 01

Getting started with ToolsTalk

Icon

Name

Description
Use the function in the PF Map to create a new Pset.

9836 3123 01

Multistage

This icon opens the programming window for the first Multistage.
In some instances it is necessary to perform a tightening in several
stages. These circumstances require specific tightening strategies.
Multistage allows the user to create linear sequences of up to eight
Psets to perform a tightening divided into stages.
Click on the arrow to the right to select between existing Multistages
(shown along with number and name).
Use the function in the PF Map to create a new Multistage.
Not applicable for Pulsor Focus.

Job

This icon opens the programming window for the first Job.
A Job is a collection of Psets or Multistages, which are useful when
performing several multiple tightening operations, each with different
requirements. This is convenient since the operator does not have to
select a new Pset or Multistage for every tightening.
Click on the arrow to the right to select between existing Jobs (shown
along with number and name).
Use the function in the PF Map to create a new Job.

Controller

This icon opens the first part in the Controller programming section.
Controller contains information and settings for the controller. This
includes network, COM ports, display, memory and accessibility.
Use the arrow to the right to select between the submenus.

Tool

This icon opens the first part in the Tool programming section.
The Tool branch includes information, configuration, diagnostic and
maintenance for the tool connected to the controller.
Use the arrow to the right to select between the sub-menus.

Accessories

This icon opens the first part in the Accessories programming section.
In the Accessories branch are the digital inputs and outputs of the
controller configured and diagnosed. It also includes information
about the devices connected to the I/O bus and tool bus, and how to
configure these devices.
Use the arrow to the right to select between the submenus.

Sync

This icon opens the Sync programming section.Up to ten controller

units in the same logical Cell can be synchronized to perform the
same task simultaneously, a function known as Sync. This type of
operation requires synchronization of the involved controllers.
Not applicable for Pulsor Focus.

Identifier

This icon opens the Identifier programming section.

It is possible to send an Identifier string to a controller. This string
is normally sent by a barcode reader connected to one of the serial
ports on the controller. (This barcode is in car plants usually known
as a VIN or ESN).

67

Getting started with ToolsTalk

Icon

68

Name

Description

FieldBus

This icon opens the fieldbus programming section.

Fieldbus communication is useful for data communication between
the controller and PLC's. It is an effective and fast way for the data
transfer of short data packages.

Logic Configurator

This icon opens the programming window for the first Logical
Configurator.
The ToolsTalk software feeds the controller with inputs, called
Configurator sheets. The Configurator sheets consist of a Relay status
array and a DigIn status array. The arrays have the status of each
relay/digital input function (if the function is defined on the internal
I/Os or one of the I/O Expanders).
Every Logic Configurator circuit instruction list is evaluated every
100 ms which corresponds to a tick or every time an input status
changed.
Click on the arrow to the right to select between existing Logical
Configurators (shown along with number and name).
Use the function in the PF Map to create a new Logical Configurator.

Monitors

Click on the arrow to the right of this icon to select an appropriate

monitor; Result monitor, Job monitor, Operator monitor, Identifier
monitor and Get all results.
ToolsTalk provides a number of monitors designed to present
extensive information about the various functions of the controller.

Trace

Click the Trace icon to bring up a graphical display of the tightening

results. With the Trace function it is possible to view tightening
graphs with different display settings..

Statistic

Click on the Statistic icon to display statistical results and graphs.

Using the arrow to the right it is possible to select a statistic to run.

PF Map

This icon opens the PF Map if it is closed.

Connect

The Connect icon changes appearance depending on the connection

status. When the PCis not in contact with the controller, this icon is
visible. Clicking on it establishes a connection between the PC and
the controller. Choose connection in "selected controller" list
(ToolsTalk menu list).

9836 3123 01

Getting started with ToolsTalk

Icon

5.2.4

Name

Description

Disconnect

Once a connection is established this icon appears. Clicking on it

disconnects the PC from the controller.

Help

This icon opens the Help section.

PF Map

The PF Map gives an overview of and shortcuts to all settings in ToolsTalk. Expand and collapse to open
and close menus and double click on function names (Pset, Multistage, Job, etc) to open the corresponding
function. Right-click the function names to create a new instance of the function.
Brief information about the selected setting is displayed in the right panel of the PF Map.

9836 3123 01

69

Getting started with ToolsTalk

5.3

Configuring ToolsTalk settings

This section describes some of the available ToolsTalk settings. The following settings are located in the
Settings dialog box. The settings are configurable off-line.

Setup for communication with the controller

Setup for viewing information inside the ToolsTalk application
Printout setup
Administration of the PF list
On the menu bar, open Options>Settings.

70

9836 3123 01

Getting started with ToolsTalk

5.3.1

Communication

The Communication tab has four areas; View event setup, Serial setup, Ethernet setup and LOG.

In the View event setup area, make selections for viewing controller errors and warnings.
In the Serial setup area, select which Com port to use on the computer, normally Com1 or Com2, for communication with the controller. The Baud rate can be set to 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 155200.
Note! The TTPF baud rate must match the baud rate set in the controller. The default value is 9600.
In the Ethernet setup area, enter the data for the controller. The Port number is default 6543 and does not
normally need to be changed. If using an item from the PF list (PF available list) then all three parameters
(type, port, IP) are set simultaneously.
Note! To edit Ethernet setup parameters, ToolsTalk has to be in disconnected mode.
In the LOG area, enable the log function for communication between the controller and ToolsTalk. Messages
are stored in the file stated in the log file area. Create rules for logging by clicking the Advanced key.

9836 3123 01

71

Getting started with ToolsTalk

If Split log in the Advanced log settings is activated the size of log.txt file can not exceed the value set in
Log file size. When the file is full, the program copies the contents to a file called log~.txt and erase the
content of log.txt. Data will then continue to be stored in log.txt.

5.3.2

Application

The Application tab has three areas; Presentation, Automatic functionality, and Default directory.

72

9836 3123 01

Getting started with ToolsTalk

The first area concerns the ToolsTalk presentation.

If the Show hints checkbox is selected, the limits for each parameter are displayed in the status bar when
the cursor is placed over a parameter box.

If the Show parameter number checkbox is selected, all parameter numbers are displayed in the windows.
If the Show VIN in result checkbox is selected, the result parts selected in the Identifier function are displayed in the Result monitor.
The Automatic functionality area activates/deactivates the following functions:

Auto collapse tree views

Type of connection at startup: If Serial auto connection on startup or Ethernet auto connection on startup
is checked, ToolsTalk connects to the controller immediately on start-up.

9836 3123 01

73

Getting started with ToolsTalk

If the Auto store PF to file on disconnect box is checked, ToolsTalk stores the PF data to file when disconnecting.
In the Default directory area, specify where the log files and auto stored PF files are saved.

5.3.3

Printout

The Printout tab contains printout settings.

Text entered in the Printout footer field appears on every printed paper.
In the Printout format and Printout colors areas, make settings for printout.

74

9836 3123 01

Getting started with ToolsTalk

5.3.4

PF List

The PF List tab contains the PF available list box. Add, modify and remove items from here. PF Ethernet
type defines controllers in the net, seen from ToolsTalk. Note that the configuration of the controller in the
net is made from PF Map>Controller>Network.

5.4

Connecting the PC to the controller

The PC can be connected to the controller by using any of the following options:

USB cable
Serial cable
Ethernet cable (only available for Power Focus 4000 and Pulsor Focus)

9836 3123 01

75

Getting started with ToolsTalk

5.4.1

Ethernet connection

To make an Ethernet connection between the controller and Tools Talk, the controller must be configured
with a unique IP address. This address must be stored in Tools Talk.

5.4.1.1

Setting IP address in controller

Do either of the following:

1. Connect a PC to the controller through serial connection. Follow the instructions in section Network or
set the IP-address in the controller from ToolsTalk.

2. Use the keypad directly on the controller. For PF Compact, select F3 and enter the IP address.
3. For PF Graph, press PROG and open the Controller>Network>Ethernet branch. Enter the IP-address.
5.4.1.2

Storing controller IP address in Tools Talk

1. From the Options menu, open the Settings dialog box. Do either of the following:
2. Click the Communication tab, Ethernet setup area, type the Controller IP address of the controller to
connect to. Also click the option for NetMaster, CellMaster or Controller.

3. Click the PF List tab, and create a list of controllers. Note: To configure a cell or net, see section Network
4. Save the settings and proceed to section To connect.

5.4.2

Serial connection
N
e!ot

When using the serial connection, it is important to use the proper baud rate settings. To establish a connection
between ToolsTalk and the controller they must use the same baud rate. The default baud rate is set to 9600
bit/s.

1. Make sure that the serial cable is connected to the correct Com port on the computer and to Serial RS 232
(2) on the controller.

2. From the Options menu, open the Settings dialog box. Check the Baud rate for the computer Com port.
3. Open PF Map>Controller>COM ports and check the settings for the controller, Serial 2 C410 Baud rate.
4. Save the settings and proceed to section To connect.

5.4.3

USB connection

The USB connection is found below the front panel of the Power Focus 4000 and Pulsor Focus.

76

9836 3123 01

Getting started with ToolsTalk

1. Connect a USB cable between the controller and the computer (controller acts as USB device). An extra
COM port should now be visible on the computer. Open ToolsTalk and connect serially via the extra
COM port.

2. Prior to using USB connection, FTDIs virtual COM port (VCP) drivers should be installed. The V.2.08.14
of the file is used for Windows 7, Vista, XP and 2000.

1. Run the CDM20814_Setup.exe file.

2. Click Run.
3. The driver has been installed when the following console window disappears.
4. A virtual COM port will appear when connecting to the USB on the controller to the computer. Select
that COM port when running Tools Talk.
N
e!ot

If using a different OS than above or to get the latest version of drivers, this driver can be download from:
http://www.ftdichip.com/Drivers/VCP.htm.
Also a detailed installation guides are available from: http://www.ftdichip.com/Documents/InstallGuides.htm
.
Contact Atlas Copco representative to obtain more information about available drivers.

5.4.4

Connecting controller and ToolsTalk

There are several ways to connect a controller from ToolsTalk:

Select Focus in the Menu list and then choose between Serial connection and Ethernet connection.
In the drop-down list for Selected controller in Selection panel, click on either Serial PF or Ethernet
PF.

In the PF Map, double-click on the controller under Serial PF or Ethernet PF.

Use the Connect icon on the Toolbar. By default, this icon creates a serial connection. However, it remembers the most recent connection.

Use predefined controller units from the PF List in the Selection panel.

5.4.5

Disconnecting controller and ToolsTalk

To disconnect, click on the Disconnect icon on the Toolbar or select Disconnect in the Menu list (Focus >
Ethernet/serial > PF name > Disconnect).

9836 3123 01

77

Getting started with ToolsTalk

5.4.6

Cordless tools (only Power Focus)

If the Power Focus is connected serially to an IRC-module for communication with a cordless tool, special
considerations must be taken before serial or USB connection can be established with ToolsTalk.

The parameter T294 Serial connection in the Tool Configuration->Connection menu must be set to Internal.
The baud rate as mentioned in section xxx must be set the same on the PF 4000 as on TTPF.
If an IRC Focus is used, the serial connection is available for other use than the cordless tool communication, so no special consideration is needed.

5.5

Storing programming on file

To store the programmed settings on file, open the File menu. The following options are available:

Read <object>
Read PF from File
Save <object>
Store PF to File
<Object> could be a section in the PF Map, for instance in Pset, Job, Controller, Tool, Identifier, FieldBus,
Trace or Statistics.
Option

Description

Store PF to File

Programmed settings in the the controller are stored to a file when connected to a
controller.

Read PF from File

The controller updates with programmed settings stored on file when connected to a
controller and performing Read PF from file.

T NOTICE!

Read PF from file overwrites current programming and configuration

in the connected PF.
Save
<object>(Config,
Pset, Job etc.)

This function stores a single object to file. The selected window in ToolsTalk is stored
to file.

Read <object
>(Config, Pset, Job
etc.)

This function writes a single object file to the controller. The selected window is updated
with data from the file.

78

9836 3123 01

Getting started with ToolsTalk

5.5.1

Store PF to file

When performing Store PF to File, the user should name the file. ToolsTalk stores the programmed settings
for more than one file (for example one file for each Pset and Job).
When storing PF to file, it is possible to store files in Excel format. Select Excel as file format in the Save
as dialogue. The overhead file has the extension pft. Extensions for the other stored files are xls.
Open ToolsTalk and connect to PF.
On the Menu bar, open File>Store PF to file.
A Save as dialog box appears. State target, type name and
save the PF text file (*.pf3).
A Confirmation message is displayed.
The "PF Text file" should be used for the restoring of data
when the memory setup is done.

5.5.2

Read PF from file

T NOTICE! Command "Read PF from file" overwrites

current programming and configuration in connected PF.
It is necessary to perform Read PF from file TWO times
and reboot PF one extra time for changes to take effect.
Open ToolsTalk and connect to PF.
On the Menu bar, open File>Read PF from file.
See also Service log in Menu list.

9836 3123 01

79

Getting started with ToolsTalk

A Confirm pop up window informs that restoring from

file will replace everything on the controller.
Select Yes to continue.
Select No to abort operation.
Read Selection window appears.

Select functions to restore. An unchecked box means no

replacement of data in that function area.
Click OK to confirm.
A Confirm pop up window appears.
Select Yes to keep present controller name and Network
setup.
Select No to restore controller name and network setup
from file.

5.6

Working offline

Offline mode gives the user the opportunity to conduct programming and configuration without being connected to a controller unit. All programming will be stored to or read from a file. This file can be copied to
one or more controller units.
There are three different ways to select the Offline mode:

In the main Menu list, select Focus>Offline.

In the Selected controller drop down menu, select Offline.
In the PF Map, double-click Offline.
The file can be located on the local hard drive, network, etc. There is a certain number of default files supplied
when installing ToolsTalk PF. Also, find these files separately on the ToolsTalk PF installation CD-ROM.
Depending on the RBU license level; just select the file to use. The different RBU types correspond to the
names of the default files (DS.pf3, Gold.pf3, Silver.pf3 and Bronze.pf3). It is recommended to make
a backup of these files.

80

9836 3123 01

Getting started with ToolsTalk

Select a file with the same license level as the controller. ToolsTalk
opens the selected file and enables the user to change it.
It is possible to continue to change the content of a file with a higher
RBU license level, but when trying to use the file with a controller
with a lower license level a warning message is generated.Note: It
is also possible to modify the current configuration. Before
disconnecting, use command File>Store PF to File to store the
current configuration file. To upload the file, connect the controller
and select File>Read PF from File.

5.6.1

Configuring a tool offline

1. In offline mode, open Tool>Information in the PF Map.

2. Click Set tool. The Set tool window appears.
3. Select a tool or configure a new tool via the Create tool key.

9836 3123 01

81

Getting started with ToolsTalk

5.7

Miscellaneous ToolsTalk tasks

5.7.1

New user for an existing ToolsTalk installation

When a new user is added to the computer running ToolsTalk , the PF List may be inaccessible due to user
access rights or due to the list being stored in an unexpected folder or with an unexpected filename. This
section describes how you point out the PF list you want to use for an existing ToolsTalk installation.

82

9836 3123 01

Getting started with ToolsTalk

In the settings window, click on the PF

List tab.
Click on the Change file button.

Select file "PF3000List.txt" or, if the file

is located elsewhere, browse to find the
correct directory.
Click Open.
Choose OK to exit.

5.7.2

Connecting ToolsTalk to controller without network connection

When the controller is not connected to a network it is recommended to use a crossover Ethernet cable to
connect the computer running ToolsTalk to the controller. Follow the instructions below to configure the
computer and the controller.
Required hardware

A controller unit
A crossover Ethernet cable (RX/TX crossed)
A PC with an Ethernet connection (the PC is not connected to the network)

9836 3123 01

83

Getting started with ToolsTalk

Configuring the computer

Go into Windows network settings (e.g. Start - Settings - Network connections - Local area connection
on Windows XP.)

Select Properties and make sure that TCP/IP is marked. Double-click on it or mark it and select Properties.
Select the computer's "hard" IP address (often if you are connected to a network the choice "Select an IP
address automatically" is selected) such as 192.168.1.1 and specify a subnet mask e.g. 255.255.255.0).
DO NOT specify a default gateway.

Save the settings by clicking OK.

Configuring the controller

Make a serial connection via RS232 with the controller (required first time).
Go into the Controller menu and select Network.
Specify an IP address that is similar to (but not identical to) the one allocated to the computer such as
192.168.1.10. With the subnet mask above the three first numbers should be equal.

Specify a Subnet mask as above, i.e. 255.255.255.0.

DO NOT specify a default router (gateway). If there is one already, delete it. You should see 0.0.0.0.
Click on Store to save.
ToolsTalk displays a message that the controller should be rebooted.
Connecting

Close the ToolsTalk connection and reboot the computer if necessary.

Switch off the controller, wait at least 10 seconds and then switch it on again.
Connect ToolsTalk to the controller via the Ethernet (it may be necessary to enter your new connection
to the PF list) - this is done in Settings under the Options menu.

84

9836 3123 01

Pset

Pset

6.1

Introduction

9836 3123 01

85

Pset

The set of parameters that controls the tightening process is contained

within a Pset. This section describes how to setup the basic parameters
necessary to perform a tightening. Create a Pset by using Autoset, Quick
programming or by setting the parameter values manually using the
controller or ToolsTalk.
For a description on Pset programming for Pulsor C (Tool Setup,
Monitoring Setup, Tightening options and Monitoring) see chapter
Performing Tool Setup, Performing a Monitoring Setup and Tightening
and monitoring respectively.
For parameter description see Parameter list, Pset.

86

9836 3123 01

Pset

The basic Pset parameters are located under the Programming branch:

Control
Torque
Angle
Speed and ramp (Power Focus only)
Time
Rundown monitoring (Pulsor Focus only)
Batch count
High speed rundown (Power Focus only)
Positioning (Power Focus only)
Tool setup (Pulsor Focus only)
Monitoring setup (Pulsor Focus only)
Additional settings are found under Programming+, Pset setup and
Statistic programming.
An easy way to program a Pset is to use the Autoset function (Power
Focus only).
Tool Setup is intended to help users to quickly set up a tool. After

completing a Tool Setup procedure, the tool is ready to use for tightening.
Monitoring Setup is used to automatically generate monitoring of a set

of tightening parameters.
Programming help shows an image of the selected strategy.

Every time a Pset changes, the ID of the person changing the Pset is
stored in P409 PSet updated by. This information is useful for tracing
who has made the last change in any given PSet. If no user has logged
in the filed values are: TTPF if changed via ToolsTalk, OPER if changed
via the controller, and BLANK if the Pset has been created in an earlier
version of the software. (For being able to log users this functionality
requires a special software called ToolsUserAdmin, which handles the
access level for users via TTPF.)
All Pset changes are reflected in ToolsNet.

9836 3123 01

87

Pset

6.2

Creating new Pset/Opening Pset

In the PF Map, right-click and select Create

New Pset.
Alternatively, double-click or right click on
an existing Pset, to open the Pset configuration
window.
N
e!ot

By default there is one Pset existing in

ToolsTalk.
The Create new Pset window pops up.
Select available New Pset ID from drop down
menu.
Enter a New Pset Name (optional).
Click OK to open the new Pset setup window.
Continue with Autoset, Quick Programming
or Programming.
Select the Pset in the Selection panel in
ToolsTalk. This last step will activate the Pset.
N
e!ot

The Pset can not be used until a Tool Setup

has been performed for the Pset.

88

9836 3123 01

Pset

6.3

Autoset

An easy way to program a Pset is to use the

Autoset function. Power Focus adapts the
programming to the specific joint
characteristics and sets all the parameters
automatically. Autoset does not change any
parameters outside the used Pset.
Autoset uses P100 Control strategy DS con
for DS tools and Tq con/ang mon for all other
tools. Autoset can only be selected:

When a tool is connected

When PF is switched on
On the running Pset (displayed in the
selection panel)
Note!

If using an existing Pset, the parameters are

erased and replaced by the Autoset calculated
parameters.
Click Autoset in the Pset window.
A green light on the front panel of the PF indicates that Autoset is activated. When this signal is shut
off, Autoset is finished and PF is now programmed for that joint. The Autoset procedure can be aborted
by clicking cancel before the green light shuts off.
Enter the P113 Final target value and click
OK.

9836 3123 01

89

Pset

Perform a number of tightenings with the tool.

The first two tightenings are completed at very
low speed. Normally, three to ten tightenings
are required in order for the Power Focus to
calculate and set the required parameters for
the specific joint characteristics.
Click OK when prompted.
Clicking Abort before the Autoset procedure is completed cancels the operation and restores the
previous settings.

6.4

Quick programming

Quick programming is intended to help users

to quickly configure a Pset and gives the
opportunity to use the Power Focus after a fast
and simple programming.
The joint angle is the distance from when the
screw (nut) head touches the surface and the
torque starts to build up, until it reaches the
set limit. It is possible to measure the joint
angle by using a torque wrench.
For hard joints, it is best to set the value at 30 degrees. For soft joints we recommend setting the joint
angle above 100 degrees. This gives a better tightening during the first stage and a distinct second
stage. Adjust the angle if the second stage is too long. It is important that there is a second stage;
otherwise the tool may jerk at full torque (overshoot).
N
e!ot

If using an existing Pset, the parameters are erased and replaced by the Autoset calculated parameters.
For quick programming, the final target value must be larger or equal to 25 percent of T102 Tool max
torque.

90

9836 3123 01

Pset

Open an existing Pset or create a new one.

Click Quick programming in the Pset window.
Select P100 Control strategy and enter the
joint angle and P113 Final target.
Click OK to finish.

6.5

Programming help

Via the Programming help function ToolsTalk

PF can illustrate an example of the selected
control and tightening strategy.
Click Programming help in the Pset window.

6.6

Programming

Power Focus

In the Pset setup window, expand

the Programming branch.
Select control.

9836 3123 01

91

Pset

Choose the desired P100 Control strategy, P101 Tightening strategy and settings for the other parameters.
For more information, see sections Control strategies, Tightening strategies and Additional control
options.

In the Pset Programming branch, select Torque or Angle.

Make suitable parameter settings.

92

9836 3123 01

Pset

In the Pset Programming branch, select Speed and ramp, or Time.

Make suitable parameter settings.

9836 3123 01

93

Pset

In the Pset Programming branch, select Batch count, High speed rundown, Positioning or Snug
gradient.
Make suitable parameter settings.
Click Store to save the settings.

94

9836 3123 01

Pset

6.7

Control strategies

For all Tq con and DS con tightenings the process starts when the torque reaches P110 Cycle start. When
the torque reaches target and then falls below P115 Cycle complete the process ends. When the torque drops
9836 3123 01

95

Pset

below P115 Cycle complete without having reached target before, a timer is started. In this case, if the torque
does not increase above P115 Cycle complete during P141 End time seconds, the process ends.
For Reverse ang the tightening process also starts when the torque reaches P110 Cycle start.
For Rotate spindle forward/reverse the tightening process starts immediately when the tool starts running.
The P123 Target angle is defined by P121 Measure angle to and can be measured from P120 Start final
angle to Torque peak, Angle peak, P115 Cycle complete, or Shut off.
N
e!ot
P124 Final angle max is always evaluated from P120 Start final angle to angle peak.

For cordless tools some of the control strategies and options are not available. Please consult the relevant
tool manuals for more information.

6.7.1

Tq con

The Tq con strategy controls the torque. This

strategy is selectable for both one stage and two
stage tightenings. The tool stops when the torque
reaches the P113 Final target.

Torque

2.
3.

If, for some reason, the tool should exceed P114

Final tq max, the tool shuts off and the (NOK)
tightening result is shown.

1.

Angle
1. P112 Final torque min
2. P114 Final torque max
3. P113 Final target

96

9836 3123 01

Pset

6.7.2

Tq con/ang mon

The Tq con/ang mon strategy controls the torque

and monitors the angle. This strategy is selectable
for both one and two stage tightenings. The tool
stops when the torque reaches the P113 Final target
value.

Torque

2.
3.
1.

If the tool for some reason should exceed P114

Final tq max or P124 Final angle max, the tool
shuts off and the (NOK) tightening result is shown.

4.

5.

Angle
1. P112 Final torque min
2. P114 Final torque max
3. P113 Final target

6.7.3

4. P122 Final angle min

5. P124 Final angle max

Ang con/tq mon

Ang con/tq mon strategy controls the angle and

monitors the torque. This strategy is selectable for
both one and two stage tightenings. P123 Target
angle is then defined as the number of degrees
between P120 Start final angle and angle peak. The
tool stops at P123 Target angle.

Torque

6.
2.

1.
4.

If the tool for some reason should exceed P114

Final tq max or P124 Final angle max, the tool
shuts off and the (NOK) tightening results are
shown.

9836 3123 01

5.

Angle
1. P112 Final torque min
2. P114 Final torque max

4. P122 Final angle min

5. P124 Final angle max
6. P123 Target angle

97

Pset

6.7.4

Tq con/ang con (AND) / (OR)

The Tq con/ang con (AND)/ (OR) strategy controls

both torque and angle. This strategy is selectable
for both one and two stage tightenings.

Torque

6.
2.

For Tq con/ang con (AND), Power Focus controls

the P113 Final target value and the P123 Target
angle value. The tool stops when both targets are
reached. They do not have to be reached at the
same time.

3.
1.
4.

5.

Angle

For Tq con/ang con (OR), Power Focus controls

the P113 Final target value and the P123 Target
angle value. The tool stops when the first of these
two targets are reached.

1. P112 Final torque min

2. P114 Final torque max
3. P113 Final target

4. P122 Final angle min

5. P124 Final angle max
6. P123 Target angle

For both Tq con/ang con (AND) and Tq con/ang con (OR) the torque and the angle result must be
within respective min and max limit.
If, for some reason, the tool should exceed P114 Final tq max or P124 Final angle max, the tool shuts
off and the (NOK) tightening results are shown.

98

9836 3123 01

Pset

6.7.5

Reverse ang

The Reverse ang strategy reverses the spindle a

specified number of degrees in the opposite tool
tightening direction. This is useful when, for
example, the bolt needs to be loosened before the
final tightening. Create a Multistage to combine
and perform several Psets as one.

Torque

3.

2.

1.

4.
5.

P123 Target angle is defined as the number of

degrees between the P120 Start final angle and the
peak angle. The tool stops at P123 Target angle.

Angle
1. P123 Target angle
2. P120 Start final angle
3. P114 Final torque max
4. P122 Final angle min
5. P124 Final angle max

If the tool for some reason should exceed P114 Final tq max or P124 Final angle max, the tool shuts
off and the (NOK) tightening results are shown. The torque value shown in the result is torque at peak
angle. Angle measurement starts when the P120 Start final angle is reached.
Note!

For reverse ang, the active direction of the tool socket rotation is the opposite of the P240 Tool
tightening direction. For instance, to select CW turn the Direction ring to the left position. For safety
reasons, it is not possible to loosen the joint in this way.

9836 3123 01

99

Pset

6.7.6

Rotate spindle forward/reverse

The rotate spindle forward/reverse functions rotate

the spindle a specified number of degrees, either
forward or reverse, independently of torque. The
only torque values monitored are P114 Final tq
max and P112 Final tq min. P123 Target angle is
defined as the number of degrees between start of
tightening and the peak angle. The tool stops at
P123 Target angle.

Torque
2.
7.
1.

Time
Angle

If, for some reason, the tool should exceed P114

Final tq max or P124 Final angle max, the tool
shuts off and the (NOK) tightening results are
shown.

5.

4.

7.

6.

Time
1. P112 Final torque min
2. P114 Final torque max

4. P122 Final angle min

5. P124 Final angle max
6. P123 Target angle
7. Acceptance window

Note!

The tightening process begins when the trigger is pressed.

For rotate spindle reverse, the active direction of the tool socket rotation is the opposite of the P240
Tool tightening direction. For instance, if CW is selected turn the direction ring to the left position.
For safety reasons, it is not possible to loosen the joint with this strategy.

6.7.7

Click wrench

Select the Click wrench function if the Power Focus result data base should include a click wrench or
a non-tightening operation in the work process, such as ocular inspections or the filling of fluid
containers.
It is possible to configure four independent click wrench operations. A click wrench Pset consists of
a P107 Click wrench no, P113 Final target only. Each P107 Click wrench no. is associated with one
digital input. Activating the digital input indicates to PF that the specified operation has been performed.
Use P113 Final target to set the torque result level for click wrench operations.
Note!

Resulting torque is the final target set by the Pset.

100

9836 3123 01

Pset

6.7.8

Home position forward and reverse

The home position function, suitable for fixtured

tools, makes it possible to mark a socket position
using the Set home position digital input. When
triggered, the socket rotates (CW for Home position
forward or CCW for Home position reverse) to the
home position. The digital output Home position
is triggered when the position is reached. The only
torque values monitored are P114 Final tq max and
P112 Final tq min. The home position function is
not available for open-end tools.

Torque
2.
7.
1.

Time
Angle
5.

4.

6.

If, for some reason, the tool should exceed P114

Final tq max or P124 Final angle max, the tool
shuts off and the (NOK) tightening results are
shown.
Time
1. P112 Final torque min
2. P114 Final torque max

4. P122 Final angle min

5. P124 Final angle max
6. Acceptance window

Note!

The tightening process begins when the trigger is pressed.

Note!

This strategy is suitable only for tools which are dedicated for fixtured solutions and full repeatability
can not be guaranteed for normal tools.

6.7.9

Yield control (Yield)

Yield control is activated by selecting the P100 Control strategy to Yield. The P101 Tightening strategy
can be set to One stage, Two stage or Quickstep. Yield control interacts in the second stage of the
tightening. P105 Zoom step strategy ending is eliminated when yield control is selected.
The settings for Yield are found under Programming+. For more information, see Yield control in
section Programming+.

9836 3123 01

101

Pset

6.7.10

Yield/Tq con (OR)

Select Yield/Tq con (OR) in P100 Control strategy.

In addition to the settings for Yield (see Yield
control in section Programming+) a final target is
set. The tool stops when P113 Final target is
reached if the yield function has not stopped the
tool before.

Torque

P113 Final target

Angle

102

9836 3123 01

Pset

6.7.11

DS con

The DS con function controls the torque based on

the current measurement and monitors the angle.
This function is selectable for two stage tightenings
only. The tool stops when the torque reaches the
P113 Final target value.

Torque

7.

If the tool for some reason should exceed P124

Final angle max, the tool shuts off and the (NOK)
tightening result is shown.

3.
1.
4.

5.

Angle
1. P112 Final torque min
3. P113 Final target

4. P122 Final angle min

5. P124 Final angle max
7. Acceptance window

T WARNING When programming the DS control strategy it is of greatest importance to have

a well-developed second stage. The fastener/socket should allow some angle rotation in the second
stage of the tightening, or else the torque may overshoot. The best way to determine this is simply
by observing the angle rotation during the second stage.
If the tool overshoots, a red toggling LED is displayed on the tool. The criteria for overshoot are a
short or a non-existing second stage in combination with a high speed in the first stage. On the display
event code E003 Torque measurement possibly invalid is visible.
Torque tuning is performed either from the PF Graph user interface, ToolsTalk PF or automatically
with ACTA 4000. It allows an easy adjustment to the reference system torque values (e.g. ACTA
4000) and compensates for tool-drive-programming and joint variations. One torque-tuning factor is
stored with each Pset. When a tool is controlled against an external torque reference for calibration, it
is recommended to calculate a new torque tuning value. There is one Torque-tuning factor for each
Pset (when changing Pset settings a new torque tuning factor is needed):
Perform a number of tightenings with the external torque gauge connected, preferably 20 tightenings
or more to achieve a good mean value.

Calculate the mean value from the tightenings

New TorqueTuning Factor ?

Final Target
? Old Torque Tuning Factor
Measured Mean

Enter and store the new DS torque tuning factor

Perform another set of tightenings to control the torque
If the torque is OK it is possible to run. If not, do the complete procedure over again.
9836 3123 01

103

Pset

6.7.12

DS con/tq mon

The DS con/tq mon function controls the torque

based on the current measurement and monitors
the transducer based torque. It also monitors the
angle. This strategy is selectable for two stage
tightenings only. The tool stops when the current
based torque reaches the P113 Final target value.

Torque

2.
3.
1.
4.

If the tool for some reason should exceed P114

Final tq max and P124 Final angle max, the tool
shuts off and the (NOK) tightening result is shown.

6.7.13

5.

Angle
1. P112 Final torque min
2. P114 Final torque max
3. P113 Final target

4. P122 Final angle min

5. P124 Final angle max

Snug gradient

The Snug gradient strategy runs the specified P123

Target angle from the observed Snug point. Snug
gradient controls the angle and monitors the torque.
This strategy is selectable for both one and two
stage tightening.
The Snug gradient is the slope calculated by P180
Delta angle and P181 Delta torque. The Snug point
is defined as the position followed by two
subsequent slopes larger than the specified Snug
gradient. As soon as two subsequent slopes are
larger than the Snug gradient the Snug-point is
found. From this point, the spindle runs the
specified P123 Target angle.

2
Snug point
2

1
2

Angle

4
3. P182 Torque limit
4. P123 Target angle

1. P110 Cycle start

2. P180 Delta angle

Torque

Snug gradient

If the tool should exceed P182 Torque limit without

finding the Snug point, the tool shuts off and the
(NOK) tightening results are shown.

3
2

Snug point
3
1

2
2

1. P110 Cycle start

2. P180 Delta angle

104

Angle
3. P181 Delta torque

9836 3123 01

Pset

6.7.14

PVT comp with snug

This tightening strategy is a development of the

existing PVT comp strategy described in 7.8.4.
This strategy is useful when the PVT comp torque
level is higher than P113 Final target.

Snug point
P185 compensate value
Peak
Average

The PVT compensate value is retrieved using the

Snug gradient method described above for finding
the snug point and then calculating the torque
compensate value defined by following parameters.

P110
Cycle
start

2
3

P183 PVT distance: a point a defined angle

backwards from Snug point
P184 PVT interval: an angle interval during
which the comp value shall be calculated

1. P186 Delay monitoring after cycle start

2. P184 PVT interval
3. P183 PVT distance
4. P113 Final target
5. Final target + PVT compensate value
6. P190 PVT min monitoring limit
7. P191 PVT max monitoring limit
8. P182 Torque limit

P185 Compensate value: option 'Peak' or 'Average'

torque value within the interval.
P182 Torque limit: defines the upper limit of the
torque range where search for snug is performed.
P186 Delay monitoring after cycle start: is a
parameter for filtering out a certain angle in the
beginning of a tightening where monitoring for a
certain 'gradient' is not interesting. (Useful when
the gradient is high at cycle start etc.).
If P182 Torque limit is reached before snug has been found, the tightening will stop and the result will
be NOK.
After finding the snug point and the PVT comp value, the torque defined by P113 Final target is added
to the PVT comp value for reaching a total torque target. The achieved torque and the PVT comp value
are presented as in existing PVT comp strategy (i.e. dependent on C503).
If any of the torque values measured while searching after Snug point are lower than Snug PVT
monitoring min (P190) or higher than Snug PVT monitoring max (P191) the tightening shall stop when
Snug is found.
The presented final angle in the result is measured from the snug point.

9836 3123 01

105

Pset

6.7.15

4-step tq con/4-step ang con

4-step control strategies are available with W14 license. Two new control strategies are available with the
4-step principle:

torque controlled
angle controlled
With these strategies the user can achieve a more advanced control of the complete tightening. The relationship
between torque and angle is controlled and monitored in more phases throughout the fastening and, as the
name describes, it is done in four steps within the complete fastening. The 4-step control strategies makes it
possible to abort a tightening as soon as a violation of the control parameters occur. If a fastening is aborted
in the first phase (the soft start angle) the user can make appropriate action for the particular fastening application without damaging the complete joint.
Torque

12
11

IV

9
10

13

14

III
6

7
1

II

Angle
4

I) Step 1 Soft start II) Step 2 Rundown

(Angle con/ Torque (Torque con / Angle
mon)
mon)
1. P271 Soft start
angle torque max
2. P270 Soft start
angle

3. P116 Rundown
complete

s017162

3
2

III) Step 3 First target IV) Step 4 Final

(Torque con / Angle
target/angle
mon)
Final target (Torque con /
6. P111 First target
Angle mon)

7. P272 First target angle 9. P113 Final target

4. P125 Rundown angle min
10. P112 Final torque min
min
8. P273 First target angle
11. P114 Final torque max
5. P126 Rundown angle max
max
Final angle (Angle con /
Torque mon)
12. P123 Target angle
13. P122 Final angle min
14. P124 Final angle max

106

9836 3123 01

Pset

1:st step: An Ang con / Tq mon step:

P270 Soft start angle is a new parameter that is entered as an angle where the fastening process

shall be regarded as started. Hereby the torque level is monitored and the fastening process is not
allowed to continue if it exceeds the parameter P271 Soft start angle torque max value. If that
happens, the event E222 Soft start angle torque max reached is triggered
2:nd step: A Tq con / Ang mon step
Rundown complete angle is montiored as in a normal control strategy using rundown angle. However
the angle measurement is started when the fastening process has reached the configured P270 Soft
start angle value.
3:d step: A Tq con / Ang mon step
The first target is controlled as in a normal two stage control strategy. However, the parameters
P272 First target angle min and P273 First target angle max are new configurable parameters that
are monitored. The fastening process is not allowed to continue when the angle corresponding to
first target torque is outside these limits. If the angle is too high, the event E223 First target angle
max reached is triggered.
4:th step: A Tq con / Ang mon step or an Ang con / Tq mon step
If using the 4-step tq con strategy or the 4-step ang con strategy the final units are controlled and
monitored as in a normal Tq con strategy and a Ang con strategy respectively.
4-step strategies are available in Two stage and Quick step tightening strategies.
If a fastening from a 4-step control strategy is performed with an OK result, the fastening has
managed to pass all phases as described above. When the fastening is aborted in one of these phases
the result will clearly indicate in which phase it was aborted and for what reason.
Complete result values from all passed steps are available via Open protocol and via VW_XML
protocol.
The PF sends the following result parameters to ToolsNet:

Rundown angle torque

Soft start angle torque
First target torque
First target angle.

9836 3123 01

107

Pset

6.8

Tightening strategies

The Power Focus supports a number of different tightening strategies in order to achieve the best quality,
speed and ergonomic behavior. Both standard and proprietary patented strategies are supported. This section
provides a generic description of the tightening strategies available.

6.8.1

One stage

Tightening is performed in One stage until the P113

Final target torque has been reached.

Torque

2.

1.

6.

Time
3.
4.

1. P110 Cycle start

2. P113 Final target
3. P130 Soft start speed
4. P135 Step 1 ramp
5. P131 Step 1 speed
6. P115 Cycle complete

5.

Tool
speed

6.8.2

Two stage

In a Two stage tightening, the tool operates at high

speed during the first stage and a lower speed
during the second stage. The tool stops for about
50 milliseconds between the stages to reduce joint
relaxation and then accelerates for the second stage.

Torque

3.
2.

1.

10.

Time

In this example the strategy ends with a P105 Zoom

step, which reduces the risk of overshooting.

4.

7.

6.

Tool
speed

108

8.

9.

5.
1. P110 Cycle start
2. P111 First target
3. P113 Final target
4. P130 Soft start speed
5. P135 Step 1 ramp
6. P131 Step 1 speed
7. P136 Step 2 ramp
8. P132 Step 2 speed
9. P105 Zoom step
10. P115 Cycle complete

9836 3123 01

Pset

6.8.3

Quick step

Quick step is a type of two stages tightening with

high tool speed during the first stage and a lower
tool speed during the second stage. The speed
changes from first to second stage speed without
pausing in between.

Torque

3.
2.

1.

10.

Time

In this example the strategy ends with a P105 Zoom

step, which reduces the risk of overshooting.

4.
5.
7.
6.

Tool
speed

6.8.4

9.

8.

1. P110 Cycle start

2. P111 First target
3. P113 Final target
4. P130 Soft start speed
5. P135 Step 1 ramp
6. P131 Step 1 speed
7. P136 Step 2 ramp
8. P132 Step 2 speed
9. P105 Zoom step
10. P115 Cycle complete

Ergo ramp

Ergo ramp is a two stage tightening with a constant

increase of torque during the second stage. It is set
automatically using the programmed P137 Ergo
ramp value and the hardness of the joint.

Torque

3.
2.

4.

1.

This strategy has the ergonomic advantage of

giving the user the same reaction torque in the
second step for both soft and hard joints when using
the same Pset.
In this example, the strategy ends with a P105
Zoom step, which reduces the risk of overshooting.

6.8.5

Time
5.

Tool
speed

Hard joint
Soft joint

1. P110 Cycle start

2. P111 First target
3. P113 Final target
4. P137 Ergoramp
5. P105 Zoom step

Additional control options

9836 3123 01

109

Pset

6.8.5.1

Rundown angle

The Rundown angle option monitors the angle at P116 Rundown complete.
If the P104 Rundown angle option From start is selected the rundown phase starts when the tool trigger is
pressed. If P104 Rundown angle option From cycle start is selected the rundown phase starts when the torque
exceeds P110 Cycle start. The acceptance window for the rundown angle is set with the P125 Rundown
angle min and P126 Rundown angle max.

6.8.5.2

Zoom step

The Zoom step option reduces tool speed when the torque approaches P113 Final target. Tool speed is reduced
gradually towards the P138 Zoom step speed, which can be set between 2 and 20 percent of the maximum
speed. Zoom step produces very accurate results, low scatter and quick tightenings.

6.8.5.3

Combined Zoom step and Ergo ramp

By combining zoom step and ergo ramp, the advantages of both strategies is achieved. Tightenings are precise
and, at the same time, ergonomically correct for the operator.
Zoom step and ergo ramp strategies can be combined for most types of bolted joints.

6.8.6

Rehit detection

The rehit functionality is designed to detect re-tightenings of an already tightened joint, thereby avoiding
batch counting errors etc. Two parameters have been found to be good indicators of a so-called rehit, tool
speed and tightening angle. If, for two stage torque control tightenings, the tool does not get up to speed before
the first target occurs and the angle of the second stage is not great enough the rehit alarm is activated.
For two stage torque control tightenings, the speed must reach more than out of P131 Step 1 speed between
P110 Cycle start and P111 First target or the angle between P111 First target and P113 Final target must be
greater than 120 degrees to avoid a rehit alarm. For one stage tightenings, the speed at P110 Cycle start and
the angle between P110 Cycle start and P113 Final target are used as indicators.
The large angle interval required means that for most normal tightenings it is the speed condition that is met.
Only for very soft joints with a low P111 First target or one stage tightenings is the angle condition met.
For two stage angle control tightenings, the rehit alarm is activated if the tightening is aborted on P114 Final
tq max and the tool speed has not reached of the P131 Step 1 speed between P110 Cycle start and P111
First target. For one stage tightenings, the speed at P110 Cycle start is used as indicator.
The rehit functionality is valid for most, but not all, control strategies.

110

9836 3123 01

Pset

6.9

Programming+

Expand the Programming + branch.

This section has applications for additional Pset
functionality.
The Current monitoring includes parameters
regarding the motor current.
PVT selftap includes settings when the joint has a

torque peak at the start of the tightening.

PVT monitoring include settings where the

prevailing torque during the rundown phase is

monitored, and PVT compensate settings where it
is included in the calculation for the target torque.
The PVT options can be used together or
independently of each other.
The Options window includes settings for tool
tightening direction and some alarm settings, for
example.

9836 3123 01

111

Pset

6.9.1

Current monitoring

Select Current monitoring and make

suitable parameter settings.

The spindle torque is proportional to

the motor current. By measuring motor
current, a method of measurement that
is independent of the torque transducer
is achieved. The torque forming current
is expressed as a percentage of the
nominal current at T102 Tool max
torque. With P200 Current monitoring
selected it is possible to set an
acceptance window for the torque as a
redundant process control.

Torque
2.

3.
5.

1.

4.

Time
1. P201 CM min
2. P202 CM max
3. Acceptance window
4. Torque (transducer)
5. Torque (current)

112

9836 3123 01

Pset

6.9.2

PVT selftap

In the Pset Programming + branch,

select PVT selftap.
When the joint has a torque peak at the
start of the tightening it is recommended
to use the PVT selftap monitoring
option, P210 Selftap, to ensure that the
tightening achieves the right
characteristics.
PVT selftap also makes it possible to perform tightenings where the start torque is higher than the P113
Final target or P114 Final tq max.

The selftap interval starts at P110 Cycle start. During the P211 Selftap interval the torque has to reach at
least the P213 Selftap min level but must stay below the P214 Selftap max limit. The P214 Selftap max
is monitored in real time during the selftap interval. The P213 Selftap min value is evaluated against the
selftap interval peak value at the end of the interval.
To reduce the effects of noise, mean values are calculated from P212 Number of selftap windows. A
small number of windows means that more samples are grouped together, hence one odd sample has less
impact on the calculated mean value and vice versa. A high number of windows make the monitoring
more sensitive; a low number filters more noise.
Torque

4.
5.

1. P211 Selftap interval

2. P110 Cycle start
3. P213 Selftap min
4. P214 Selftap max
5. Acceptance window

3.

2.

1.

9836 3123 01

Angle

113

Pset

6.9.3

PVT monitoring

In the Pset Programming + branch,

select PVT monitoring.
PVT monitoring is used when the joint
torque has to pass through an
acceptance window prior to P116
Rundown complete in order to pass as
a correct tightening.

With P220 PVT monitoring selected, an acceptance window for the torque before P116 Rundown complete
is set. The P225 PVT max limit is monitored in real time during the P222 PVT monitor interval. The tool
stops immediately if this limit is exceeded. The P224 PVT min limit is evaluated against the monitor
interval average value at the end of the interval. Monitoring starts at cycle start or after selftap interval.
To reduce the effect of noise, the mean values are calculated from P223 No of PVT windows. A high
number of windows make the monitoring more sensitive; a low number filters more noise.
Torque

1. P221 PVT delay interval

2. P222 PVT monitor interval
3. P224 PVT min limit
4. P225 PVT max limit
5. Acceptance window
6. P110 Cycle start

4.
6.

5.

3.

Angle
1.

114

2.

9836 3123 01

Pset

6.9.4

PVT compensate

In the Pset Programming + branch,

select PVT compensate.

Via the PVT compensate function, PF allows the P111 First target, P113 Final target and P114 Final tq
max to be compensated for the prevailing torque during the rundown phase.
The PVT compensation value is calculated at P116 Rundown complete as an average torque from an
interval preceding the P231 PVT comp point. The PVT compensation value is used as a base reference
for the torque used during tightening, and the torque levels can change dynamically for each new tightening.
When setting P231 PVT comp point larger than the total performed angle at rundown complete,
the tightening will be aborted and the error PVT compensate overflow is triggered.

As default, the tightening results are presented with the compensation value subtracted, but can be presented
with PVT compensation value added by checking the box C503 Torque with PVT comp.
Torque
1. P116 Rundown complete
2. P231 PVT comp point
3. Compensation value
4. Final torque with compensation value added
5. Final torque
6. First torque with compensation value added
7. First torque

4.

5.
2.
6.
3.
1.

7.

3.

Angle

9836 3123 01

115

Pset

6.9.5

116

Options

9836 3123 01

Pset

In the Pset Programming + branch,

select Options.
Make suitable parameter settings.
See parameter list section Pset for
information on parameters P241-P247.
P240 see below.

9836 3123 01

117

Pset
Tool rotation direction

T WARNING If different tightening directions are used on the same tool, there is a risk that the
operator will use the wrong direction for a specific screw. This could lead to unexpected reaction
forces in the tool that could be dangerous for the operator.
There are different variables that control the tool rotation direction: tool direction ring, P240 Tool tightening
direction and P101 Tightening strategy.
Tightening a screw or nut is in accordance with the selected P100 Control strategy. Loosening is equal
to reversing the screw or nut. Loosening speed and ramp can be programmed. Reverse is a control strategy
that loosens the screw or nut a programmed number of degrees. The direction is always the opposite of
the tightening direction.
The position of the tool direction ring at the time the tool trigger is pressed decides the direction of rotation.
If the ring is in the right position, the tool rotates clockwise (CW), and counter clockwise (CCW) if the
ring is in the left position. However, the direction does not change if the direction ring is moved while
the tool is running.
With the parameter P240 Tool tightening direction the default tightening direction of the tool is selected.
This means that the tool tightens the joint clockwise (right-hand threaded joints) if CW is selected and
the direction ring is in the right position. Select "CCW" for counter clockwise tightenings.
The direction ring adjusts the rotation direction of the tool socket, while parameter P240 Tool
tightening direction decides whether it is a right- or left-handed threaded joint.

With regard to reverse angle or rotate spindle reverse, the active direction is the opposite from the P240
Tool tightening direction. For instance, if CW is to be selected turn the direction ring to the left position.
For safety reasons, it is not possible to loosen the joint with these strategies.
The remote start input is connected in parallel with the tool trigger and has the same functionality. If
remote start input is used the tool trigger is disabled.
If a digital input is used as start signal input, the direction ring and trigger on the tool are bypassed and
the tool starts tightening in the direction programmed in the parameter P240 Tool tightening direction.
The fieldbus tool start input works in the same way as the tool start from digital input. The 4-pin connector
must be wired correctly.
The 4-pin connector on Power Focus back panel must be wired correctly.
Do not use tool start from digital input via an I/O Expander on a Synchronized tool group. Use
only the four internal digital inputs. decides whether it is a right- or left-handed threaded joint.
Remote start is not available for Tensor STB tools.

118

9836 3123 01

Pset

For information on setting of P245 DS torque tuning factor, see section DS con.

6.9.6

Gradient monitoring

In the Pset Programming + branch,

select Gradient monitoringto find
additional parameters for monitoring
joint hardness.
Make suitable parameter settings.

With P250 Gradient monitoring selected, monitoring starts when P254 Start torque and P255 Angle offset
are reached.
The gradient is defined as the mean torque difference between each interval as defined by the parameter
P253 Joint hardness. A lower value indicates a hard joint and a higher value a soft joint. The calculated
gradient is evaluated against P251 Gradient torque min and P252 Gradient torque max.
When this function is activated, a
gradient is calculated for each new
torque and angle sample available.
Tightening is aborted and a gradient
high or low result is displayed if the
gradient exceeds the limits.

Torque

4.
4.

3.

3.

1.
2.

Angle
1. P254 Start torque
2. P255 Angle offset

9836 3123 01

3. Intervals set as P253 Joint hardness

4. Gradient

119

Pset

6.9.7

Yield control

Yield control is activated by selecting the P100 Control strategy to Yield or Yield/Tq con (OR). The P101
Tightening strategy can be set to One stage, Two stage or Quickstep. Yield control starts at P260 Start torque.
In the Pset
Programming + branch,
select Yield control.

The spindle runs in the chosen direction until the yield point is detected. Search for the yield point starts
when the torque has reached the threshold P260 Start torque. The average torque over the measurement
window P262 Window angle is calculated [1].

[1] Tn =

TMes
NoSamples

TMes : Measured torque value in sample.

The sample frequency in Power Focus is 2 kHz. If the number of samples in the window is too low for a
calculation of a torque average, the tightening is aborted and an event code is displayed. The procedure of
average torque calculation is repeated after Step Angle degrees and the difference between every second
value is calculated (TDIFF in the illustration below):

[2] TDIFF = Tn Tn 2
Each value of difference in torque is compared and the maximal difference (Tmax) is stored. The yield point
is considered reached when a calculated difference in torque is less than Yield slope ratio (expressed as a
percentage) of the current Tmax:

[3] TDIFF < Yield .slope.ratio Tmax YIELD

If the parameter P264 Extra angle step is set, then the tightening is continued for the stated angle after the
yield point is reached. The figure below illustrates the steps of the yield control.
Prerequisites and limitations for Yield control;
- Gold or ETX RBU
- PF4000
- Fixtured application, parameter T101 Usage set to fixtured
120

9836 3123 01

Pset

For the STwrench tool interfacing with the PF, the yield strategy is programmed in a different way. Only
parameter P264 Extra angle step needs to be set together with the torque target and limits, and the angle
limits. Check with your local Atlas Copco representative how to setup your specific application.
Torque
7.

6.

2.

4.

3.

5.

3.

4.
2.
3.

4.
2.
3.
4.

2.
3.
2.

1.
3.

Angle
1. P260 Start Torque
2. P261 Step angle
3. P262 Window angle
4. Torque difference (TDIFF)

9836 3123 01

5. P264 Extra angle step

6. P262 Yield slope ratio, example 100%
7. P262 Yield slope ratio, example 70%

121

Pset

6.9.8

Post view torque

In the Pset Programming + branch,

select Post view torque.
Make suitable parameter settings.

Some joints have a torque peak prior of

P116 Rundown complete. Post view
torque function makes it possible to
monitor torque values during two
specified angular intervals. The interval
start is defined as angle prior to P116
Rundown complete. Torque is then
monitored for a specified angular
interval. Evaluation (OK/NOK) is done
when rundown complete is
reached.Click Store to save the settings.

Torque
7.

1.

2.

Angle
4.

3.
5.

6.

1. P281 Post view min torque

2. P284 Post view max torque
3. P283 Post view min monitor interval
4. P286 Post view max monitor interval
5. P282 Post view min monitor start
6. P285 Post view max monitor star
7. P116 Rundown complete

When reviewing a trace in TTPF, for a tightening made using the post view torque strategy, the
limits (two boxes according to P281-P285) are only shown if the trace is in Torque over Angle
mode, not in Torque over time mode.

122

9836 3123 01

Pset

6.10

Pset setup

Expand the Pset setup branch to access parameters

handling administration and Pset reset.

Add a name for the Pset (optional).

This section also contains options for View existing Pset, Create new Pset, Copy Pset and Delete
Pset.

Click Delete Pset result to select the Pset result to remove from the controller memory.
When clicking Delete all results a confirmation window appears. Select Yes to accept or No to abort
operation.

9836 3123 01

123

Multistage

Multistage

7.1

Introduction

The Multistage feature offers a dynamic link to up to eight Psets in several

steps for performing a sequence of operations.

A typical application scenario such as joint conditioning, where the fastener is run to a torque level of 10
Nm then backed off by 180 degrees and then fastened to a final torque level of 14 Nm. This operation would
be regarded as a three step Multistage. This is performed by the operator when in a hand held configuration
by depressing the trigger in the normal way until the end of the operation, or alternatively when used in a
fixed operation where the start signal is either latched or externally triggered.
N
e!ot

When running a Multistage the ring button must always be in the CW direction, even if the first Pset is in
the CCW direction.

9836 3123 01

125

Multistage

The Multistage tightening results and statistics are a combination of all the results from the different Psets
within the Multistage. The default setting is all results from the last Pset in the Multistage.
Individual Pset min and max limits function in all stages and the tool shuts off when a max limit is exceeded
(or for any reason if the min limit is not reached) as per normal operation. The result displayed is then taken
from the stage where the shut off occurred.
N
e!ot

This section includes screenshots from ToolsTalk PF. The screenshots show examples of parameter settings
and are NOT intended to be generally applicable. Check with your local Atlas Copco representative how to
set up your specific system environment.
See parameter list section Multistage for a description of all available Multistage options.

7.2

Create new Multistage/Open Multistage

In the PF Map, mark Multistage, right-click

and select Create New Multistage.
Alternatively, double-click on an existing
Multistage to open the configuration window.
Select New Multistage ID, enter the New
Multistage name (optional) and click OK to
open the Multistage window.
Click Add to select Psets to be included in the Multistage.
In the left upper window part, make selections for Options, Results and Statistics (mark to activate).
Click Store to save the settings for the Multistage.
The selection of a Multistage (via PC, Selector, Digital input etc.) is handled in the same way
as a Pset.

126

9836 3123 01

Multistage

The Multistage strategy is not supported by Power Focus with wireless tools.

9836 3123 01

127

Job

Job

8.1

Introduction

The Job function is useful when an object has bolts or screws that require different torque and
angle values for tightening. A Job is useful when an object needs different Psets and Multistages.
Instead of manually selecting each Pset or Multistage, the Job functionality keeps Psets and
Multistages in a predefined order.
The system allows 50 Psets/Multistages in a Job, and the storage of 99 Jobs (with the memory
setup it is possible to store up to 400 Jobs, see section Memory).
The Job function is RBU-dependent.
A Job is normally pre-programmed (static). A static job is created and stored in the Power Focus or from
ToolsTalk PF. A dynamic job is created externally and sent to PF via Open Protocol for immediate execution.
The lifetime of a dynamic Job is the time for the Job to be executed.
For more information on Open Protocol, see section MID 140 Execute dynamic Job request in the Power
Focus Open Protocol User Guide.
For parameter descriptions see Parameter list, Job.

8.2

Job concepts

The Job function can be defined by two categories, Standalone Job and Cell Job. Standalone Job is when
just one controller is involved in the Job, and Cell Job is a Job in which several controller units are involved.
The Psets/Multistage included in a Job can be selected from a stand-alone controller or from several controller
units in a Cell.
All controller units that perform a Cell Job must belong to the same Job group. A Job group consists of a
maximum of 20 controllers within the same Cell (see section Controller for more information).
A single controller can only belong to one Job group, but it is possible to create several Job groups in the
same Cell.
In a Job group, all included controllers are Job members. One of the Job members acts as a Job reference,
the others act as Job clients (see figure on next page). The Job reference retains a list of all Psets and

9836 3123 01

129

Job

Multistages available for all Job members. The Job reference is the main controller and remote controls the
Job clients.
Job example

The figure to the right shows an example of an object with bolts

that require different torque values:
Four bolts that require a torque of: 39 Nm
Three bolts that require a torque of: 70 Nm
One bolt that requires a torque of: 88 Nm
For this example three different Psets have to be created:

Pset1: final target 39 Nm

Pset2: final target 70 Nm
Pset3: final target 88 Nm
By combining the Psets in the above example, the following Job list is created (see table below).
Controller

Pset

Pset Name

Batch size

Max cohered NOK

Pset1

Pset2

Pset3

The Job in this example is performed by one single controller. Batch size means the number of times the
tightening should be repeated with the same Pset. JOB OK is signaled when all tightenings within the Job
have been performed correctly.
If P153 or M208 Max coherent NOKs, or P151 or M203 Batch size are used for the Psets or Multistages
included in the Job, these settings are ignored by the Job setting. The same is true for other Job settings.
N
e!ot

If the torque controller is powered off before the completion of the Job, the Job is lost.

130

9836 3123 01

Job

8.3

Job configuration

8.3.1

Creating a Job group

The controller units in a Job group must be working in the same Cell. Therefore, before creating Job groups
a Cell has to be configured (see section Controller for more information).
After cell configuration, the next step is to create a Job group including Job reference and Job client.
In the PF Map, select Controller > Network.
To define a Job reference, set the parameter C316 Job reference IP address equal to the parameter C300
IP address of the same controller.
To define a Job client, set the C316 Job reference IP to the C300 IP address of the Job reference
controller.
Click Store to save the settings and reboot the controller.

8.3.2

Creating a new Job

N
e!ot

With the configuration setup it is possible to store up to 400 Jobs (see section Memory for more information).
When creating a Cell Job the programming has to be done in the Job reference controller.
Right click on Job in the PF Map and select Create New Job.Alternatively,
double-click on an existing Job to open the Job configuration window.Every
Job has a unique ID number.

Select New Job ID, give the Job a name (optional) and click OK to open the Job window.

9836 3123 01

131

Job

The upper part of the Job window shows the available Psets and Multistages and Job list, see J300 Job
list in parameter list section Job for a description.
Select Psets or Multistages and add them to the Job list by clicking on either Manual select or Auto
select. With manual select the Pset is selected by the setting in C200 Pset, with Auto select the Pset is
automatically selected. A precondition for Auto select is that J301 Job type is set to Forced. It is possible
to change between manual and auto select by clicking in the table in the auto select column.
To change Batch size for a Pset/ Multistage, click in the column in the Job list table and enter a value.
To specify Max coherent NOKs, click in the column in the Job list table and enter a value.
N
e!ot

Auto select is not allowed for free order Jobs, with two or more Psets/Multistages selected from the same
controller.
The batch size defined in Job overrides the batch size defined for a specific Pset/Multistage (see parameters
P150 Batch count and M202 Batch count. It is not recommended to use the batch count function in Job
and Pset/Multistage settings simultaneously.

132

9836 3123 01

Job

Continue and make settings for the options in Configuration, Batch, Timers,
Line control, Result and View. See parameter list section Job for a description
of the parameters.
J330 Use line control must be set to Yes before the digital inputs and relay

settings for line control can be activated.

8.3.3

Select Job

Power Focus allows two different possibilities for Job selection; C201 Job and C202 Job override. To be
able to select a Job at least one of the two parameters has to be set. The parameters are set from PF
Map>Controller>Configuration>Select source. The system remembers the most recently selected source

9836 3123 01

133

Job

until the Job is either completed or aborted. After a Job has been started, it is not possible to select a new
Job until Job done or Job aborted.
C202 Job override has a higher priority than C201 Job select source. If a Job is selected from C202 Job
override, then it always terminates a present Job and is selected instead.

If a Job is selected from the selection source in C201 Job, it is only possible to select a new Job from the
same source after the selection and during the Job.
If a Job has been 'overridden' it will be aborted before the new Job is selected.
Sources that Jobs can be selected/aborted from:
N
e!ot

To be able to select/abort a Job from the PF Graph display, C201 Job or C202 Job override must be set to
PF keyboard.

N
e!ot

A Cell Job can only be selected or aborted from the Job reference.
To be able to select a Cell Job the Job reference needs to communicate with the Job clients that form the selected Job. Otherwise the Job reference will not start the Job. All the Job clients detect communication failure
with the Job reference and vice versa. If the Job reference loses communication with a Job client it will try
to re-establish the communication.
Two cases when the Job reference loses the communication with a Job client during a running Job:

If the disconnected Job client has tightenings left to perform, the Job reference will abort the running Job
immediately.

134

9836 3123 01

Job

If the disconnected Job client did not have any tightenings left to perform, or had no part in the running
Job, the Job continues.
If a Job client loses communication with its Job reference, the Job client immediately stops running the Job
and locks the tool.
N
e!ot

To select the Job from ToolsTalk, set

parameter C201 Job to "Ethernet/Serial".

Select the Job to run in the Selection panel.

N
e!ot

If selecting an empty Job, without any Pset/Multistage included, the controller will send a Job OK
signal.
In ToolsTalk, click on the arrow to the right
of the Monitor icon and select Job Monitor.
Job monitor displays the selected Job and
provides a management function.
For description of Job off, Restart Job,
Decrement, Increment, Bypass and Abort
Job, see section Functions in the Job monitor.

9836 3123 01

135

Job

8.4

Functions in Job monitor

Function

Description

Restart Job

This function allows the user to restart the running Job without needing to reselect the Job.
All batch counters in the running Job resets and Job timers restarts.

Decrement

Batch Decrement makes it possible to redo the latest tightening/increment in a Job. The
batch counter of the Pset or Multistage is decreased with one step. It is not possible to go
back one step after Job has been completed.
The Job batch decrement function is accessible only from the Job reference controller.

Increment

Batch increment makes it possible to increment the batch counter value of a Pset/Multistage
without performing a tightening. It is possible to complete a Job by using the batch increment
function.
After performing batch increment in a Job, the Job Status will be NOK (Not OK) when J311
Batch status at increment/bypass is configured as NOK. Otherwise, the Job Status will be
OK.
In a Job with Free Order, only the Job Client with the active Pset/Multistage is able to use
Batch Increment.
In a Job with Forced Order, the JobClient with the active Pset/Multistage and the Job
Reference are able to use Batch Increment.

Bypass

Bypass skips a specific Pset/Multistage in a running Job, independently of batch size.

The batch counter will be set equal to the batch size value and the Pset/Multistage will be
considered as completed when a Pset is bypassed. The Job Status will be OK/NOK depending
on parameter Batch status at increment/bypass [J311].
In a Job with Free order, only the Job Client with the active Pset/Multistage is able to use
Bypass functionality.
In a Job with Forced order, the Job Client with the active Pset/Multistage and the Job
Reference are able to use Bypass functionality.

136

9836 3123 01

Job

Function

Description

Abort Job

Abort Job is only allowed via the Job Referencecontroller. Abort can be an external signal
as well as an internal order (see Max time to start Job [J320] and Max time to complete Job
[J321]).
When a Job abort request is received the Job functionality will wait for completion of the
ongoing tightening result before aborting the Job.

Job off

This function offers the possibility to turn off the Job functionality and unlock all involved
tools.
Running Job: Selecting Job off for a running Job is equal to aborting Job, thus the tool/tools
will always be enabled. The Job Reference will order Job Members to select latest Pset that
was selected from DigIn or Selector (in case one of these is C200 Pset) Otherwise the latest
selected Pset in the controller will remain.
No running Job: The Job Reference will unlock all tools of the JobMembers. JobReference
will also order Job Members to select latest Pset, which was selected from DigIn or Selector
(in case one of these is C200 Pset). Otherwise the latest selected Pset in the controller will
remain.
When a controller is in Job off mode it is possible to perform tightening with any existing
Pset or Multistage. As long as the Job Reference is in Job off mode the user is denied to
select a new Job, the Job off mode must first be shut off.
The only occasion when the Job off functionality affects the Job Clients is when they have
lost communication with their Job Reference. In this case it is possible to unlock the
JobClients locally by using the Job off functionality.
N
e!ot

Only the Job Reference will remember the Job mode after a reboot.
Job status (information)

Job OK: Received if all Psets/Multistages included in the Job have been correctly performed.

Alternatively if Batch increment/bypass has been used (if Batch Increment/Bypass is

configured as an OK event).
Job NOK: Received if any Pset/Multistage included in the Job have not been correctly
performed and if J310 Increase batch at tightening is configured OK+NOK. Alternatively
it is considered as NOK (Not OK) if Batch increment/bypass has been used (if Batch
Increment/Bypass is configured as a NOK event).
Job Aborted: The Job was aborted.

8.5

Unlock the tool

Unlock the tool by selecting a new Job, deleting all existing Jobs or select Job off.
It is not possible to unlock the tool by rebooting the controller.

9836 3123 01

137

Controller

Controller

9.1

Introduction

The Controller section contains configurations common to all tightenings and is unique
to each controller unit.

For Parameter list, see chapter Parameter List, section Controller.

9836 3123 01

139

Controller

9.2

Information

Expand the Controller branch in the PF Map.

Double-click Information.

This window contains information about the ToolsTalkSoftware and the controller Hardware.

140

9836 3123 01

Controller

9836 3123 01

141

Controller

9.3

Configuration

In the PF Map Controller branch, double-click

on Configuration.

Make settings for Select source.

Selector: A selector configured on the I/O

bus.

Digin: A digital input can be a device on

the I/O bus, an internal digital input, an ST
GPIO device or a Logic configurator.

Ethernet/Serial: ToolsTalk, Open protocol,

or a customer specific protocol.

Identifier: A scanner configured. See

section Identifier.
142

9836 3123 01

Controller

Fieldbus and Fieldbus selector: See section

Select Pset from fieldbus and set batch
size.

PF keyboard: The Pset is selected from

directly from the PF Graph (Pset + or -),
or Compact and Pulsor Focus (F-buttons).

ST selector: An ST selector attached to the

configured in Mode 2.
Make settings for Tightening, Loosening and Positioning.
The parameter C212 Unlock tool at Pset select (default: No) is effective when P150 Batch count is
set to any other value than Off.
C212 can be used when P151 Batch size and P152 Lock at batch done is set, for an immediate enabling
of the tool as a new Pset is selected.
The parameter C230 OE positioning type defines how the open-end position is reached. In all C230
strategies the tools rotates slowly the first 30 to detect that the tool is not in contact with the nut.
Thereafter the tool rotates faster; the tool is stopped if the P171 Limit value is exceeded.
The open-end position is reached at every second push of the tool trigger
N
e!ot

Note! When the tool has been disabled by an external source, the open-end tool still rotates at every
second push for reaching the open-end position. The reason for this is that the open-end tool may have
been stuck due to a mechanical obstacle at an open-end positioning.
The C230 parameter can be set to:
Forward - The tool rotates forward to open end position
Reverse - The tool rotates reverse to open end position

For these two options, if the P171 Limit value is exceeded, the event E122 Open end positioning failure
is triggered.
N
e!ot

To avoid that a nut is incorrectly loosened when the Forward / Reverse strategy is used, set P171 Limit
as low as possible as long as the inner friction in the tool is exceeded.
Reverse Torque Based - Open end position is found via a slow reverse rotation. However, if the

P171 Limit value is exceeded before the open end position is found, the home position relay is set,
but the event E122 Open end positioning failure is not triggered.

9836 3123 01

143

Controller

Make settings for Batch and Startup.

Click Set under Date and Time to store computer and user time to controller.
N
e!ot

If using Toolsnet, Toolsnet will act as the Date and Time master synchronizing the time in the controller
to the time in Toolsnet.
Click Events to configure which events to log and show.
Click Store to save settings.

144

9836 3123 01

Controller

9.4

Network

The controller uses both Ethernet and serial communication, and works together with ToolsTalk and database
applications such as ToolsNet, etc.
The Cell and Net concept allows all controller units on an assembly station to communicate and work together.
See also sections Cell and Net, Job as well as Sync.
In the PF Map Controller branch, doubleclick on Network.

9836 3123 01

145

Controller

Make settings for Ethernet and Cell.

If used, activate and setup Multicast.

Make settings for Open Protocol,
ToolsTalk and the Acta port.
If used, activate and setup ToolsNet.
Click Store to save settings.

9.4.1

Cell and Net configuration

The controller software offers extended networking possibilities. The Cell and Net concepts are part of the
RBU Gold and RBU Silver types.
Ethernet TCP/IP networking makes it simple to program and overview all controller units in the network
from a PC with ToolsTalk software installed. All data traffic from the controller could also be collected and
compiled by ToolsNet.

146

9836 3123 01

Controller

Via the Cell concept, it is possible to arrange all controller units at an assembly station in a group, giving
extra functionality to the work station. The Net concept enables functionality to group all cells on the assembly
line into one net.
The figure below illustrates a cell consisting of four controllers and a switch.

A cell consists of one Cell reference, a maximum of 19 Cell members, thus a total of 20 controller
units. Cells can then be grouped into Nets; the maximum number of cells in a net is 1000. Each net has
a Net reference. One controller can function as both Cell reference and Net reference.
Every cell has a Cell identification number (Cell ID) unique to the network. Within a cell, every controller
has its own unique channel identification number (Channel ID). With the PF Graph, the user can browse
through the different channels and program and view the result from any other controller in the same
cell.
The Cell reference and Cell members can be configured through a PF Graph user interface or ToolsTalk
PF.
N
e!ot

All controller units in a Cell must have the same software version and the same RBU-type installed.

T WARNING When configuring a remote controller, make sure it is not in use by anyone else.
Otherwise it might lead to the damaging of the tool or a joint. It might also lead to personal injury.
The RBU Gold also enables enables Sync functionality (see section Sync) and running Cell Jobs (see
section Job).
The figure below illustrates an example of a factory network configuration, a Net with three Cells. Each
Cell has a Cell reference and three Cell members. One Cell reference also functions as the Net reference.

9836 3123 01

147

Controller
Net with three Cells

1. Cell
2. ToolsNet
3. ToolsTalk
4. Router
5. Switch
6. Cell master
7. Net master

Network setup

To set up a network, the controller must have an IP-address. See section Connecting over Ethernet.

148

9836 3123 01

Controller

Open PF Map>Controller>Network.
Set the C300 IP address, C301 Subnet mask
and C302 Default router.
Set the C312 Cell reference IP to the IP
address of the Cell reference.
Set the C315 Net reference IP to the IP
address of the Net reference.
N
e!ot

To define a Cell reference or Net reference,

set the Cell reference IP /Net reference IP the
same as its own IP address.
Set C310 Channel ID to a number unique
within the Cell (1-20).
C311 Channel name is optional.

Set C313 Cell ID number to a number unique within the network (1-1000). Only available when the controller
is the Cell reference
C314 Cell name is optional. Click Store to save the settings.
N
e!ot

After all the settings have been made, restart all controller units.
Controller connection

When connecting to a controller, Cell reference or Net reference make sure that the following settings are
correct.
On the Menu list, open Option>Settings.
Set the Controller IP address of the controller to connect.
Under Ethernet setup, check whether the connected unit is a controller, Cell reference or a Net reference.
To connect the controller, Cell reference or Net reference, click the Connect symbol.
When a Cell reference or Net reference is connected, clicking the corresponding line in the PF Map expands
the Cell tree or Net tree.

9836 3123 01

149

Controller

If the C315 Net reference IP address has not

been entered in a controller when adding it to
the network, the added unit will be shown as
a controller in the PF Map list of the Netmaster
anyhow.

9.5

COM Ports

In the PF Map Controller branch, double-click

on COM ports.

150

9836 3123 01

Controller

Make settings for Serial 1 and Serial 2.

Click Store to save settings.

N
e!ot

If serial 2 connection is used with IRC communication kit this setting will not apply. If you want to
use this connection for some other device the IRC communication kit must be removed and the controller
must be recycled before the new settings can apply.

9836 3123 01

151

Controller

9.6

Display

In the PF Map Controller branch, doubleclick on Display to make settings for the
controller display.

Make settings for Presentation, Result

view, Keyboard and Power save.
Note that there are more selections available
on the controller display. See parameter list
section Display.
Click Store to save settings.

152

9836 3123 01

Controller

Make settings for screen colors:

Color theme
Background color for OK result
Foreground (text) color for OK result
Background color for NOK result
Foreground (text) color for NOK
resultClick Store to save settings.

9.7

Memory

T NOTICE! All data stored in the controller, except parameters C300 IP address, C301 Subnet mask and
C302 Default router, will be erased when changing memory setup. Therefore, use the ToolsTalk function
"Store PF to file" to save the existing data configuration (including Psets, Multistages and Jobs). The data
can later be retrieved via function "Read PF from file".
N
e!ot

When changing the memory setup the controller must be rebooted for the changes to take effect. It is necessary
to "Read PF from file" twice and reboot the controller one extra time.
It is recommended to reboot immediately.
Configurable memory is only available for RBU Gold and RBU Silver.
Besides the 'defaullt configuration' and 'totally configurable' (which gives the possibility to manually configure
the controller memory freely), the controller provides seven more configurable memory options; More Psets,
More Jobs, More Results, More Events, More Identifiers, QDAS, and Pset comments.
Identifier
result
parts
Traces

Selection

Psets

Jobs

Results

Events

Identifiers

Statistical
events

Default
configuration

250

99

5000

100

100

100

More Psets

300

100

4000

100

100

100

More Jobs

100

400

4000

100

100

100

More results

100

100

6000

100

100

100

More events

200

100

5000

500

100

100

More identifiers

200

100

5000

100

400

100

9836 3123 01

153

Controller

Identifier
result
parts
Traces

Selection

Psets

Jobs

Results

Events

Identifiers

Statistical
events

Totally
configurable

1-600

1-700

1-9000

1-800

400

1-500

1-4

1-100

QDAS

250

99

4000

100

100

100

Pset comments

200

100

5000

100

100

100

Number of identifiers is the maximum number of significant identifier strings available for identifier Type
1 (Identifier Type 1 is used to trigger Psets or Jobs). Number of identifier result parts is the amount of
Identifier strings to be stored together with the tightening result. For more information, see section Identifier.

When increasing database elements, a decreasing of other elements might be necessary. For instance, if 6000
results are required it is not possible to have more than 100 Psets (option more results).
Memory setup

Store existing data, see Store PF to file, including Psets, Multistages and Jobs before changing the memory
setup. The data can later be retrieved, see Read PF from file.

154

9836 3123 01

Controller

In the PF Map, select Controller>Memory.

Make a selection for C600 Type. To manually
configure the memory, select Totally
configurable.
Click OK to continue.

Select number of Psets, Jobs, Results, Identifier result parts, Events, Statistical events and Traces.
N
e!ot

Indicator estimated memory usage is automatically updated in percent (a maximum of 100 percent is
allowed).

9836 3123 01

155

Controller

Ensure that all data is stored before saving the settings.

Click Store to save settings.
N
e!ot

When changing the memory setup, the controller must be rebooted for the changes to take effect. It is
recommended to reboot immediately.
After reboot, make a restore of the previous settings through function Read PF from file, see section
Read PF from file.
Memory reset

Store important data, see Store PF to file, including Psets, Multistages and Jobs before resetting the memory.
The data can later be retrieved, see Read PF from file.
In the PF Map, select Controller>Memory.
To reset the memory or parts thereof, click the corresponding button.

156

9836 3123 01

Controller

9.8

Accessibility

In the PF Map Controller branch, double-click

on Accessibility.

Make settings for Password.

Passwords should have between 1 and 8
characters (letters or numbers) and are case
sensitive. There are separate passwords for
communication and setup parameters. An
identical password can be set for both. In this
case only one password will be prompted in
TTPF, but still both in PF graph. The password
handling is configured with the two parameters
C800 Use and C801 Entry. Change to C800
resets unused passwords. There is no
9836 3123 01

157

Controller

prompting for empty passwords, both in PF

graph and TTPF. When password Use is
activated (other than: 'No') and Entry scope is
set to Tools Talk, access to all parameters from
PF keyboard is restricted even with empty
passwords.
N
e!ot

When uploading/downloading controller

configuration to/from a file, password strings
will not be stored and restored. Software
update performed by Software Loader will
clear passwords in the unit but not C800 and
C801.
N
e!ot

PF Compact units have access to password

protected parameters only via TTPF, due to
simplified keyboard functionality.
N
e!ot

FieldBus configuration is accessible only from

TTPF and is not protected by any type of
password.
N
e!ot

Total memory reset defaults all password

settings.
Click Store to save settings.

158

9836 3123 01

Tool

10

Tool

10.1

Introduction

The Tool section contains information for tools connected to the controller. The
information available through the controller includes for example general tool information
and service status, as well as hardware- and software configuration.
See parameter list section Tool for a description of all available Tool options. See tool
specific information for more information about the options for each tool.
The tool parameters are visible depending on which tool is connected. For STB, most parameters are
invisible when the tool is offline.

9836 3123 01

159

Tool

10.2

Tool information

Expand the Tool branch in the PF Map.

Double-click on Information.

The Model and Motor sections contain information about the tool connected to the controller.

160

9836 3123 01

Tool

The Software section contains information about the application- and boot-code version for the
tool.

10.3

Tool configuration

In the PF Map Tool branch, double-click on

Configuration.
The following submenus are available:

Tool start
Accessory bus
Sound
Function button
Blue LED
Illuminator
Lights
Radio
Connection
Work object LED

9836 3123 01

161

Tool

10.3.1

Tool start and Accessory bus

Make settings for Tool start and

Accessory bus.
The main purpose of T200 Tool start
select source option Safety trigger
is to ensure that both hands are
placed on the tool while it is running,
and that the tool stops as soon as one
hand is released.
The safety trigger is suitable for applications where a high level of safety is desired.
The safety trigger function requires the start trigger and safety trigger buttons to be pushed simultaneously
in order to start the tool. The second button must be pushed within 0.5 seconds from pushing the first
button, the order is arbitrary. If the safety trigger button or the start trigger is released while the tool is
running, the tool stops immediately.
Once the tool has been started, the safety trigger function requires both buttons to be released before the
tool can be started again.
A safety trigger button is mounted on the ST tool and connected to GPIO 4. The parameter is only
accessible when GPIO 4 is set to Off.
The main purpose of the T201 Timer enable tool function is to prevent unintentional starting of the tool.
It is immune to tape, i.e., it is not possible to override the function by putting tape on the enable button.
The timer enable tool is suitable for applications where a reasonable level of safety is required and
applications where both hands cannot remain on the tool during tightening (one hand must be used to
hold the working piece during tightening etc.).
When the T201 Timer enable tool is activated, the tool is disabled by default. In order to enable the tool,
the user must enable the tool using the digital input function Timer enable tool. Once enabled, the tool
will remain enabled for the configured period of time (timer enable tool time). As soon as the time period
expires, the tool will be disabled again.
If the tool is started during the period it is enabled, it remains enabled while it is being run. When the
tool is stopped, it remains enabled for an additional period of time (according to release and configuration).
This behavior is comparable to key lock functionality on cellular phones; once unlocked, the keys are
locked when a given period of time has passed since the last key press.
N
e!ot

The Timer enable tool function was previously called safety trigger.

162

9836 3123 01

Tool

Digital input Timer enable tool must be changed from status low to high in order to enable the tool
(the tool will not remain enabled when the time period has expired, even if input to the digital input
Timer enable tool remains high ).
With T203 Direction alert and T204 Alert type parameters, a sound or an indicator can be configured to
notify the operator of the direction of the tool.
Parameter T210 Mode defines the function of the Tool accessory bus.

10.3.2

Sound and buzzer

In the Sound window, the settings include the type of sound and the event that should trigger the sound.

Make settings for Sound.

Enable/disable sound and adjust the volume.
Two types of sound files can be stored in the controller memory, buzzer and sound (stream) waves. A
Buzzer wave is a frequency-based sound generated by the tool. The buzzer wave can be programmed
by the user (as default one buzzer is included in the controller). A Sound (stream) wave is a preprogrammed wav file that can be downloaded from disk (hard drive/ file). It is possible to use a
microphone to record wav files and download them to the controllers.
To select an existing buzzer wave, select an ID number from the drop down menu (as default one buzzer
wave is included).
To create a new buzzer wave, click Add buzzer. It is possible to store up to 10 buzzer waves in the
controller.
The BuzzerWave window appears.
Give the Buzzer wave an E100 Name
(recommended).
Select E101 Frequency, E102 Time On, E103 Time
Off, E104 Repetition and E105 Volume.

9836 3123 01

163

Tool

The volume is a relative (in percent) of parameter

T221 Volume, which could be set to high, medium
or low. T221 Volume can be found in the sound
setup window.
After every change in setup, click Store to save
settings into the tool memory.
Click Play sound to listen to the buzzer sound in the tool (if not working, try to click Store).
Click Delete buzzer wave to remove the selected buzzer. Click Store to save settings.
To create a sound (stream) wave, select Add sound in the Sound window. To select an existing Sound
wave, select an ID number from the drop down menu.
N
e!ot

It is possible to store up to 10 stream waves in the controller.

The Create new sound window appears.
Select a New sound ID and type new sound name (recommended). Click OK.
The Wave window appears.
Click Open wave file and search for the wave file
to use on disk (hard drive/file).
N
e!ot

The wav file can use up to 8 bits and a frequency

of up to 8000 Hz. It provides only mono playing
and has an interval of maximum 3 seconds.
Click Play sound to listen to a sound file. The
sound is played in the tool.
Click Delete sound to remove a sound file.
Click Store to save settings. Close window.
To connect a configured buzzer or sound to an event,
click Add in the Sound window.
Select a digital output (relay) in the Event list.
Select a sound or buzzer wave (created earlier) in the Sound Type list to connect to the event.
Select a priority from the Sound Prio list connected to the specific sound event.
164

9836 3123 01

Tool

N
e!ot

The Sound Prio setting controls which sound event that has the advantage in the case of a collision
between more than one sound file during tool operations.
Click Remove to remove an event from the list.
Click Store to save changes in the Window.

10.3.3

Tool function buttons

Make settings for Function buttons.

The T230 T235 function button settings are
available for ST and SL tools. There are three
possible user interaction types for this button; single
push, double-push and pressed. (For available relay
functions, see section Digital I/O and fieldbus
items.)
The parameter T236 Push detection interval states
the maximum time (in milliseconds) between the
button pressed and the button being released, for
push to be detected. Parameter T237 Next push
interval states the maximum time (in milliseconds)
between the button being released after the first push
and the button pressed again, to detect double
pushed.
Single push - the button is pressed down and released before the T236 Push detection interval expires.
The T237 Next push interval expires before the button is pressed again.
Double push - the button is pressed down and released before the T236 Push detection interval expires.
Then the button is pressed down before the T237 Next push interval expires and is released before the
T236 Push detection interval expires.
Pressed - the button is pressed down and is kept down for a longer time than the T236 Push detection
interval. When the Push detection interval expires, the button function is considered to be pressed until

it is released. Notice that if no function is configured for single push or double push in the current tool
direction, the Push detection interval is ignored and the button function is considered to be pressed as
soon as it is pressed down.

9836 3123 01

165

Tool

It is possible to configure a digital input function, similar to the digital inputs on PF, for each user
interaction type and tool direction. Tool direction is shown by the direction ring on ST tools and by the
direction LED on SL tools.
From the digital input functions point of view, single push and double push user interaction types do
generate pulses. This means that they do not have duration where input to the digital input function
remains high. Single push and Double push user interaction types are therefore not suitable for digital
input functions that are intended to follow the status of the button. The pressed user interaction type
provides duration; i.e. input to the digital input function remains high as long as the function button is
pressed and goes low when it is released. It can therefore be used with digital input functions intended
to follow the button status.
Feedback is provided to the user to indicate which user interaction type was detected. If a Single push
is detected, the tool LEDs flash once and if a Double push is detected, the tool LEDs flash twice.
Feedback is only given when there is a function configured for the currently performed user interaction
type and current direction. For example, if a Double push is performed while operating in CCW mode,
but T235 CCW double push is set to Off, no response is given.
For SL tools, the function button normally is configured to change tool direction in some way (toggle
CW/CCW, toggle CW/CCW for next run and set CCW).

10.3.4

Blue LED

Make settings for Blue LED (if applicable). The Blue LED indicates when a predefined event occurs.
The events are relays connected from Power Focus to the tool.
To configure the T240 Events click Add and select type of Event, Duration and Time (if applicable).
Click Store to save settings.

10.3.5

Tool illuminator and lights

Make settings for Illuminator andLights.

The illuminator, which is a group of LEDs in the front of SL and ST pistol tools, provides light for the
operator during tool operations.
The parameter T250 Illuminator mode can be set to:
166

9836 3123 01

Tool

Off - illuminator is constantly off.

On - illuminator is constantly on.
Tracking event - illuminator follows status of specified T251 On event.
Event controlled - illuminator is turned on when specified T251 On event occurs and is turned off
when specified T252 Off event occurs. If T252 Off event is set to Off, the expiration of T253 On
time turns off the illuminator.
The parameters T251 On event, T252 Off event and T253 On time are related to the input from T250
Illuminator mode .
T253 On time sets the maximum time for the illuminator to remain on since the last occurrence of T251
On event, if T250 Illuminator mode is set to Tracking event or Event controlled.

The parameter Control type [T260] is used to define the control source for the Tool LED light. The
T260 parameter can be set to:

PF-controlled 1 - Light is controlled via specified limits for torque and/or angle
PF-controlled 2 - Customer specific option
PF-controlled 3 - Tool LED's used to acknowledge Event Code Tightening NOK / Tightening OK
Light off - Tool LED's functionality disabled.
The parameters T261 Use ON time and T262 ON time is used to specify that the tool LED's should
light for a specified period of time (on) or continuously (off) after a tightening.
T263 Indicator, used to show selected Pset (Pset 1-8) on the tool LED's. Applicable only if an ST tool

is connected.

10.3.6

Radio and Connection

Make settings for Radio and Connection.

Some of the settings are explained in detail
below. All of the tool configuration parameters

9836 3123 01

167

Tool

are listed in tool parameter section

Configuration.
N
e!ot

The radio section is accessible when Primary tool is other than Cable.
T270 Power save timeout: IRC turns off after this time, if tool is inactive. To reconnect, press trigger

once and Blue LED on tool lights up after approximately 10 seconds.

T271 Start condition: The start condition if using IRC connection for tool. None: Up to 20 tightenings

can be performed if IRC connection is lost (Blue LED off). Connected: IRC connection must be
established (Blue LED on) to run tool. Start request: IRC connection must be established (Blue LED
on) and link time out must not have started.
T272 Link timeout: If the tool loses IRC connection it is considered offline and the connection LED

(blue) on the tool turns off after the link timeout time.
T277 Torque and angle trace: Switch on/off tracing of torque and angle. (Up to 10 traces can be stored

in the tool if connection is lost.)

T290 Primary tool. Note that PF needs to be restarted after changing primary tool setting. Click Store

to save settings.

10.3.7

Work object LED

Make settings for Work object LED.

[C600] determines the function of the Tools Work object LED. (On, Off or Tool usage).
[C601] determines how long the Work object LED shall be lit after tool trigger release.

168

9836 3123 01

Tool

10.4

Tool diagnostic

In the PF Map Tool branch, double-click on

Diagnostic.

9836 3123 01

169

Tool

10.4.1

Sensor tracking

To monitor Torque/Angle readings from the tool

press Start. To set reference point for Angle value
during monitoring press Reset.
For S, DS tools it is even possible to read value of
the transducer offset shown in percentage of the
nominal torque range.
For other tool families this parameter is not
accessible (always set to 0.00%).

10.4.2

Transducer calibration

When tool is triggered, a check of transducer and transducer electronics is carried out. Results (offset and
gain) are sensitive to temperature, material wear and even proper handling of tool during calibration.
Dont manually rotate gear when tool is triggered to obtain most accurate transducer readings. If program
discovers offset or gain values being out of correction limits or that these parameters have changed too much
since last calibration, the corresponding event (E544) will be displayed and rundown will be aborted. Following
table shows these limits for different type of tools.
N
e!ot

As long offset and gain change is not caused by fast, manual rotation of the gear during triggering of the
tool, even relatively big offset and gain changes are completely compensated in the system, not having influence on specified measurement accuracy.
Tool family
Parameter

S,ETX

ST

Offset range (%
nominal torque)

36%

16%

Offset change (+-%

nominal torque)

4%

2%

Gain* range (%
nominal gain)

23%

Gain* change (+-%

nominal gain)

STP1

STP2

ST2

STB

Event if failed

16%

16%

16%

28%

E537

2%

2%

2%

2%

7%

E539

21%

21%

51%

34%

42%

E538

10%

3%

4%

4%

3%

3%

E540

Nominal torque

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

Nominal gain* (%
nominal tq)

114%

126%

125%

99%

148%

151%

170

SL21

9836 3123 01

Tool

* There are different definitions of gain (shunt calibration) parameter for each tool depending on HW/SW
solution implemented. STB uses no shunt calibration.

10.5

Tool maintenance

In the PF Map Tool branch, double-click on

Maintenance.
The following submenus are available:

Calibration
Service
Open end
Wear
ACTA
Motor tuning
Disconnect tool
Pulsor Service
Air sensor tuning
Tool drift alarm general
Tool drift alarm limits

9836 3123 01

171

Tool

10.5.1

Calibration and Service (including Pulsor service)

Make settings for Calibration, Service and Pulsor Service.

Service indicator alarm, configured in the Tool service section, provides a mechanism to remind the
users when it is time to service the tool. The user specifies how many tightenings is allowed (since last
service) until tool has to be serviced. When No of tightenings since service [T412] exceeds Service
interval [T413] or when Number of pulses since service [T530] exceeds Service interval in pulses [T531]
or when the current date is later than the Date for next service [T418] a service indicator alarm will be
activated.
By performing proactive service on a tool, failure due to mechanical wear can be avoided during
production.
When Service indicator alarm is activated the following will happen: The alarm LED on the front panel
of controller will flash continuously. Event code Tool service interval expired [E502] will be generated.
This event code will also be automatically generated after each 100:th tightening, as long as the service
indicator alarm is active.
Click Store to save the settings.

172

9836 3123 01

Tool

10.5.2

Open-end tuning

Before using an open-end tool, make sure that the tool head and tool body have been assembled and
configured correctly. If not, the tool can run in the wrong direction and the mechanical stop in the openend head may be damaged.
If performing an OK tightening (green tool LEDs are on) with C230 OE forward positioning set to
No and pressing the tool trigger button, then the LEDs turn OFF and ON again. This behavior can
only be seen on S and DS tools (not on ST and SL tools) and is normal.
The Reverse angle and Rotate spindle forward/reverse strategies are not applicable for open-end
tools.
It is not possible to use open-end tools in a Multistage configuration.
For S, ST and DS tools, use parameter T420 Use
open end to activate the open-end functionality.For
SL and STB tools it is not possible to change the
open-end parameters in Tools Talk or Graph. Use
Tools Talk Service to modify open-end settings.
T421 Inverted motor rotation should be checked if an open-end head is used which changes the rotation
direction of the spindle.

T NOTICE! If the T421 Inverted motor rotation is set in the wrong way the tool may not operate in
a correct manner and the mechanical stop may be damaged if a tightening is done.
Set T422 Tightening direction to the direction that fits the application and open-end head. CW is
selected for right hand threaded fasteners and CCW for left hand threaded. This setting is valid for
all programmed Psets.
N
e!ot

Parameter P240 Tool tightening direction has no effect when running an open-end tool.
When finished with parameter settings, press Store.
Click open-end tune key in the open-end parameters
section.
Make sure the open-end head can rotate freely and
press the tool trigger.
Open-end tuning measures the gear ratio and gear
play and stores it to the tool memory.
N
e!ot

9836 3123 01

173

Tool

The old T103 Gear ratio value will be overwritten.

A confirmation message is displayed if open-end tuning succeeded.

10.5.3

Wear indicator

Wear indicator provides a mechanism to inform tool users with an event code when it is time for tool
service. It is also possible to configure a controller to lock the tool with parameter T416 Lock tool on
alarm.
Wear indicator provides a mechanism to inform tool users with an event code when it is time for tool
service. It is also possible to configure a controller to lock the tool with parameter T416 Lock tool on
alarm.
N
e!ot

If wear indicator is on it will be reset to initial state after a tool service when a Service counter reset
is performed.

10.5.4

ACTA

The ACTA section contains a tool calibration session.

N
e!ot

The calibration does not work with Tensor DS tools.

A tool calibration session is started by connecting the ACTA 4000 to the Power Focus and fitting the
QRTT device to the spindle. One Multistage with three Psets is used when the calibration is run, one
torque tightening (for torque calibration) and two different spindle rotations (for loosening and angle
calibration) Psets.
Click Create QRTT to create the Psets and
Multistages needed. The target torque and
angle is then set by the ACTA 4000 before the
start of each calibration.
The tool calibration is started by a command
from the ACTA 4000 or by pressing the tool
trigger depending on if the tool is configured
for remote start or not. The result of a
calibration is displayed as a normal tightening.

174

9836 3123 01

Tool

When a calibration batch is completed, event

code E710 ACTA/QRTT calibration is
displayed and stored in the event log of the
Power Focus.
It is necessary for the controller to have enough memory space available to store the Multistages
and Psets needed. If the calibration shows an unsatisfactory result the operator is assumed to
take the appropriate action. No calibration value (calibration- or normalization value etc.) is
changed automatically.

10.5.5

Motor tuning

Motor tuning adjusts the tool and motor control unit. Sync motor tuning feature is only available from the

Sync reference of a configured Sync group with between two and ten Sync members. The Sync motor tuning
process starts simultaneously for all Sync members when pressing the tool trigger of the Sync reference. For
information about the Sync functionality, see section Sync.

T WARNING It is important that no torque is applied to the socket of the tool when it is subject to
any kind of motor tuning. Make sure that the socket is able to rotate freely.

10.5.5.1

Standalone motor tuning

Click Perform motor tuning.

Press Tool trigger and keep it pushed during the
motor tuning process (the status is displayed).
Release Tool trigger or click Abort to cancel.
When finished the result of the motor tuning is
displayed.

10.5.5.2

Sync motor tuning

Click Sync motor tuning.

Press Tool trigger and keep it pushed during the
motor tuning process (the status is displayed).
Release Tool trigger or click Abort to cancel.
N
e!ot

Accessing Sync motor tuning is only allowed on a Sync reference.

9836 3123 01

175

Tool

Channel ID and motor tuning status for Sync reference and all Sync members are displayed.
When finished, the result of the motor tuning is displayed.

10.5.6

Disconnect tool

.
Click Disconnect tool and click OK to logically
disconnect the tool.
N
e!ot

Do not disconnect a tool during tightening, loosening, positioning, motor tuning, open-end tuning or
tracking.
Logical disconnection is not necessary for ST and SL tools (this tool types allows hot swap functionality).
If the operation succeeded, the green OK LED flashes continuously (on the Power Focus) and the
message Command accepted is displayed. Click OK to continue.
If disconnection of the tool was not allowed, the red NOK LED flashes continuously for 3 seconds and
the text Operation failed is displayed. Click OK to continue.
When a tool is connected again, E131 Tool disconnected is displayed and then acknowledged
automatically.
In order to be able to use digital I/O to disconnect the tool, one digital input must be configured as
Disconnect tool and optionally one relay can be configured as Safe to disconnect tool.
Once configured, proceed as following to logically disconnect the tool using digital I/O:

Set voltage level on the digital input (configured as Disconnect tool) to high in order to logically
disconnect the tool

If the operation succeeded, the relay configured as Safe to disconnect tool switches and the green
OK LED (on PF) will flash continuously. If disconnection of the tool was not allowed, the relay
configured as Safe to disconnect tool does not switch and the red NOK LED flashes continuously
for 3 seconds

Disconnect the tool

When a tool is inserted again, E131 Tool disconnected is displayed and then acknowledged
automatically

T WARNING Do not physically disconnect an S or DS tool, unless it has first been successfully
logically disconnected. This can damage the tool memory. If the user physically disconnects a non-

176

9836 3123 01

Tool

ST tool, without a successfully logically disconnection, PF has to be rebooted before connecting

the tool again.

10.5.7

Hot swap

It is possible to replace an individual tool with another tool, just by disconnecting the tool from the tool cable
and attach the new tool. Hot swap is only available for S and ST type tools.

T WARNING When hot swapping a tool, the new tool must be of the same type to ensure that all
parameter settings in the Power Focus will be interpreted correctly.
Even if all settings are accepted by a new tool of another tool type, some parameters can cause the new tool
to behave differently than the original tool.
An example is the speed setting parameters (P130-P138). If P139 is set to "Percent", these parameters are
stored in the PF database as percentage of max tool speed for the particular tool type, the value for the new
tool type might differ from the original tool type. On the other side using absolute speed values (P139 set to
"RPM") can generate strategy configuration errors for slower than swapped tools.

9836 3123 01

177

Tool

10.5.8

Air sensor tuning and Tool drift alarm

To perform an air sensor tuning click the Perform Air sensor tuning button.

10.5.9

Tool drift alarm

Tool drift alarm is a function that detect changes in tool performance (tool drift) before it has an impact on
production. The cause of this performance change can be lack of oil in the pulse mechanism, a technical fault
in the tool or a change in line air pressure.
Tool drift alarm calculates a moving average of the relative torque and relative pulse frequency (described
below) after each tightening. If the average is above or below an activated limit, the Alarm lamp on the
controller will start flashing and an event code will be generated. The Tool drift alarm does not reject a
tightening, it only generates a warning.

178

9836 3123 01

Tool

10.5.9.1

Enabling Tool drift alarm

In the PF Map Tool branch, double-click on Maintenance and then select Tool drift alarm general
or Tool drift alarm limits in the navigation area.

The Tool Drift data activated is always on. This means that the system collects data for tool drift
calculation in the background.
Normally all Psets are used as basis for the tool drift calculation. The torque statistics is based on the
achieved percentage of target torque. Before tightenings from a new Pset are included in tool drift
alarm tightenings, the system will collect <Sample size> tightenings with this Pset. Based on these
tightenings, a mean frequency will be calculated. When further tightenings are made with the Pset, the
pulse frequency is compared to the mean frequency calculated from the first tightenings, generating a
relative frequency value. A value of 100% means the pulse frequency has not changed since the mean
was calculated.

9836 3123 01

179

Tool

Because tool drift alarm values are based on relative torque and pulse frequency, it is possible to use
Psets with different target torques and pulse frequencies as basis for tool drift calculation. If you feel
uncertain of which Psets to use, select all Psets (default). To deselect a Pset, click on the Set Pset
used button and deselect one or more Psets and confirm with OK.

Set the number of tightenings to be used in calculation of average (500 is default, generally the sample
size should be an approximation of the average number of tightenings during 24 hours or the maximum
1000.)
Select Tightenings to be included (All or Only approved).
Tick the checkboxes below Tool Drift alarm limits that is of interrest. Normally, ticking all boxes
provides the best tool drift alarm functionality. Each limit value will be updated after <sample size,
parameter D902> number of tightenings has been performed, if the value is 0.0 by that time.
N
e!ot

Only tightenings where the tool has shut off are included in Tool Drift Alarm supervision.
Click the Store button to save the settings.

180

9836 3123 01

Tool

The tool drift alarm function is now active and you can start using the tool. You can also manually set
the tool drift alarm limits at any time, both before and after the calculation of the first average. It is
however recommended that you use the automatically calculated limits.
All limits that is zero by the time that the first average is calculated will automatically be set by the
system, all other will be left unmodified. You can activate or deactivate the limits using their
corresponding checkboxes.

You can view the current status of the Tool drift alarm using the View Tool Drift alarm results button.

10.5.9.2

Restarting Tool Drift alarm

Tool Drift alarm can be restarted at any time when clicking the Reset Tool Drift alarm button, for example
after the tool has been serviced.
When having clicked Reset Tool Drift alarm and acknowledged that historical data really is to be deleted,
a message will pop up asking whether the alarm limits should be reset as well. After this, the historical values
(and, if desired, the alarm limits) will be reset. Tool drift data collection will start again from the beginning.
If alarm limits are reset, these will be updated again the next time <sample size> tightenings has been performed.

10.5.9.3

Tool drift alarm supervision

After initiation, historic results will be displayed in the Tool Drift alarm results panel for each new tightening.
To see the latest results, click the View Tool Drift results button.

9836 3123 01

181

Tool

Clicking Pset ref button will bring up a window showing the current Psets reference values.
When tool drift alarm is initiated the controller will continuously, after each tightening, compare the mean
values of the selected parameters with the limits that are set. If any mean value parameter exceeds a preset
alarm limit for 10 consecutive tightenings the "alarm" light on the controller will flash continuously and an
event code will be generated, stating which parameter has caused the alarm.
The event code will be generated after every 100:th tightening, as long as the tool drift alarm is active. If
desired, it is possible to configure a digital output to trigger when Tool Drift Alarm activates for any parameter.
When a new Pset is created, it will automatically be included in the Tool Drift Alarm function, provided the
user does not actively exclude it as described in section Enabling Tool drift alarm, item 3. Tool Setup and
Monitoring Setup tightenings are NOT included in the calculations of the mean value for the Tool Drift
Alarm parameters.
Changing tool does not affect Tool Drift Alarm supervision, provided the same tool size is used. If the new
tool has a different target torque and/or different application area it is important to note that Tool Drift Alarm
supervision might be influenced. It is recommended to restart Tool Drift Alarm in such cases.

10.5.9.4

Tool drift alarm graphical view

After the number of tightenings passes the sample size, it is possible to see a graphical view of the tool drift.
Click View Tool Drift results button to view the information.

182

9836 3123 01

Tool

The graph will show a staple diagram containing maximum 80 values depicting the maximum and minimum
values of the subgroup for each parameter. The subgroup size is 2 in the beginning. When all staples have
been drawn the subgroup size will be doubled and the staple diagram will proceed from the 41:st position
in the graph. This is continuously repeated as the tool performs tightenings.
There are two buttons to facilitate the graphical view. Fit Y-scale will adapt the curve so that it optimally
fits the Y-axis. Clicking the button again will return to the previous position (toggle function). It is also
possible to make operations in the graph itself. With the left mouse button it is possible to zoom into and out
of a capture area in the graph. This is especially useful when the staples are very small.

9836 3123 01

183

Tool

If the capture box is made from top left to bottom right it will zoom in, as can be seen in the picture
to the right. It shows an expanded view of the individual staples, each staple ranging from the minimum
value to the maximum value within the subgroup size.
If the capture box is made from bottom right to top left it will zoom back to initial settings. With the
right mouse button it is possible to move inside the graph. Clicking the Reset axis button will return
graph to initial appearance.

10.6

Tool lock functionality

The tool can be locked either by an internal state that does not allow the tool to be used, or intentionally by
configurable functions in the controller or by external sources.

184

9836 3123 01

Tool

10.6.1

Locking of tools from an external source in time critical applications

When production is arranged into line assembly, the tightening process is often planned in great detail. To
assure that tightenings are performed on the correct joints, the user might wish to disable the tool in between
operations on the same vehicle within a work station. In addition, there can be a timing requirement, meaning
that the tightenings have to be made within a certain time period.
If in these cases an external source (for example fieldbus) is used to disable and enable the tools, it is important
to thoroughly analyze the risks. Otherwise reduced productivity or bad ergonomics can be the result.
There is a small delay between the moments when the triggering event occurs, for example a ready signal
from a positioning system, and when the tool is actually enabled or disabled. During a delay, the operator
can unintentionally disturb the counting in the process by pressing the trigger several times.
Therefore, the use of external sources for regularly locking and unlocking the tool in time critical applications
is not recommended. In order to enable and disable the tool quickly enough in these cases, only the controller
internal sources should be applied (only 1-2 ms reaction time).
In time critical applications, the following general strategy could be used:

For enabling the tool, use the external source for selecting the Pset in the controller when the conditions
for "start tightening" are fulfilled

For disabling the tool, use functions P152 Lock at batch ok or J302 Lock at Job done, which are internal
tool locking sources within the controller

10.6.2

Intentional locking of tools

By locking and unlocking the tool in certain situations, it is possible to prevent unintended usage of it. In
this way it is possible to avoid some of the mistakes that could normally be made during assembly.

10.6.3

Definition of a locked tool

When the tool is locked, one or several services are disabled. Services are normally tightening and loosening,
but do in some cases include tracking.

10.6.4

Tool locking event codes

In case the tool is locked while a user attempts to start a service (normally tightening or loosening), the
controller shows an event code to explain why or by which functionality the tool is locked. In case the tool
is locked while a service is being performed, the service is aborted and an event code explaining why, or by
which function, the tool was locked is displayed.
9836 3123 01

185

Tool

For more information, see section Event codes.

10.6.4.1

Combinations and tool locking

Different conditions, functions and external sources may simultaneously cause the tool to be locked.
For example, the tool can be locked both by the digital input function Disable tool n o and by the "Lock on
reject" function. For the tool to be unlocked, the digital input Disable tool n o must be altered and the "Lock
on reject" lock must be unlocked using the digital inputs Unlock tool / Master unlock tool or the CW/CCW
switch selector (depending on configuration).
When event codes are generated while the tool is locked for multiple reasons, only one of the possible event
codes is generated. It is not specified which of the possible event code messages that will be generated.

186

9836 3123 01

Accessories

11

Accessories

11.1

Introduction

In the Accessories branch, the digital inputs and outputs of the controller are configured and
diagnosed. The branch also includes information about the devices connected to the I/O bus
and tool bus, and how to configure these devices.

11.2

Digital I/O

The controller has extensive I/O capabilities.

Apart from the internal I/O ports it is also
possible to connect up to 15 external I/O
devices to the controller I/O bus, such as a Pset
selector, I/O Expander or Stacklight.
In the PF Map branch, open
Accessories>Digital I/O and double-click
Configuration, or right-click Configuration
and select Open I/O set.

9836 3123 01

187

Accessories

The I/O set dialog box appears.

Select Device type.
Select Digital inputs and Relays (with relay timer). For more information, see section Digital I/O and
fieldbus items.
Note that J330 Use line control must be set to Yes before the digital inputs and relay settings for line
control can be activated.

188

9836 3123 01

Accessories

In the PF Map, open Accessories>Digital I/O

and double-click Diagnostic, or right-click
Diagnostic and select Open I/O Diagnostic.

The I/O Diagnostic window appears.

Here the status of all internal I/O devices can be viewed. Refer to section I/O bus Diagnostics for the I/O
bus devices.
It is possible to set the status of relays. All configured I/O devices appear on the list of available devices.
This function enables testing of the interaction between PF and different devices. For instance, it could
be useful when trouble shooting complex systems with one or several PLC units connected to the controller.
The Read key shows the status of the selected I/O device. The read status key has to be clicked in order
to update this view to reflect changes.
Output test function activates and de-activates relays on a selected I/O device when Set is clicked.

The Restore key restores the relays to reflect the current status of the PF. Click Read to update this view
to reflect changes triggered by other events.

9836 3123 01

189

Accessories

190

9836 3123 01

Accessories

11.3

I/O bus

The controller has extensive I/O capabilities.

Apart from the internal I/O ports it is also
possible to connect up to 15 external I/O
devices to the the controller I/O bus.
In the PF Map, open Accessories>I/O bus
and double-click Information.

Information for each device on the I/O bus is displayed.

Click Config to configure the selected device.
Click Diagnostic to diagnose the selected device.

9836 3123 01

191

Accessories

192

9836 3123 01

Accessories

In the PF Map, open Accessories>I/O bus.

Right-click Configuration and select Create
new I/O Device.
Alternatively, double-click on an existing I/O
Device to open the configuration window.

Select New I/O Device ID and Device type.

Click OK to open the configuration window.

9836 3123 01

193

Accessories

Make settings for the device by clicking on the positions (the example below shows an Selector Pset).
N
e!ot

See the user guides for each accessory device for more information.
Click Store and Close when finished with configuration.

194

9836 3123 01

Accessories

In the PF Map, open Accessories>I/O bus

and double-click Options.

Make settings for Options.

Click Store and Close window when finished.

9836 3123 01

195

Accessories

11.4

Tool bus

In the PF Map, open Accessories>Tool bus

and double-click Information.

Select Device type and click Device information.

The Device information window appears with information about the connected device.

196

9836 3123 01

Accessories

In the PF Map, open Accessories>Tool bus

and double-click Configuration.
In the Tool bus Configuration window, click
Tool Control Box.

In the appearing window you define what actions to assign to the two TCB buttons. Button 1 is the
green button, button 2 is the white button.
The green button is by default set to Pulsor Tool Enable. The default for the white button is Air Hose
Test.

9836 3123 01

197

Accessories

11.5

Printer

In the PF Map, open Accessories>Printer.

198

9836 3123 01

Accessories

The connected A400 Brand and A401 Paper size are setup here. If A402 Continuous print is activated,
then it is possible to also select A404 New page at Job done.
Push the Print button on the Power Focus Graph front panel to view a list of available reports to print.
Click Store to save configuration.

9836 3123 01

199

Sync

12

Sync

12.1

Introduction

Sync allows a group of spindles to perform the same task simultaneously.

Examples where a Sync solution could be applicable are the tightening
of car wheels and the tightening of cylinder head bolts. The Sync function
is RBU-dependent.
N
e!ot

This section includes screenshots from ToolsTalk PF. The screenshots show examples of parameter settings
and are NOT intended to be generally applicable. Check with your local Atlas Copco representative how to
set up your specific system environment.
See parameter list section Sync for a description of all available Sync options.

9836 3123 01

201

Sync

A Sync group consists of PF units working

in the same Cell.
One of the controllers is defined as Sync
reference. The other controllers are Sync
members.
The Sync reference handles the
Synchronization between the tools, the
selection of Psets and the result reporting for
the Sync. A Sync group can be viewed as one
PF with more than one tool.
A Sync group can be part of a Job (see chapter
Job). Note that it is the Job reference, and not
the Sync reference, that counts the batch in a
Job with Sync.
The status information on each controller and
tool shows the individual result for that
spindle. The overall Sync OK/NOK can be
given on the fieldbus, RE-Alarm or relays
controlled by the Sync reference. The results
from every spindle are registered separately.
The status from individual Sync members can
be viewed on the Sync reference controller.
Sync is performed in steps or SynchroTork (PF4000 only). In step Sync, all Synchronized spindles
wait for each other at a number of checkpoints before they continue with the next step. A typical two
stage tightening has checkpoints at P111 First target and P113 Final target. SynchroTork allows
continuous Synchronization during the final tightening.

12.2

Sync prerequisites and limitations

A Sync group consists of two to ten PF units. The SynchroTork option is limited to six tools.
All Sync members must be part of the same cell, but a cell can consist of more than one Sync group. The
cell reference does not have to be a member of the Sync group. For creating a cell, see section Controller.
All Sync members must have the same Sync reference.

202

9836 3123 01

Sync

All Sync members must be connected via the internal I/O-bus, which is used for time critical Synchronization
communication. Do not connect two Sync groups via the I/O-bus.
The Sync reference can control external I/O bus units, such as RE-Alarm, Socket Selector and I/O Expander.
All Psets must be configured from the Sync reference.
Do not configure any external I/O devices (device 1-15) on the Sync members.
No I/O bus cable connection is allowed from any of the sync group members to a non-sync group member
PF unit.
Ethernet communication is used for non-time critical communication such as start-up time, creating/updating
Psets and Multistages and transferring result data between the Sync reference and the Sync members.
To be able to use Sync start, the 4-pin remote start connector on the Power Focus back panel must be configured for remote start.
If a sync group is used for loosening the entire group will be classified as OK when at least one sync member
performs a successful loosening.
In a Synchronized application, the Sync communication has top priority on the I/O bus when the tools
are running. For that reason tool start, tool disable and other safety critical functions must not be
connected to the I/O bus via I/O Expander.

For a description of how to do Sync motor tuning, see section Tool.

12.3

Hardware configuration

Connect all PF units in the Sync group via the I/O-bus on the back panel.
Set the 4-pin remote start connector to remote start on each of the Sync members, and to the selected start
source on the Sync reference.
If applicable, connect external I/O devices (for example alarms or start source) to the Sync reference, but
never to the Sync members.

9836 3123 01

203

Sync

Sync reference

I/O-bus connection 1 is
terminated or external
I/O devices are
connected.

204

Sync member

Sync member

Last Sync member

I/O-bus connection 2 is
always terminated.

9836 3123 01

Sync

12.4

Sync configuration

To set up a Sync group, configurations are

made in Network, Tool and Sync windows.

9836 3123 01

205

Sync

12.4.1

Sync members configuration

Connect the Sync reference.

In the PF Map, open Controller>Network.
Ensure that all PF units in the Synchronized
group are part of the same Cell. Parameter
C312 Cell reference IP must be the same.
In this example, PF is a Sync member, and the
Sync reference is the same as the cell
reference.
Click Store to save settings.

In the PF Map, open Tool>Configuration>Tool start, and set T200 Tool start select source to Sync
start.
Click Store to save settings and restart PF.
Repeat the procedure for all Sync members.

12.4.2

Sync reference configuration

Connect the Sync reference.

In the PF Map, open Controller>Network. Ensure that the Sync reference is part of the same cell as
the Sync members.
Set C317 Sync reference IP equal to C300 IP address.
Click Store to save settings.
Restart the Sync reference controller and connect ToolsTalk PF to it again.

206

9836 3123 01

Sync

In the PF Map, open Sync.

Select controllers in the Available Power Focus list and click Add to create a Sync group list.
Note: The Sync reference (SR) must always be at the top of Sync group list.
Make settings in the Options field. Store and close the window.

12.5

Troubleshooting

Follow the procedure in this section. For more information, see section Event codes.
Symptom

Reason/Action

Tools in a Sync group do not

Programming errors:
start or do not tighten correctly 1. Check that all Psets are configured from the Sync reference.
2. Check that all Sync members have T200 Tool start select source set to Sync start.
3. Check that all Sync members have C317 Sync reference IP set to the IP-address of the
Sync reference.
4. Reboot any reprogrammed Sync member or Sync reference.
Hardware-related errors:
1. Check that the I/O Bus cables between the Sync members is correctly connected and
without faults.
2. Check that the remote start connector in the Sync members is correctly wired for remote
start.
Error elimination:
1. Select a new Pset from the Sync reference. If all Sync members change to the same Pset,
the Sync group programming is correct. If not, check the programming and the Ethernet
cables and connections.

9836 3123 01

207

Sync

Symptom

Reason/Action
2. Select normal loosening and start a loosening from the Sync reference. If not all Sync
members start, check the tool trigger configuration in the Sync members and the wiring
of the remote start input. Check also the I/O Bus connection and the I/O Bus cabling.
3. If a single spindle does not start, the tool, tool-cable or controller might be broken. If all
spindles in the group start loosening but not tightening, check that all Psets are configured
in the same way. If not, restore them again from the Sync reference (all Psets must be
configured from the Sync reference).

An event code is displayed.

208

See section Event codes.

9836 3123 01

Identifier

13

Identifier

13.1

Introduction

The Identifier section describes the identifier concept, functions and settings.
An identifier, or barcode string, can be used for example to select Psets or Jobs, identify
motor vehicles (VIN) and other work pieces, variants, and operators. The tightening result
can then be saved together with this information.
For parameter descriptions see Parameter List, section Identifier.

13.2

Identifier concepts

There are three ways to use the identifier function, all possible to use independently of each other:

To select a Pset/Multistage or Job through scanning a barcode string (only Type 1).
To create a work order for identification of, for example, work pieces connected to a tightening.
To store additional information to the tightening result.
An identifier (barcode) string can have different standards and lengths. It can be scanned and stored as it is,
but PF can also be configured to identify parts of the string. These parts are called significant strings.
The Type 1 identifier can be configured for selection of Pset/Multistage or Job in addition to being stored
as additional information to the tightening result or being selected in a work order.
The Type 2, Type 3 and Type 4 identifiers can be stored as additional information to the tightening result
or be selected in a work order. These multiple identifiers are RBU-dependent.
A significant string is a set of characters within a barcode string that can be defined.
The significant positions are the positions where the significant strings are located.
A wildcard character is represented by a symbol and means that a certain position in the significant string
can have any character value.
A work order consists of different types of identifiers (Type 1 is mandatory). It is configured when the
controller should receive identifiers in a predefined order. An identifier not included in the work order is

9836 3123 01

209

Identifier

called Optional identifier. An optional identifier must not be identical to an identifier included in the work
order.
The Result part is additional information stored together with each tightening result in the controller database.
This information can come from one or more of the defined identifier types independently. Multiple identifiers provide storage of up to four result parts (RBU-dependent) after memory reconfiguration. The additional
information from the result parts is displayed in the Identifier monitor, and the result of the tightening is
displayed in the Result Monitor.
The result part additional information is stored with the tightening result in the controller database.
Example:

An airbag is mounted in a car.

Type 1 represents the airbag which can be of different variants that need different Psets. Type 2 represents
the car (VIN) and Type 3 identifies the work station.
A work order is configured where Type 2 (VIN) and Type 3 (work station) have to be scanned before
Type 1 (airbag).

Each tightening result from the Psets listed under Type 1 is stored with the VIN, the airbag ID, and the
work station ID.
The Identifier monitor shows the Work order and the Result monitor shows the tightening result. The
tightening result with all the additional information can be retrieved via command Get all results or via
Tools Net.
Part Id scan: This concept offers the opportunity to scan a variant of a part and select a specific Pset in
the Job. (The job itself may have been selected by another identifier). The significant numbers and part
id identifier length do not necessarily have to have a full match to select a specific Pset. This is achieved
by means of wildcards.

210

9836 3123 01

Identifier

13.3

Identifier prerequisites and details

Prerequisites for significant strings:

400 significant strings can be set for Type 1

A string can only be added once in Type 1
A Pset, Multistage or Job ID can be added to any string of Type 1
Wildcards can be used in Type 1 strings if the significant positions are different and outside the length
of some Type 1 strings

The number of characters in the significant string (for example 10) must be the same as the number of
significant positions

The length can be max 100 characters

Standard alphanumeric characters are accepted. Apostrophe (') and colon (:) are not accepted
Standard alphanumeric ASCII characters (33-126) are accepted
Max scanned
characters

Max significant
positions

Max significant strings Max stored characters

Type 1

100

50

400

25

Type 2

100

50

25

Type 3

100

50

25

Type 4

100

50

25

Prerequisites for incoming data:

Identifiers can be sent to the controller via a scanner (connected to the serial port), fieldbus or Ethernet.
Input source must be correct (accepted).

The incoming identifier string must have the following barcode reader standard syntax: STX<data>ETX.
(STX=02H ETX=03H).

An incoming identifier that goes directly to a Job member erases the received identifier that is sent to the
member from the Job reference.
Prerequisites for result parts:

If using more than one result part, the memory configuration C604 No. of identifier result parts must be
updated (RBU-dependent).

If the system is set up in a Cell Job the parameter C604 No. of identifier result parts must be configured
with identical values (1-4) for all controller units included in the Job group.

9836 3123 01

211

Identifier

The information from the identifier types can be displayed in the result parts independently of result part
number. For example, all result parts can display information from Type 1 (or even depending on the
subtype of the Type 1).

A work order has to be completed before the controller stores the accepted identifiers in the result database
and selects a next Pset/Multistage or Job.

Autoselected Psets in a Job will inherit the result parts (if any) from the previous Pset.
Identifier reset can be done if any of the following actions are taken:

Restoring of identifier configuration is made

A Reset all identifier command is issued from the identifier monitor or digital input
The parameters J342 Reset all identifier at Job done and I183 Reset all identifiers at Pset batch done are
activated
After a reset, the following occur:

All identifiers are reset

Work order is (cleared) aborted
Tool is unlocked if I181 Tool locked during work order is activated

212

9836 3123 01

Identifier

13.4

Configuration of identifier functions

The identifier functions are related to a number

of parameters and views.
Identifier includes settings for configuration

of identifiers, result parts and work order. A

command to send an identifier to PF directly
is also located here.
Configuration; Identifier can be set as the

source to select Pset, Job, or Job override.

Memory includes settings for Result parts.

Note that memory reconfiguration requires

saving of controller to file and reboot of the
controller. If a memory reconfiguration is
needed, it is recommended to start the
procedure here. See section Memory.
Identifier Monitor displays the result parts.

The following functions are also available

here:

Bypass identifier
Reset latest identifier
Reset all identifiers

13.4.1

Configuring identifiers

The procedure to set identifiers differs between identifier types 1 and types 2-4. Always start with Type 1.
To set up identifiers, do the following:
In the PF Map, double-click Identifier to open the Type setup window. The figure below shows a
completely configured identifier setup.

9836 3123 01

213

Identifier

Select Input source for identifier Type 1.

State Length of the incoming identifier. - (hyphen) means no length check.
Click Set to open the pop up window Identifier significant position setup.

Mark the significant positions for the identifier. The positions can be selected freely. Click OK.
To define the significant string for identifier Type 1, click Set strings for Type 1 to open the Identifier
Type 1 string setup window.
Note: To define the significant string for identifier Type 2-4, click the box and type the string directly.

214

9836 3123 01

Identifier

Write string name in field Add identifier string and click Add.
Wildcards can be used in Type 1 strings if the significant positions are different and outside the length
of some Type 1 strings.
Double-click a box to select Pset, Multistage or Job to each string. When finished, click OK.
Click Store to save the settings, or continue with

Configuring a new type of identifier

Configuring a work order
Configuring Result parts
The STwrench TAG must be programmed in a special way in ToolsTalk in order to work properly,
when using Identifier Input source STwrench tag. The length must be 3 with 3 significant characters.
For example, if the tag number is 1 the configured string must be "001".

9836 3123 01

215

Identifier

13.4.2

Configuring a work order

To configure a work order, do the following:

216

9836 3123 01

Identifier

Open PF Map > Identifier > Options.

Add identifier types to the work order, and arrange the correct order using the arrow buttons.
Note: Identifier Type 1 must always be included in the work order.
If applicable, select Tool locked during work order and I183 Reset all identifiers at Pset batch done.
When activating I183 Reset all identifiers at Pset batch done:

All identifiers are reset

Work order is (cleared) aborted
Tool is unlocked if I181 Tool locked during work order is activated
To avoid re-selecting an ongoing Job, Pset or Mset by a work order (and override selected), check the
I184 Ignore identical work orders option.
Click Store to save the settings.
Note: The Send Identifier button is described in Additional Identifier functions.

9836 3123 01

217

Identifier

13.4.3

Configuring result parts

To configure more than one result part, the parameter C604 No of Identifier result parts must be set to the
correct number of result parts. If a memory reconfiguration is made, the controller data must be stored to
file and the controller rebooted. See section Memory for instructions. It is possible to configure up to 4 separate result parts.
The results are displayed in the Identifier Monitor. See section Additional Identifier functions.
To configure result parts, do the following:
Open PF Map > Identifier > Type setup.
Select the identifier type to correspond with Result part 1 (2, 3 and 4) from the drop-down list.
Click Set to open the pop up window Identifier significant position setup.
Set Significant positions by marking character positions that should be added to the result part.
Click Store when finished.
In the example below, six positions from Type 4 are copied to result part 1 and stored together with the
tightening result. Eight positions for Type 1 (any subtype) are copied to result part 2, and so on.

For Type 1, it is possible to specify any of the subtypes Pset/Mset/Job in any of the Result parts. For
example, result part 2 can have Type 1 subtype Job and result part 3 can have Type 1 subtype Pset.

13.4.4

Additional identifier functions

The following functions are available in the Identifier Monitor window:

218

9836 3123 01

Identifier

Function

Description

Bypass identifier

Skips a specified identifier type in a work order.

It is not possible to bypass the first type in the work order if it simultaneously exist types
outside the work order.

Reset latest identifier

The latest accepted identifier string is cleared with the command (or digital input) Reset
latest identifier.
It is not possible to perform Reset latest identifier for the last type in a work order.

Reset all identifier

All accepted identifier strings are cleared with the command (or digital input) Reset all
identifiers.

The following function is available in the Send Identifier window in the Identifier menu (see figure in section
Configuring a work order).
Function

Description

Send Identifier

Sends an identifier string from ToolsTalk to the controller manually. The result is displayed
in the Identifier Monitor.
To select Pset/Multistage or Job from an identifier string, parameters C200 Pset, C201 Job
or C202 Joboverride have to be set to Identifier.

9836 3123 01

219

FieldBus

14

FieldBus

14.1

Introduction

FieldBus communication can be used for data communication between the controller unit

and PLC's. It is an effective and fast way for data transferring of short data packages. It is
normally used to send discrete I/O data instead of using a large number of discrete cables that
have to be hard wired to relays and DigIn. For parameter descriptions see Parameter list,
section FieldBus.
There are many different FieldBus standards on the market and they all have different hardware and software
protocols. To be able to communicate on FieldBus, the controller must be equipped with a specific card for
the preferred type of FieldBus.
N
e!ot

The controller acts as a client in a FieldBus system. A PLC or similar will act as the reference (master).
With ToolsTalk the FieldBus functionality in controller can be configured to fit the user-specific bitmap. It
also makes configuration or modification of a bitmap very easy. When the configuration is done, it can be
downloaded to the controller or saved as a file for later use.

9836 3123 01

221

FieldBus

14.2

General setup

In the PF Map, double-click FieldBus.

Select F100 FieldBus type from the

drop down menu.

222

9836 3123 01

FieldBus

N
e!ot

All fieldbus parameters are reset to

default and data items cleared.
Confirm by clicking OK.

The screenshot below displays available parameters for fieldbus type DeviceNet. Click Store to save the
settings.

14.2.1

Parameters in General setup

The table below shows the parameters available for the selected FieldBus type. For an explanation of the
parameters, see parameter list section FieldBus.

Parameter

Device ProfiBus- Inter

Net
DP
Bus

F100 FieldBus Type X

9836 3123 01

InterModBus Control- ModBus/ Ethernet/ Bus

Plus
Net
TCP
IP
2MB

Profinet- Profinet
IO
IRT
FL-Net CC-link

223

FieldBus

Device ProfiBus- Inter

Net
DP
Bus

InterModBus Control- ModBus/ Ethernet/ Bus

Plus
Net
TCP
IP
2MB

Profinet- Profinet
IO
IRT
FL-Net CC-link

F102 From PF
DataLength

F103 To PF
DataLength

Parameter

F104 From PF Global

DataLength

F105 To PF Global
DataLength

F106 From PF Data

Offset

F107 To PF Data
Offset

F110 Set node

X
address and baudrate
from
F111 FB Node
Address

F112 Baudrate

F113 Connection
Mode

F120 Set node

address from

F121 FB address
from

F130 PCP length

F131 Process
DataLength

F140 Set source

address from

F141 Source address

F150 IP address

F151 Subnet Mask

F152 Gateway

F155 Device Name

224

9836 3123 01

FieldBus

Device ProfiBus- Inter

Net
DP
Bus

Parameter

InterModBus Control- ModBus/ Ethernet/ Bus

Plus
Net
TCP
IP
2MB

Profinet- Profinet
IO
IRT
FL-Net CC-link

F160 Virtual fieldbus

F161 Virtual from PF

data length

F162 Virtual to PF
data length

F163 Virtual from PF

data offset

F164 Virtual to PF
data offset

F170

F171

F200 FB Update
Interval

F210 Tool Stop at

Offline

F220 Read result

handshake

F300 Bitmap select

14.2.2

View fieldbus information

Select General setup.

Click Get fieldbus info to display fieldbus
module type, module software version, module
serial number and status of the LED's.

9836 3123 01

225

FieldBus

14.3

From PF setup and to PF setup

Select From PF setup or To PF setup.

Via From PF Setup the bitmap (defined in F102 From PF Data Length) sent out from the controller can
be configured.
Via To PF setup the bitmap (defined in F103 To PF Data Length) sent in to the controller can be
configured.
Click Add item to activate a selection list. On the right side of the item list, see information about
highlighted item.
Highlight the item and double-click on it or click Add. The item is then entered to the item list on the
first available line.

226

9836 3123 01

FieldBus

In the list, the start word, start byte, start bit, and length for the selected item are visible. It is easy to
change the position in the bitmap by changing the start position in the item list and pressing Enter on
the keyboard after each line is changed. If the length of an item is variable, it can also be changed here.
It is also possible to drag and drop directly in the bitmap. In this case, the start positions in the item list
are updated automatically. If the bitmap is changed, and a conflict occurs, this part is marked with red.
To delete an item, highlight it in the item list and click Delete item.
N
e!ot

The max number of selected items is 60 in From PF setup and 60 in To PF setup.

For detailed information of the available selections, see section Digital I/O and fieldbus items.

14.3.1

FieldBus modes

The normal mode is when neither Diagnostic mode nor Monitor mode is selected. In normal mode, the operator can change position of a bit in a word (in a byte) for a selected item (not the content of the bit). For instance, the operator can change the Job off from bit position 7 to bit position 3 just by drag and drop, or by
writing it into the Bit column and pressing Enter on the keyboard.

14.3.1.1

Diagnostic mode

In Diagnostic mode, it is possible to set fieldbus data in ToolsTalk and send the data to the controller by
clicking Set value. If Diagnostic mode From PF Setup is used, then the controller passes data from ToolsTalk
to the PLC and ignores the data from the controller. If Diagnostic mode To PF Setup is used, the controller
activates functions, which are set in ToolsTalk and ignores PLC data.
N
e!ot

In Diagnostic mode the operator can only change a small part of the fieldbus setting data (only the content
of a bit from zero <--> one).

14.3.1.2

Monitor mode

Monitor mode key is used to monitor FieldBus data communication for testing purpose. This function works

only when ToolsTalk is online (connected to the controller).

When Monitor Mode is active, the data from the controller to PLC are visible in the From PF Setup window
bitmap. Contrary, the data from PLC to the controller are visible in the To PF Setup window bitmap. It is
not possible to change and store fieldbus configuration in monitor mode. Data can be displayed in two formats,
defined data type format and binary format. The data in the monitor windows are updated at a rate of three
messages per second.

9836 3123 01

227

FieldBus

14.4

Storing fieldbus configuration

To store or read fieldbus data, first activate the fieldbus window. On the Menu bar, use command File>Read
FieldBus, or File>Save FieldBus. The fieldbus file extension is "*.pff".

14.5

Disable fieldbus carried signals

It is possible to run PLC-selected Jobs over the fieldbus in automatic mode (i.e. "fieldbus" is selected for
parameter C201 Job), and select Jobs with a digital input in emergency mode (i.e. "DigIn" is selected for
parameter C202 Job override). When emergency mode is activated, the fieldbus signals could still disturb
the communication. To avoid this type of problem it is recommended to use digital input Disable fieldbus
carried signals. When this digital input goes high the following events occur:

FieldBus communication is disabled

Relay FieldBus carried signals disabled goes high
In ToolsTalk monitoring mode on fieldbus "To PF" side, it is possible to display changes in signals sent
to the controller over the fieldbus. (Note that the signals have no effect on the controller , since all fieldbus
communication is disabled).

On the fieldbus side "From PF", bits are reset to zero (0)
The traffic of "keep alive" signals continues on the fieldbus. In this way no event codes (i.e. No connection
on fieldbus) are displayed

All tools are enabled (presupposed that the tools were disabled from a source over the fieldbus before
then)

If there is a running Job, which has been selected via the fieldbus, the Job is aborted

14.6

FieldBus data format

This section describes the different data types that are used in the fieldbus configuration.

14.6.1

Bit map select (Endian Mode)

Big endian (Motorola mode) is default setting for ProfiBus-DP, Profinet IO, InterBus, Interbus 2Mb, CClink, ModBusPlus and ModBus TCP.

228

9836 3123 01

FieldBus

Little endian (Intel mode) is default setting for DeviceNet, ControlNet, Ethernet/IP and FL-net.
Big endian (Motorola mode)
Byte 0 (send 1st)

Byte 1 (send 2nd)

MS Byte (PF)

LS Byte (PF)

Little endian (Intel mode)

Byte 1 (send 2nd)

Byte 0 (send 1st)

MS Byte (PF)

LS Byte (PF)

14.6.2

FieldBus data types

The controller uses position format in all encoding and decoding data types. In controller position format
the Most Significant Bit (MSB) is the bit furthest to the left and the Least Significant Bit (LSB) is the bit
furthest to the right.
If a data type is less than one word, the MSB is the bit furthest to the left. If data type is longer than one
word, the MSB is the bit furthest top-left. If a FieldBus type uses Intel Endian, byte numbers are swapped
before encoding or decoding to a specific data type.
The data field in the FieldBus is from the beginning a blank data field without structure. To map the controller
item data types into FieldBus define FieldBus Data Type, which holds the information about placement and
structure of a certain application data type mapped into the FieldBus data field.
The table below shows the different data types used in FieldBus data. The section items from/to controller
shows the data type available for different items.
Data type

Description

Bit

One bit. Normally used for discrete I/O-data.

Bit Field (BF)

Length is 1-16 bits. All bits must be in the same byte. The left bit is the most significant bit and the
right bit is the less significant bit, i.e. 0001=1, 1000= 8.

Character (Char)

One byte ASCII code.

Character String Change

(CSC)

Character string. Each character uses one byte ASCII code. Range: 2 - 25 bytes.

9836 3123 01

229

FieldBus

Data type

Description

Character String Input (CSI) Character string with an extra "counter" byte in front. The extra byte is an integer counter and must
increase each time when the character string is entered to be able to detect a new input. To enter the
same value again (e.g. the same Job number), just change the counter.
Fixed Point Number (Fixed Two-byte integer part and two-byte decimal part. The first two bytes hold the integer part and the
point)
last two bytes hold the decimal part. Used to represent torque value.
Unsigned 16 (U16)

16-bit unsigned integer. Decimal 0 - 65 535.

Unsigned 32 (U32)

32-bit unsigned integer. Decimal 0 - 4 294 967 295.

U32_HNW

32-bit unsigned integer. MSW is the higher number word. Only shown in Intel Endian

CharStringChangeIntel
(CSCI)

Character string. Each character uses one byte ASCII code. Range: 2 - 25 bytes. This type makes
Intel Endian character string follows byte order; the first character is the lowest byte in the string.
Only shown in Intel Endian

CharStringInputIntel (CSII) Character string with an extra "counter" byte in front. The extra byte is an integer counter and must
increase each time when the character string is entered to be able to detect a new input. If you want
to enter the same value again (e.g. the same Job number), just change the counter. This type makes
Intel Endian character string follows the byte order, the integer counter is the lowest byte in the
String. Only shown in Intel Endian
OctetArray (OA)

It contains several octet data in the byte order.

LongCharStringChange
(LCSC)

It contains max 100 bytes character.

LongCharStrChIntel
(LCSCI)

In Intel mode, only allows whole word, up to 100 bytes. Only shown in Intel Endian.

N
e!ot

Common for all data types is that a change must occur in PLC output area (To PF) to get the controller to
detect a new data entry. For example, if you want to select JOB number 3 two times in a row you must select
0 in between.

14.6.2.1

Character string

Character String is in a reading order, i.e. from left to right, from top to bottom, regardless of the byte order.
The difference between CharStringChange and CharStringInput is a counter byte added before character
string in CharStringInput. When the counter changes, the new input is considered.
Big endian (Motorola mode)

230

9836 3123 01

FieldBus

Data type

Word

Byte 0

Byte 1

CharStringChange

1 (counter)

CharStringInput

Convert to PF data
(hex)

Convert to FB data
(hex)

PSET2(00)

PSET2(00)

(01)PSET2

(01)PSET2

Little endian (Intel mode)

Data type

Word

Byte 0

Byte 1

CharStringChange

9836 3123 01

Convert to PF data
(hex)

Convert to FB data
(hex)

231

FieldBus

Data type

CharStringInput

CharStringChangeIntelF

Word

Byte 0

Byte 1

1 (counter)

8
CharStringInputIntelF

14.6.2.2

1 (counter)

10

11

Convert to PF data
(hex)

Convert to FB data
(hex)

PSET2(00)

SPTE(00)2

(01)PSET2

P(01)ES2T

PSET2(00)

PSET2(00)

(01)PSET2

(01)PSET2

Fixed point number

Fixed point number integer part is in low number word, and decimal part is in high number word. The table
below shows the conditions valid for the integer and decimal parts (i.e. if integer part is 1 digit or 2 digits,
decimal part is 2 digits):
Integer part (in digits)

Decimal part (in digits)

1 or 2

Big endian (Motorola mode)

Data type

Word

Byte 0

Byte 1

FixedPointNumber

12

232

Convert to PF data

Convert to FB data
(hex)

9836 3123 01

FieldBus

Data type

Word

Byte 0

Byte 1

Convert to PF data

Convert to FB data
(hex)

15

12.15

(00 0B 00 0F)

Convert to PF data

Convert to FB data
(hex)

12.04

(0B 00 04 00)

Little endian (Intel mode)

Data type

Word

Byte 0

Byte 1

FixedPointNumber

12

14.6.2.3

Integer

Unsigned16 is a 16-bit integer and Unsigned32 is a 32-bit integer. U32_HMW is a special case of Unsigned32,
which is used in Intel Endian.
Big endian (Motorola mode)

Data type

Word

Byte 0

Byte 1

Convert to PF data

Convert to FB data
(hex)

Unsigned16

256

(01 00)

Unsigned32

0 (MSB)

0 (LSB)

65536

(00 01 00 00)

Little endian (Intel mode)

9836 3123 01

233

FieldBus

Data type

Word

Byte 0

Byte 1

Convert to PF data

Convert to FB data
(hex)

Unsigned16

256

(00 01)

Unsigned32

0 (MSB)

0 (LSB)

65536

(01 00 00 00)

1 (LSB)

0 (MSB)

(01 00 00 00)

U32_HNW

14.7

FieldBus timing

14.7.1

FieldBus general update

Note! This information is valid for PF applications >= 10.16. For previous releases refer to the corresponding

manual.
Output signals (From PF) are updated once per fieldbus cycle, equal to the F200 FB Update Interval. Input
signals (To PF) shorter than the value specificied in F200 can produce undefined results. Setting signals like
PsetSelect should be stable at least one F200 before controlled action can be executed (for example: rundown
start). Otherwise the controller can produce unexpected results. Too frequent changes in To PF data can
cause controller malfunction due to the limited resources in FB handling. This is why the data should not be
changed more frequently than about once per 30ms. Input data bursts should be avoided.
Note! The main difference in fieldbus signal handling occurred in release 10.9 when time space between
results for wireless tools was introduced. It was a necessary fix, due to the possibility of losing contact with

these tools in radio shadow, resulting in subsequent bursts when coming online.
Note! When using in PLC programming batch status signals note that these signals behavior has changed
for wireless tools. In version 10.15 batch status had only short duration (equal to the parameter F200 FB

234

9836 3123 01

FieldBus
Update Interval value), was send in the end of CycleComplete pulse, prior to the actual result and it could

come before the previous tightening result was reset. To correct this, batch status signals are synchronized
with result signals for wireless tools. Note that there are no signaling changes for cable tools.
Note! In version 10.16 new fieldbus signals for ST wrench tools are introduced:

CycleStart which is replica of the ToolRunning: goes high when first target is reached and goes down
after final target.

EffectiveLoosening which is set if tightening in reverse direction has occurred after cycle start and before
final target is reached. This signal has duration until next tightening (so can be read together with the
result).

SlowdownTight signal to use with for example robot application. Send to FB request for slower tight
speed when aproching final target. Bit is kept high until ToolRunning is down.

StopTight for use with for example robot application. Send to FB request to stop tightening. Bit is kept
high until ToolRunning is down. Tool connection status has no influence on this bit.

9836 3123 01

235

FieldBus

14.7.2

S and ST Cable tools

Parameter

Description

Value

Default/Typical*

Tu

Fieldbus update time, time needed to

update data on incoming command

>0 =< Tui

50ms*

Tui

Fieldbus update interval

F200 +/- 50ms

100ms

Ttc

Torque cycle time

Depends on strategy

Tdt

Data transfer time, from tool

236

50ms*

9836 3123 01

FieldBus

*
For collecting results test for the CycleComplete pulse and rise of one of TighteningStatusOK or TighteningStatusNOK bits. CycleComplete and result status and data bits are set at the end of ToolRunning and
stays high until new run is started (ToolRunning and DirSwitchCW/CCW in tightening direction), new Pset
is selected (PsetSelect) or result data is reset by rising edge of ResetResultStatus. Check the timing diagram
for exact timing between these pulses.
Loosening cycle does not reset result and cycle bits. To recognize loosening, check DirSwitchCW/CCW bits.
Note that only rising edge of the ResetResultStatus is recognized by the controller, and this pulse must
stay high at least one Tui interval. So result data must be set before reset can take place.
One rundown can be divided into couple runs represented by separate ToolRunning pulses.

14.7.3

ST Wrench tools

Parameter

Description

Value

Default/Typical*

Tu

Fieldbus update time, time needed to

update data on incoming command

>0 =< Tui

50ms*

9836 3123 01

237

FieldBus

Parameter

Description

Value

Default/Typical*

Tui

Fieldbus update interval

F200 +/- 50ms

100ms

Ttc

Torque cycle time

Depends on strategy

Tdt

Data transfer time, from tool

Depends on
configuration,
application version,
and communication
link quality**

* **If result will not come until T727 Link timeout occurs, ToolConnected bit is reset.
Note that all timing in the diagram above is only valid for STwrench tool with no communication distorsions in any way. Because of unpredictable and undetermined character of wireless communication in industrial environment, fieldbus signaling should not be treated as real time.
Correlation between ToolRunning,CycleComplete and result status and data can be lost when moving with
the tool in or out of a radio shadow, or when working in a noisy radio space. It is good programming practice
to take into consideration bits ToolConnected, BatteryLow and BatteryEmpty for wireless tools.
To read valid tightening result using Fieldbus for ST Wrench tools not working in radio shadow (offline)
use falling edge of the CycleComplete pulse and rise of one of TighteningStatusOK or TighteningStatusNOK bits. For wireless tools possibly working in a radio shadow or with communication distortions, use
only rising edge of tightening status bits (between two results both bits are going down for one fieldbus update
cycle = Tui).
Note that STwrench tool is not reporting tightening direction to PF controller. Using DirSwitchCW and
DirSwitchCCW should be avoided as potentially undefined signals***.
*** Default value for these bits varies depending on PF application release and other configuration parameters.
For 10.9 SR3 default was DirSwitchCW=0, DirSwitchCCW=1; for 14.2.5 (10.15) is opposite: DirSwitchCW=1,
DirSwitchCCW=0.

Note that during tightening and data transfer cycle (ToolRunning high or CycleComplete high) result from
previous tightening can be still active.
CycleStart signal is from version 10.16 supported for STwrench tool and follows ToolRunning.
Rehit is set/reset together with result status and data.
BatchStatus from version 10.16 is set/reset together with result status and data.
EffectiveLoosening bit is available from version 10.16 and is set when loosening have happened after

cycle start and completed and stays high until next tightening.
SlowdownTight and StopTight signals for mainly robot applications are also available from version 10.16.

238

9836 3123 01

FieldBus

14.7.4

STB tools

Parameter

Description

Value

Default/Typical*

Tu

Fieldbus update time, time needed to

update data on incoming command

>0 =< Tui

50ms*

Tui

Fieldbus update interval

F200 +/- 50ms

100ms

Tdt

Data transfer time, from tool

Depends on
configuration,
application version,
and communication
link quality**

* **If result will not come until T727 Link timeout occurs, ToolConnected bit is reset.
Same as for STwrench tools, timing dependencies between ToolRunning, DirSwitchCW/CCW and result
status and data are valid only when communication with tool is undistorted. Connection between fieldbus
and the tool cannot be treated as real time. See comments in preceeding paragraph.
CycleStart and CycleComplete signals are not implemented for STB tools, and should be treated as undefined.

Note that ToolRunning signal represents condition of tool trigger, not engine rotation as in cable tools.
Because of this, result data can change on fieldbus during continuous high ToolRunning pulse. During one
tightening the pulse must not necessary be continuous, and it depends on tool handling.
9836 3123 01

239

FieldBus

When tool is coming out from a radio shadow, the results can be reported to fieldbus in other than the tightening pace.
To recognize valid tightening result via fieldbus, it is recommended to use the rise of TighteningStatusOK
or TighteningStatusNOK bits. Between 2 valid results all result status and data bits are set low during at
least one Tui period.
Note that from version 10.16 Batch Status bits are set together with result, not as short pulse prior to result
(10.9-10.15 versions) or long status set before result and reset together (PF < 10.9).

14.8

FieldBus selector configuration

The FieldBus selector function makes it possible for an external source (PLC) to control the selection of
Psets on selectors via fieldbus.
The intended type of working stations where the proposed software is to be installed are rework stations and
similar, without fixed workflows. The tightenings are often unique for each work piece depending on the
previously performed failed tightenings on that work piece. The external source (PLC) is responsible for
setting the green LED's on the selector(s) and for selecting the Psets in the controller.
N
e!ot

To use this function the parameter C200 Pset must be set to FieldBus selector. The fieldbus selector function
can not be combined with the Job function. Note: A232 must not be set.
The selector is set up in Accessories>I/O bus>Configuration.

14.8.1

Set selector LED

Light on/flash/turn off for Selector green Led on positions where Pset is configured. Two bits for one position:
00 - off , 01 - flash, 10 - solid.
In an eight-socket selector, the first four positions are for Selector LED 1-4, and the last four positions are
for Selector LED 5-8. If a four-socket selector is used, only selector LED 1-4 is mapped.
Big endian (Motorola mode)
Byte 0
7

Byte 1
6

Device ID
LED 4

240

Not used
LED 3

LED 2

LED 1

LED 8

LED 7

LED 6

LED 5

9836 3123 01

FieldBus
Little endian (Intel mode)
Byte 1
7

Byte 0
6

Not used
LED 8

Device ID
LED 7

14.8.2

LED 6

LED 5

LED 4

LED 3

LED 2

LED 1

Selector information

Big endian (Motorola mode)

Byte 0
7

Byte 1
6

Device ID

LED 4

Bit 0-7 Socket 1-8 information (1-lifted, 0- not or

not configured, FF-all ones - more then one socket
lifted)
LED 3

LED 2

LED 1

LED 8

LED 7

LED 6

LED 5

Little endian (Intel mode)

Byte 1
7

Byte 0
6

Bit 0-7 Socket 1-8 information (1-lifted, 0- not or not Device ID

configured, FF-all ones - more then one socket lifted)
LED 8

14.8.3

LED 7

LED 6

LED 5

LED 4

LED 3

LED 2

LED 1

Selector Control Green (Red) Light

For selector external controlled function A232. Set selector green (red) light. Two bits for one position: 00
- off , 01 - flash, 10 - solid. Bitmaps are as in chapter Set Selector Led.
N
e!ot

To use this function the parameter A232 must be set.

The A232 is set up in Accessories>I/O bus>Options.

9836 3123 01

241

FieldBus

14.8.4

Functionalities of externally controlled socket selector

A description on the functionalities of an externally controlled socket selector, with different software versions,
is disclosed below:
Selector SW version 1.19

1.20

2.0-2.3

2.0-2.3

A323 Selector
External Controlled

yes

no

yes

no

yes

no

yes

no

HW set External
Control

no

no

yes

yes

C200 Pset select

source

Fbsel Selector Fbsel Fbsel Selector Fbsel Fbsel Selector Fbsel Fbsel Selector Fbsel

Green led's control

ext

PF

no*

ext

PF

no*

ext

PF

no*

ext

PF

ext

Red led's control

PF

PF

PF

ext

PF

PF

PF

PF

PF

ext

PF

PF

SelectorSocketInfo

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

no

no

no

yes

no

no

no

no

no

yes

no

no

no

no

no

no

no

no

no

no

no

no

no

no

no*

no*

yes

no*

no*

yes

no*

no*

yes

no*

no*

yes

yes

no

no

yes

no

no

yes

no

no

yes

no

Pset pos report

SelectorSocketInfo

All pos report

SelectorInfo green

leds report
SelectorInfo socket

lift
Pset select by socket no
lift

* last setting is still present if not reboot (in data fromPF or in selector).
A232 can be changed without need for reboot.
C200 can be changed without need for reboot.

14.8.5

Setting of socket selector into HW external control mode

Set

To set selector in HW External Control mode:

1. Set selector address to 0 (zero).

2. Put sockets on position 1 and 4.
3. Restart selector (cycle power).

242

9836 3123 01

FieldBus

4. Set selector address to required not equal to 0.

5. Restart selector. Green LED 1 and 4 blink shortly.
Reset

To reset selector HW External Control mode:

1. Set selector address to 0 (zero).

2. Put sockets on position 1 and 2.
3. Restart selector (cycle power).
4. Set selector address to required not equal to 0.
5. Restart selector. Green LED 1 and 2 blink shortly.

14.9

Select Pset from fieldbus and set batch size

To set batch size and select Pset from fieldbus, parameter C200 Pset must be FieldBus or FieldBus selector.
Also, parameter P150 Batch count must be set to FieldBus.
Big endian (Motorola mode)
Byte 0

Byte 1

Pset ID

Batch size

Little endian (Intel mode)

Byte 1

Byte 0

Batch size

Pset ID

Function (C200 Pset is set to FieldBus)

0 < Batch size < 99

Batch size = 0, Batch size > 99

Pset ID = 0

No Pset selected

No Pset selected

0 < Pset ID < max

number of Pset

Select Pset and set batch size

No Pset selected

Function (C200 Pset is set to FieldBus selector)

0 < Batch size < 99

9836 3123 01

Batch size = 0, Batch size > 99

243

FieldBus

Pset ID = 0

Selector socket lifted

correctly

No Pset selected

Selector socket lifted

incorrectly

Display event code E475 FieldBus

Display event code E475 FieldBus

PsetID mismatch selector lifted socket PsetID mismatch selector lifted socket
No Pset selected

0 < Pset ID < max

number of Pset

No Pset selected

No Pset selected

Selector socket lifted

correctly

Select Pset, set batch size and unlock Display event code E475 FieldBus
tool
PsetID mismatch selector lifted socket
No Pset selected

Selector socket lifted

incorrectly

Display event code E475 FieldBus

Display event code E475 FieldBus

PsetID mismatch selector lifted socket PsetID mismatch selector lifted socket
No Pset selected

No Pset selected

14.10 FieldBus information

This section lists the fieldbus types.

14.10.1 ProfiBus-DP
ProfiBus-DP is a FieldBus normally used in industrial automation, to transfer fast data for motor controllers,
MMI, I/O units and other industrial equipment. ProfiBus has an international user organisation called
ProfiBus International, PI, and other local and national organizations. General technical questions regarding
the FieldBus should be addressed to your local ProfiBus User Group in the first instance.
A contact address list is available on the ProfiBus Internet site: http://www.ProfiBus.com.
For general help on ProfiBus, contact ProfiBus International on: [email protected].
Physical interface
Interface

Description

FieldBus type

PROFIBUS DP EN 50 170 (DIN 19245)

Protocol version

1.10

Protocol stack supplier

SIEMENS

Auto baud rate detection (supported baud 9.6 kbit - 12Mbit

rate range)
Transmission media

ProfiBus bus line, type A or B specified in EN50170

Topology

Server-Client communication

244

9836 3123 01

FieldBus

Interface

Description

FieldBus connectors

9 pin female DSUB (standard)

Cable

Shielded copper cable, twisted pair

Isolation

The bus is galvanically separated from the other electronics with an on

board DC/DC converter. Bus signals (A-line and B-line) are isolated
via optics couplers.

ProfiBus DP communication ASIC

SPC3 chip from Siemens

ProfiBus-DP module
Variable

Limits

Information

Node Address

1 124 (1-99 with HW setting)

Set Switches to 00 if you want to set

the node address from SW (TT
Pulsor)

Number of nodes in a ProfiBus-DP

network

Max 126

Baud rate

Automatic (9.6 kbaud - 12 Mbaud)

Data to PF length

0 - 122 bytes The string length in the Must be the same in the controller
controller is limited to 122 bytes.
and PLC
ProfiBus-DP standard allows 244
bytes.

Data from PF length

0 - 122 bytes The string length in the Must be the same in the controller
controller is limited to 122 bytes.
and PLC
ProfiBus-DP standard allows 244
bytes.

Automatically set from PLC at

connection

The module only supports cyclic I/O

data transmission

Hardware

9836 3123 01

245

FieldBus
FieldBus connectors

The ProfiBus-DP standard EN 50170 (DIN 19245) recommends the use of a 9 pin female D-sub connector.
Depending on the protection class and type of application, other connector designs are also allowed.
Connector 9-pin female DSUB
Pin

Name

Function

Housing

Shield

Connected to PE

Not connected

Not connected

B-Line

Positive RxD/TxD according to RS485 specification

RTS

Request to send
+5V BUS and GND BUS are used for bus termination. Some devices, like optical
transceivers (RS485 to fibre optics) may require an external power supply from
these pins.

GND BUS

Isolated GND from RS484 side

+5V BUS and GND BUS are used for bus termination. Some devices, like optical
transceivers (RS485 to fibre optics) may require an external power supply from
these pins.

+5V BUS

Isolated +5V from RS484 side

+5V BUS and GND BUS are used for bus termination. Some devices, like optical
transceivers (RS485 to fibre optics) may require an external power supply from
these pins.

Not connected

A-Line

Not connected

Negative RxD/TxD according to RS485 specification

Node address

Node address is set with the two rotary switches on the FieldBus module; this enables address settings from
1-99 in decimal form.
Switch 1 x10 ; Switch 2 x1
(See switches on the top drawing)
Example: Address = (Left Switch Setting x 10) + (Right Switch Setting x 1)
Left switch is set to 5 and right switch is set to 2. This gives a node address of 52.
If you want to set the node address from ToolsTalk the switches must be set to 00.

246

9836 3123 01

FieldBus
N
e!ot

Node address cannot be changed when the power is switched on.

Baud rate

The ProfiBus DP network baud rate is set during configuration of the master and only one baud rate is possible
in a ProfiBus DP installation. As the controller ProfiBus DP module has an auto baud rate detection function,
you will not have to configure the baud rate on the module.
Supported baud rates: 9.6 kbit/s; 19,2 kbit/s; 93,75 kbit/s ; 187,5 kbit/s; 500 kbit/s; 1,5 Mbit/s; 3 Mbit/s; 6
Mbit/s; 12 Mbit/s
The module is equipped with four color LEDs, used for debugging purposes. The functions of the LEDs are
described in the table and figure below.
Functionality of the indication LEDs
Name

Color

Function

FieldBus Diagnostics
(LED 4)

Red

Indicates certain faults on the FieldBus side.

Flashing Red 1 Hz - Error in configuration: IN and/or OUT length set during initialization
of the module is not equal to the Length set during configuration of the network.
Flashing Red 2 Hz - Error in User Parameter data: The Length/contents of the User Parameter
data set during initialization of the module is not equal to the length/contents set during
configuration of the network.
Flashing Red 4 Hz- Error in initialization of the ProfiBus communication ASIC.
Turned Off - No diagnostics present

On-Line(LED 2)

Green

Indicates that the module is On-Line on the FieldBus.Green - Module is On-Line and data
exchange is possible.Turned Off - Module is not On-Line

Off-Line(LED 3)

Red

Indicates that the module is Off-Line on the FieldBus.

Red - Module is Off-Line and no data exchange is possible.
Turned Off - Module is not Off-Line

RTS

Request to send
+5V BUS and GND BUS are used for bus termination. Some devices, like optical transceivers
(RS485 to fibre optics) may require an external power supply from these pins.

GND
BUS

Isolated GND from RS484 side

+5V BUS and GND BUS are used for bus termination. Some devices, like optical transceivers
(RS485 to fibre optics) may require an external power supply from these pins.

+5V
BUS

Isolated +5V from RS484 side

+5V BUS and GND BUS are used for bus termination. Some devices, like optical transceivers
(RS485 to fibre optics) may require an external power supply from these pins.

Not
connected

A-Line Negative RxD/TxD according to RS485 specification

9836 3123 01

247

FieldBus

Name

Color

Not
connected

Function

Bus termination

The end nodes in a ProfiBus DP network have to be terminated to avoid reflections on the bus line. Use cable
connectors with built-in termination.
GSD file

Each device on a ProfiBus DP network is associated with a GSD file, containing all necessary information
about the device. The network configuration program during configuration of the network uses this file.
Contact your local Atlas Copco Company for a copy of the GSD file
File name: pf3profb.gsd
Icon File

Contact you local Atlas Copco representative to get a copy of the icon file for the controller. This file can
be used to have a controller icon in the PLC configuration software. The file is a bitmap.
File name: pf3profb.bmp

14.10.2 DeviceNet

DeviceNet is used for industrial automation, normally for the control of valves, sensors and I/O units and
other automation equipment. The DeviceNet communication link is based on a broadcast-oriented communications protocol, Controller Area Network (CAN). This protocol has I/O response and high reliability even
for demanding applications, e.g. brake control.
DeviceNet has a user organization, the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association (ODVA) that assists members
in matters concerning DeviceNet. Website: http://www.ODVA.org
The media for the FieldBus is a shielded copper cable composed of one twisted pair and two cables for the
external power supply. The baud rate can be changed between 125k, 250k and 500kbit/s. This can be done

248

9836 3123 01

FieldBus

in two different ways. The first is simply by using the DIP switch, second is via SW configuration. There
are several different DeviceNet Scanners available on the market, both for PLC systems and for PCs.
DeviceNet module
Variable

Limits

Node Address (Mac ID

0-63

Information

Number of nodes in a DeviceNet network Max 63

Connection modes supported

Polled I/O
Bit strobe I/O
Change of status/ cyclic I/O

Use same as in PLC

Baud rate

125kbit/sec (Default)
250kbit/sec
500kbit/sec

Data to PF length

0 122 bytes
Must be the same in the controller and PLC
The data string is in the controller limited
to 122 bytes. DeviceNet standard allows
255 bytes.

Data from PF length

0 122 bytes
Must be the same in the controller and PLC
The data string is in the controller limited
to 122 bytes. DeviceNet standard allows
255 bytes.

Configuration

In a DeviceNet network, each node has a Mac ID (the address in the network). The Mac ID is a number
between 0 and 63. Each node's Mac ID has to be unique, since it is used to identify the node. In a DeviceNet
network you can also set baud rate, with the following baud rates being available: 125, 250 and 500 kbit /
sec. All nodes in the network have to communicate at the same baud rate.
On the controller DeviceNet module it is possible to set the Mac ID and baud rate using DIP switches
mounted on the module or from SW using ToolsTalk. Dip 1 and 2 are used to set the baud rate and dips 3
to 8 are used to configure the node address (Mac ID). Dip 1 is the most significant bit on the DIP switch.
See table on the next page.
The controller DeviceNet module is implemented in compliance with the ODVA specification for a Communication adapter (profile no 12). It acts as a "group two only server" on the DeviceNet network.
Hardware

9836 3123 01

249

FieldBus
LED 1: Not used
LED 2: Network status
LED 3: Module status
LED 4: Not used

On = 1
Off = 0

Function

Dip switch #

AD0

AD1

AD2

AD3

AD4

AD5

BD2

BD1

Baud rate (Bit/sec)

Dip 1-2

125k

00

250k

01

500k

10

Reserve (SW-setting)

11

250

9836 3123 01

FieldBus

Address

Dip 3-8

000 000

000 001

000 010

000 011

...

...

62

111 110

63

111 111

Mac ID (Node address)

If you want to set the Mac ID from ToolsTalk all DIP switches must be set to On (11 111 111).
N
e!ot

The Mac ID cannot be changed when the power is switched on.

FieldBus connector

Connector 5-pin 5.08mm detachable screw terminal.

Pin

Color code

Description

Black

V-

Blue

CAN-L

Bare

Shield

White

CAN-H

Red

V+

T WARNING V- and V+ must come from a fully isolated power supply. That means that the voltage
cannot have any reference to ground. This is to prevent the bus from interference caused by ground
loop problems. If V- and V+ are connected from a controller internal 24VDC (screw terminal) the
same connection shall only power one DeviceNet module. This means that the DeviceNet cable connected
to the controller must not include voltage wires. Normally you have a central power supply that feeds
all nodes in the network.
Power consumption

Current consumption at 24 VDC (V- to V+) is max 70 mA at power up and 25-30 mA continuously.
Functionality of the indication LEDs

The module is equipped with four colors LEDs, used for debugging purposes.
9836 3123 01

251

FieldBus

LED number

Function

Information

Condition

Not in use

Network status

Not powered / Not on line

Off

Network status

Link OK on line. Connected

Steady green

Network status

Critical link failure

Steady red

Network status

On line not connected

Flashing green

Network status

Connection time out

Flashing red

Module status

No Power

Off

Module status

Unrecoverable fault

Steady red

Module status

Minor fault

Flashing red

Module status

Device operational

Steady green

Not in use

Bus termination

Termination of the FieldBus requires a terminating resistor at each end of the FieldBus. These resistors should
have a value of 121 Ohm.
EDS file

Each device on a DeviceNet network is associated with an EDS file, containing all necessary information
about the device. The network configuration program during configuration of the network uses this file.
Contact your local Atlas Copco representative for a copy of the EDS file.
File name: pf3devn.eds
Icon file

Contact you local Atlas Copco representative to get a copy of the icon file for the controller. This file can
be used to have a controller icon in the PLC configuration software.
File name: pf3devn.ico

252

9836 3123 01

FieldBus

14.10.3 InterBus/InterBus2MB

InterBus is used in many different types of industry, including: Automobile Industry, Food Industry, Building
Automation, Plant Construction, Paper Converting, Wood Processing and Process Engineering.
InterBus has a user organisation called the InterBus Club. The organisation assists members on a wide variety
of matters concerning InterBus. For more information, contact the InterBus Club: http://www.interbusclub.com
The media used by InterBus is a shielded copper cable consisting of three twisted pairs. Two of these pairs
are used for the bus connection and in the last pair only one cable is used. This cable is used to earth the bus.
The baud rate for the bus is 500 kbit/s with a total amount of data of 4096 I/O points.
The controller InterBus module is to be used on InterBus Remote Bus networks. In applications where it is
necessary to exchange large amounts of data and where a parallel application interface is required, InterBus
is the preferred option.
InterBus has two ways of exchanging data. One is through fast cyclical I/O data, called process data.. The
other is a somewhat slower protocol called PCP, which is mainly used for configuring and setting the parameters of a device. The controller InterBus module supports up to 10 words on the bus, out of which none,
one, two or four words may be selected to act as the PCP -channel, necessary if the PCP-protocol required.
The PCP version supported by the module is version 2.0, which is fully backwards compatible.
N
e!ot

When using InterBus master boards where the PCP channel is not supported, the maximum input and output
is 20 Bytes in and 20 Bytes out.
Physical interface
Interface

Description

Transmission media

InterBus two differential lines.

Topology

Ring Structure.

FieldBus connectors

9 pin male DSUB.

Cable

Shielded copper cable, Three Twisted pair.

9836 3123 01

253

FieldBus

Interface

Description

Isolation

The bus is galvanically separated from the

other electronics with two DC/DC
Converters. Bus signals are isolated via
opto couplers.

ASICs and circuits

Module is based on SUPI 3 and SRE1 chip

from Phoenix Contact.

InterBus module
Variable

Limits

Node Address

Auto select

Number of nodes in an InterBus network

Baud rate

500kbit/sec

Process string length

<= 20 bytes

Parameter string length (send with PCP)

122 byte - Process string lengthThe string

length in the controller is limited to 122
bytes. InterBus standard allows 512 bytes.

PCP length

0, 1, 2, 4 Words

Parameter data index

0x6000 R/W + I (I = 0, 1, )
0x6040 RO + I (I = 0, 1, )

ID code (in PLC side)

PCP 0 = 3
PCP 1 = 0xF3
PCP 2 = 0xF0
PCP 4 = 0xF1

Hardware
LED 1: RBDA
LED 2: TR
LED 3: CC
LED 4: BA

BUS-IN (9-pin Dsub male)

254

9836 3123 01

FieldBus

Pin

Name#

Housing

PE

D01

D11

GND

Not used

Not used

/D01

/D11

Not used

Not used

BUS-OUT (9-pin Dsub male)

Pin

Name#

Housing

PE

D02

D12

GND

Not used

GND

/D02

/D12

Not used

RBST

N
e!ot

Always connect RBST to GND if it is not the last module on the bus. If the RBST is not connected to GND
on the output connector, the controller InterBus module will terminate the outgoing bus.
Functionality of the indicator LEDs
LED number

Name

Description

1. RBDA

Remote Bus DisAble

Active RED when outgoing remote bus is switched off

9836 3123 01

255

FieldBus

LED number

Name

Description

2. TR

Transmit/Receive

Active GREEN when PCP communication is carried out over the

InterBus (0.6 s hold time to be visual).

3. CC

Cable Check

Active GREEN if the cable connection is good and the InterBus

Master is not in RESET

4. BA

Bus Active

Active GREEN, is monitoring Layer 2

Bus termination
Icon file

Contact you local Atlas Copco representative to get a copy of the icon file for the controller. This file can
be used to have a controller icon in the PLC configuration software.
File name: pf3intb.ico

14.10.4 ModBusPlus
ModBusPlus is a local area network system designed for industrial control and monitoring applications, developed by Modicon, Inc. The network enables programmable controllers, host computers and other devices
to communicate throughout plants and substations. ModBusPlus transfers fast data for motor controllers,
MMI, I/O units and other industrial equipment. ModBusPlus has an international user organization called
Modicon Inc. General technical questions regarding the fieldbus should be addressed to the local ModBusPlus
User Group in the first instance.A contact address list is available from the ModBusPlus Internet site http://www.modicon.com.
Physical interface
Interface

Description

Transmission media

ModBusPlus uses one differential line (RS485 twisted pair) and shield.

Topology

Token Bus Structure, virtual token ring.

FieldBus connectors

9 pin female DSUB.

Cable

Shielded copper cable, One Twisted pair.

Isolation

The bus signals are separated from the

other electronics with a transformer

256

9836 3123 01

FieldBus

Interface

Description
according to ModBusPlus interface
description.

ASICs and circuits

Module is based on chip-set and software

from Modicon Inc.

Mechanical overview

ModBusPlus module is a host device. This host device can be read and written to from another ModBusPlus
host device or controller. ModBusPlus module will not initiate any Point-to-point communication to other
nodes, it will only respond to incoming commands. It can although broadcast Global data to all nodes on the
network.
Protocol and supported functions

ModBusPlus has two ways of exchanging data. One through fast cyclic I/O data called Global data and one
through a somewhat slower ModBusPlus protocol for point-to-point parameter data transfer. The Maximum
Global Data is 32 words on the bus. The point-to-point data transfer is handled by using one of the following
ModBus functions Read holding Registers, PreSet Single Register and PreSet Multiple Registers all 40000
registers.
ModBusPlus module information
Variable

Limits

Information

Node Address

1-64

The node address cannot be changed

during operation.

Source Address

1-64

The node address cannot be changed

during operation.

Number of nodes in a ModBusPlus

network

Max 32 (with repeaters 64)

Bus length

Max 2000 m with repeaters

Bus cable length

Max 500 m

Data address

40001 + I (I = 0, 1, ) From PF
This address is based on words.
41025 + I (I = 0, 1, ) To PF
(Global Data From PF Data in the module
starts from address 40001 and Point-toPoint Data starts immediately thereafter.
Global Data To PF data in the module
starts from address 41025 and Point-toPoint Data starts immediately thereafter.
For example, If To PF string length is 8
bytes and To PF Global string length is 4
bytes, the Global data are mapped to

9836 3123 01

257

FieldBus

Variable

Limits

Information

address 41025 and 41026, the point-topoint data are mapped to address 41027
and 41028.)
Baud rate

Automatic (1Mbit/s)

Automatically set from PLC at connection.

Data to PF total length

0 - 122 bytes
Must be the same in the controller and PLC
(The string length is in the cotnroller
limited to 122 bytes. ModBusPlus standard
allows 64 bytes global data and 250 bytes
point-to-point data.)

Data from PF total length

0 - 122 bytes
Must be the same in the controller and PLC
(The string length is in the controller
limited to 122 bytes. ModBusPlus standard
allows 64 bytes global data and 250 bytes
point-to-point data.)

Global string length (To/From PF)

0-64 bytes

Must be the same in the controller and PLC

Host Firmware Rev. 77

Hardware
LED 1: Not used
LED 2: Error
LED 3: MBP Active
LED 4: MBP Init

Functionality of the indication LEDs

The module is equipped with four color LEDs, used for debugging purposes. The function of the LEDs is
described in the table and figure below.
Name

Color

Function

Error(LED 2)

Red

Indicates that the communication is not

OK.Turned Off - communication OK

MBP Active(LED 3)

Green

Indicates different Node Status:

258

9836 3123 01

FieldBus

Name

Color

Function
Flashing every 160 ms - This node works
normally, receiving and passing token.
Flashing every 1 s - This node is in
Monitor_Offline status.
2 Flashing, off 2 s - This node is in
MAC_IDLE never receiving-token status.
3 Flashing, off 1.7 s - This node is not
hearing any other nodes.
4 flashing, off 1.4 s - This node has heard
a valid packet that has a duplicated-node
address sent from another node on the
network, using the same Node ID.

MBP Init(LED 4)

Green

Indicates that the peer interface is

initializedTurned Off - peer interface is
not initialized

FieldBus connectors

ModBusPlus recommends the use of a 9 pin female D-sub connector. Depending on the protection class and
type of application, other connector designs may also be used.
Connector 9-pin female DSUB
Pin

Name

Cable shielding

Line-B

Line-A

PE

Node address

Node address is set with the first DIP switch on the FieldBus module, allowing address settings from 1-64
in binary format. If the set node address is from SW1, ModBusPlus takes SW node address regardless of
hardware switch position.
1 (MSB)

6 (LSB)

Function

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

Node address set to 1

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

Node address set to 2

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

Node address set to 3

9836 3123 01

259

FieldBus

1 (MSB)

6 (LSB)

Function

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

Node address set to 63

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Node address set to 64

N
e!ot

The Node address cannot be changed during operation.

Source address

Source address is set using the second dip switch (the one close to LED) on the FieldBus module, this enables
address settings from 1-64 in binary format. If the set source address is from SW2, ModBusPlus takes SW
source address regardless of hardware switch position.
1 (MSB)

6 (LSB)

Function

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

Source address set to 1

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

Source address set to 2

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

Source address set to 3

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

Source address set to 63

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Source address set to 64

N
e!ot

The source address cannot be changed during operation.

Icon file

It is not necessary for ModBusPlus to install a special file to recognize our product and it does not support
icon files.

14.10.5 EtherNet/IP

260

9836 3123 01

FieldBus

Ethernet is one of the most popular network technologies in use today. The major reasons for the popularity
are a suitable mix of speed, cost and ease of installation. These benefits, the market acceptance, and the
possibility to support, more or less, any non-real-time critical protocol, makes the Ethernet an ideal networking
technology for most systems.
More information, as well as links can be found at the web site www.iaona-eu.com.
Hardware

The module is based on a high performance CPU operating at 66 MHz. It features 8MB RAM and 2 MB
FLASH.
Supported FieldBus Protocols
ModBus/TCP

The module supports the ModBus/TCP protocol and is conform to the ModBus/TCP specification 1.0. More
information about the ModBus/TCP protocol can be found at http://www.modicon.com/openmbus/index.html.
EtherNet/IP

The module supports the Ethernet protocol.

EtherNet/IP is based on the control and information protocol, CIP, which is also the framework for both
DeviceNet and ControlNet, to carry and exchange data between nodes. To be consistent with the other
AnyBus-S modules that is based on the CIP, i.e., DeviceNet and ControlNet, the same vendor specific objects
are being implemented, together with new objects for servicing and monitoring the IT functionality.
EtherNet module
Variable

Limits

Information

Node Address

Do not configure the module to use

any of them
0.x.x.x
127.x.x.x
x.x.x.0
x.x.x.255

Devices on an EtherNet network are

not allowed to be configured to the
IP addresses listed in left column

ModBus/TCP Data address

000h + I (I = 0, 1, ) From PF
This address is based on words.
400h + I (I = 0, 1, ) To PF
The data length is in the controller
limited to 122 bytes. ModBus/TCP
and EtherNet/IP standard allows 1024
bytes data.
0000h + I (I = 0, 1, ) From PF
4000h + I (I = 0, 1, ) To PF
The data length is in the controller
limited to 122 bytes. ModBus/TCP

9836 3123 01

This address is based on Bits

261

FieldBus

Variable

Limits

Information

and EtherNet/IP standard allows 1024

bytes data.
EtherNet/IP Assembly Instance

Input 100, output 150, configuration This is used to configure a

5 and size = 0
EtherNet/IP module

Data to PF total length

0 - 122 bytes
Must be the same in the controller
The data length is in the controller and PLC
limited to 122 bytes. ModBus/TCP
and EtherNet/IP standard allows 1024
bytes data.

Data from PF length

0 - 122 bytes
Must be the same in the controller
The data length is in the controller and PLC
limited to 122 bytes. ModBus/TCP
and EtherNet/IP standard allows 1024
bytes data.

FieldBus connectors

The module uses standard EtherNet connector RJ45.

The module uses twisted-pair cables, and no external termination is required.
RJ45 (Standard)
Pin

Signal

TD+

TD-

RD+

Termination

Termination

RD-

Termination

Termination

Status indicators

The module has four color LEDs.

LED

State

Summary

Function

Led 1 Link

Steady Off

Not connected

Module is not connected to EtherNet

262

9836 3123 01

FieldBus

LED

Led 2 Module
Status

Led 3 - Network
Status

LED 4 Activity

State

Summary

Function

Steady Green

Connected

Module is connected to EtherNet

Steady Off

No power

No power applied to the module

Steady Green

Device operational

Module is operating correctly

Flashing Green Standby

The module has not been configured

Flashing Red

Minor fault

A minor recoverable fault has been detected

Steady Red

Major fault

A major internal error has been detected

Flashing
Green/Red

Self-test

The module is performing a power on self test

Steady Off

No power or no IP
address

Module has no power or no IP address

Steady Green

Connected

Module has at least one EtherNet/IP connection

Flashing Green No connections

There are no EtherNet/IP connections established

Flashing Red

Connection timeout

One or more of the connections in which this module is the

target has timed out. This state is only left if all timed out
connections are re-established or if the module is reset

Steady Red

Duplicate IP

Module has detected that its IP address is already in use.

Flashing
Green/Red

Self-test

Module performing a power on self-test.

Flashing Green Active

Flashes each time a packet is received or transmitted

14.10.6 Modbus/TCP
Modbus TCP is developed by Modicon, Inc. For more information visit http://www.modbus.org.
Modbus/TCP uses the same hardware as Ethernet/IP. See section Ethernet/IP. The status indicators for
Modbus/TCP are listed in the table below.
LED

State

Summary

Function

Led 1 Link

Steady Off

Not connected

Module is not connected to EtherNet

Steady Green

Connected

Module is connected to EtherNet

Flashing green
1 Hz

Connected

IP address is not set using the configuration switch

Flashing red 1
Hz

Major fault

Invalid MAC address

LED 2 - Module
Status

9836 3123 01

263

FieldBus

LED

State

Summary

Function

Flashing red 2
Hz

Major fault

Failed to load Ethernet configuration from Flash memory.

Flashing red 4
Hz

Major fault

Fatal internal error.

Steady red

Minor fault

Duplicate IP address detected

Led 3 - Network
Status

Flashing Green Number of connections The number of flashes on this LED indicates the number of
established Modbus/TCP connections to the module.

LED 4 Activity

Flashing Green Package received

Each time a packet is received or transmitted

14.10.7 ControlNet
ControlNet is based on the Control and Information Protocol (CIP), which is also the application layer for
DeviceNet and Ethernet/IP.
The ControlNet module is classified as a ControlNet adapter, i.e., it cannot originate connections on its own,
but a scanner node can open a connection towards it. The module is implemented according to the ControlNet
International specification for a Communication adapter.
ControlNet module is accessible by other nodes via UCMM (unscheduled) messages. Unscheduled messages
are usually used for information such as configuration data.
The module is also equipped with a NAP (Network Access Port) for temporary connection of configuration
tools, e.g., a PC card.
Features

The ControlNet module includes the following features:

ControlNet adapter
Network access port (NAP)
Media redundancy support
Conforms to communication adapter, profile 12
MAC ID can be set via onboard switches or application interface
Up to 450 bytes of I/O data in each direction
UCMM Client/Server support
Galvanically isolated bus electronics
UL & CUL conformance

264

9836 3123 01

FieldBus
EDS file

Each device in a ControlNet network is associated with an EDS file, containing information needed for network
configuration. The network configuration tool uses this file during network configuration.
Network Access Port (NAP)

The NAP (Network Access Port) provides temporary access to the ControlNet network for diagnostic and
configuration. (RJ45)
ControlNet channels A & B

The module is equipped with two BNC contacts for connection to ControlNet. If redundant operation is desired
both connectors are used, otherwise connector A or B is used. (BNC)
Mac ID switches (x10 and x1)

On a ControlNet network, each node must be assigned its own unique node address. The module features
on board switches for Mac ID configuration, providing an address range of 1 - 99.
In the example below the Mac ID is set to 42 (4 x 10 + 2 x 1).

Indicators
LED

State

Summary

Function

Module Status

Green

Connection in run state

Green, flashing

Connecting connection idle

Red

Major fault

Red, flashing

Minor fault

Red, 4 flashes

Internal error

Off

Module not initialized

Red

Major fault

Alternating red/green

Self test

Red Flashing

Node configuration error, duplicate Mac ID etc.

Off

Channel disabled

Green

Normal operation of channel

2 and 3

2 or 3

9836 3123 01

Channel A and
Channel B

Channel A or
Channel B

265

FieldBus

LED

State

Summary

Function

Green Flashing

Temporary error (node will self correct) or not configured

Red Flashing

No other nodes, or media fault

Red & Green Flashing Network configuration error

4

Module owned

Off

No connection has been opened

Green

A connection has been opened towards the module

14.10.8 Profinet
The embedded Profinet interface is a complete Profinet solution for a Profinet IO or Profinet IRT device.
Note: Profinet IRT is only available as from W14.0 software release

The Profinet module works as an I/O-Device on the Profinet network. The module supports up to 512 bytes
of IO for both Input and Output data. The module baud rate is 100Mbit/s (full duplex). The IP-address can
be configured either via DHCP (BootP) or DCP. Three diagnostic LEDs continuously indicate the actual
Profinet status and eventually error messages. The module also supports the normal Profinet Alarm functionality. In the standard version the module uses a normal RJ45 connector for the bus connection.
Features

Up to 64 slots / 1 sub slot

Up to 1024 bytes cyclical I/O (512 input & 512 output)
2 ms cycle time
Connection diagrams

Profinet IO:

266

9836 3123 01

FieldBus

.
.
.
Profinet IRT:

9836 3123 01

267

FieldBus

Hardware

All analogue and digital components that are needed for a complete Profinet IO interface with soft-real time
(RT) are mounted on the module. The module is based on the Siemens Profinet I/O software technology.
LED #

1. Link/activity
2. Communication status
3. Module status
4. Not used

268

9836 3123 01

FieldBus

All analogue and digital components that are needed for a complete Profinet IRT interface with Isochronous
real time (IRT) are mounted on the module. The module is based on the Siemens Profinet IRT software
technology.
LED #

1. Link/activity (1)
2. Communication status
3. Module status
4. Link/activity (2)
Indicators
LED

State

Summary

Function

Link/Activity
LinkActivity
(1)*

Green

Link established

Green flashing

Receiving/Transmitting data

Off

No link or power off

9836 3123 01

Communication Green
Status

Module Status

Online, Run
Connection with IO Controller established
IO PLC is in Run state

Green, 1 flash

Online, Stop
Connection with IO Controller established IO Controller in
Stop state

Off

Offline
No connection with IO PLC

Green

Initialized, no error

Green, 1 flash

Diagnostic data available

Green, 2 flashes

Blink, Used by an engineering tool to identify the fieldbus

module

Red, 1 flash

Configuration Error
Too many modules/sub modules
I/O size derived from IO PLC configuration is too large
Configuration mismatch (no module, wrong module)

Red, 3 flashes

No device name or no IP address assigned

Red, 4 flashes

Internal error

Off

No power or not initialized

269

FieldBus

LED

State

Summary

Function

Not used**
Link/Activity
(2)*

Green

Link established

Green, flashing

Receiving/Transmitting data

Off

No link or power off

GSD for Profinet IO

On Profinet, the characteristic of a device is stored in an XML data file. This file, referred to as the "GSD"
- file is used by Profibus configuration tool when setting up the network.
GSD for Profinet IRT

The following file is in our CM repository. When installing install them all, the selection can be done when
changing PF device properties.
Firmware

Hardware

Software

File

--

4.0

3.24

GSDML-V2.3-HMS-ABSPIR-20130227.xml

Connector

Connector RJ45 standard Ethernet connector is used.

14.10.9 FL-Net
FL-Net is a control network, primarily used for interconnection of devices like PLCs, Robot controllers, and
Numerical Control Devices. FL-NET has both cyclic data and message data. There is no master on a FL-Net
network; a token communication method is used for data transmission.
The FL-Net network is based on IP/UDP broadcast messages.
The module is classified as a "Class 1" FL-Net node as it can both send and receive cyclic data.
The controller only transfer cyclic data and only use area 2.
Cyclic transfer

FL-Net has two areas for cyclic data, Area 1 and Area 2. These two memory areas are shared by all nodes
on the network. And every node configures the part of the area it updates.

Area 1 is 512 words.

Area 2 is 8192 words.

270

9836 3123 01

FieldBus

The cyclic data is mapped to the module I/O area, which maximizes the size of I/O data to 512 bytes in each
direction-for the module.
The time from reception of a token until transmission should not exceed 1.56 ms.
Indicators
LED

State

Summary

Function

Ethernet Link

Green

Module is connected to Ethernet

Off

No link

Red

Indicates that the unit must be replaced (For example, invalid

MAC ID) or Anybus watchdog in was not updated.

Red, flash

Parameter error

Off

Normal state

Error

Activity (COM) Green

FL-Net Link

No activity

Off

Flash green each time a packet is received or transferred

Green

Participates in FL-Net

Off

No participation

Connector

Connector RJ45 standard Ethernet connector is used.

Address dipswitch

A dipswitch with 8 positions is used to configure the low byte of the IP address.
IP configuration

The IP configuration can be set with DIP switch or mailbox message. Subnet mask is always 255.255.255.0,
gateway is not used.
The different IP configuration options (see table below).
Method

Description

Restriction

Software setting

Configure via ToolsTalk

Software setting overrides the DIP switch.

DIP switch

Use 192.168.250.X where X is set with the Must be set before power on.
DIP switch. See RFC 1918.
N
e!ot

This is the preferred method for FL-NET.

9836 3123 01

271

FieldBus

14.10.10 CC-Link

CC-Link is an open-architecture network managed by the CC-Link Partner Association (CLPA). For more
information visit http://www.cc-link.org
In brief:

Baud rate can be selected among 156k, 625k, 2.5M, 5M and 10 M.

Based on RS485 with networks up to 1.2 km, or extended to 13.2 km with repeaters
64 stations per network
Refresh time of <3.9mSecs for 65 I/O stations (distance dependent)
Master/Slave network with Floating Masters and hot swap of stations
Certified according to the comformance testing by CLPA
Hardware

Transmission media: shielded 3 line copper wire

Topology: trunk line, multi drop
FieldBus connectors: M12, CLPA, D-Sub9
Controller connector: 5 pin DeviceNet/CANopen Open Style Connector
LED #

1. Run
2. Error
3. Receive Data
4. Send Data

Connectors

The controller standard connector is a 5 pin pluggable screw connector (same as for DeviceNet).

272

9836 3123 01

FieldBus

Pin

Color

Code

Signal

Blue

DA

Communication line A

White

DB

Communication line B

Yellow

DG

Digital GND

SLD

Shield

FG/PE

Frame Ground

Bus termination

When repeater or CC-Link dedicated, high performance 130 Ohm cables are not used connect terminal resistor (110 Ohm 5% 0,5W) between DA and DB on each edge of the trunk line (CC-Link dedicated 110 Ohm
impedance cables should be used).

Functionality of the indication LED's

The module is equipped with four bicolour LED's used for debugging purposes. The function of the LED's
are described in the table and figure below.

9836 3123 01

273

FieldBus

LED

State

Summary

Function

Run

Off

Network non-participating or time out status

Green

Normal operation

Off

Normal operation

Red

CRC error, wrong station number or wrong baud rate

Off

No data reception

Green

Data being received

Off

No data transmission

Green

Data being transmitted

Error

RD

SD

Station Number

Station Number is set with the two rotary switches on the FieldBus module; this enables address settings
from 1-64 in decimal form (see switches on the top drawing):

Switch 1 (SW1) digit x10

Switch 2 (SW2) digit x1
Example:

Address = (Left Switch Setting x 10) + (Right Switch Setting x 1)

Left switch is set to 5 and right switch is set to 2. This gives a node address of 52.
If you want to set the node address from TT the switches must be set to 99.
The node address can not be changed when the power is switched on.
The SW1 and SW2 are 2 most right placed!
Baud rate

274

9836 3123 01

FieldBus

The baud rate on a CC-Link network is set during configuration of the master and only one baud rate is
possible in a CC-Link installation.
Baud Rate Switch (SW3).This rotary switch is used to specify the baudrate of the module. This can also be
specified by software (TT), in this case the switch must be set to '9'.
The SW3 is placed to the left of SW1 and SW2!
Pos

Bauds rates supported by PF

156 kbit/s

625 kbit/s

2.5 Mbit/s

5 Mbit/s

10 Mbit/s

SW set

CC-Link Configuration

9836 3123 01

275

FieldBus

Set node address and baud rate from

If set from "Software" backplane switches SW1 to SW3 should be set all to 9 (9-9-9). When "Hardware" is
selected refer to information in APPENDIX B about configuring switches.
Note: Controller reboot is needed after change!
Baud Rate

Baud rate can be selected among 156k, 625k, 2.5M, 5M and 10 M.

Station Number

Station Number can be set from 1 to 64.

CC-Link Version

In CC-Link data is transferred via virtual memory on the network. Each device has deterministic area in this
memory. The minimum area is the 1 station area. One device occupy up to 4 station memory area for own
slave communication. Following diagram shows typical data one station long:

276

9836 3123 01

FieldBus

The controller, classified as Remote Device Station can use both RY (bit data) and RWw (word data) for
transfer of To/From PF Data.
Max data size in CC-Link version 1 is 48 bytes, which include 128 bit points (16 bytes) and 16 words (32
bytes) - when taking 4 station memory area.
Max data size in CC-Link version 2 is 368 bytes, which include 896 bit points and 128 words. But the controller limited the max data length to 200 for all the FieldBus types. The length is depending not only on
number station areas taken but also on number of extension cycles. Max occupied station is 4 and extension
cycles is 8.
Data representation with CC-Link version 1

The module will use the data length defined in TT F102 and F103 to determine the number of occupied stations,
actual IO data size used on CC-Link as follow:
Data length (in
bytes)

Occupied
stations

Bit data (in Word data

bytes)
(in bytes) Description

0 < length 4

No word data

4 < length 12

length - 4

Word data range 1-8 bytes

12 < length 24 2

length - 8

Word data range 5-16 bytes

24 < length 36 3

12

length - 12

Word data range 13-24 bytes

36 < length 48 4

16

length - 16

Word data range 21-32 bytes

48 < length
200

16

32

Data after 48 bytes not accessible from the bus

Data representation with CC-Link version 2

When using version 2, the module can optionally use an extended number of bus cycles to exchange larger
data size. Note that this feature requires a CC-Link v.2 capable master. The relation between the occupied
stations and the number of extension cycles are defined in the following table. The controller supported
combinations are marked with bold style (data lengths of 272 and 368 are not available).

9836 3123 01

277

FieldBus

1 Extension Cycles

Occupied
stations Points
1

32 bits

Bytes

Data
length
bytes

Points

12

4 words 8
2

64 bits

24

8 words 16
3

96 bits

12

12
words

24

128 bits 16
16
words

2 Extension Cycles

32

36

48

4 Extension Cycles

Bytes

Data
length
bytes

Points

32 bits

20

8
words

16

96 bits

12

16
words

32

160
bits

20

24
words

48

224
bits

28

32
words

64

44

68

92

8 Extension Cycles

Bytes

Data
length
bytes

Points

Bytes

Data
length
bytes

64 bits

40

128 bits

16

80

16
words

32

192
bits

24

32
words

64

320
bits

40

48
words

96

448
bits

56

64
words

128

32 words 64
88

384 bits

48

176

64 words 128
136

640 bits

80

272

96 words 192
184

896 bits

112

128
words

256

368

When running version 2, the data length defined in TT for F102 or F103 must match the corresponding data
sizes in the table above, otherwise, the module will indicate an error. In this position data length is selected
from drop-down list.
CSP+ files

According to CLPA specification we keep in repository CSP+ file 0x1296_PF4000_W10_en.zip for use
with external system configurators. This file contains 0x1696_PF4000_W10_en.cspp and PF400 iconic files.
CSP+ files can be imported to specialized software as Mitshubishi GX Works2. Ask our representatives
for these files if needed.
Note: To obtain iconic files import to GX Works2 zip file not cspp.
Note: To keep configuration align with CLPA specification PF ready bit (From PF) should be configured
in CC-Link System Area Word as 11th [015] bit. System Area Word is the last word in bit (Rxy) area.
Note: When configuring PF ready bit as 0xB = 11th of [015] and using F172: Reorder rxy byte data
No and F300: Bitmap select: Motorola mode (Big endian) it must be translated to: word= <System
Area Word>, byte = 0, bit = 3.

Example for To/From PF data length = 12, Version 1:

278

9836 3123 01

FieldBus

Grounding and noise elimination

9836 3123 01

279

FieldBus

280

9836 3123 01

Logic configurator

15

Logic configurator

15.1

Introduction

The Logic Configurator is a tool to combine and configure process

signals coming from the screw tightening process or from an external
device. It is programmed over the ToolsTalk interface.
The Logic Configurator consists of up to 8 different so called "Configurator sheets", each denoted
with a number (1 to 8, automatically chosen) and a name (25 positions, editable).
Each Configurator sheet consists of;

inputs, i.e., selectable events from the Relay status array and the DigIn status arrays
instruction list, i.e., logic gate information
output configuration
Every Logic Configurator circuit instruction list is evaluated every 100 ms which corresponds
to a tick or every time an input status changed.
N
e!ot

If one digital input is configured several times, on two IO expanders for instance, the DigIn
function status is the OR result of both digital inputs.
The logical events used for input to the Logic Configurator are of the type tracking or pulse.
The pulse type signals are reset after one tick.
Example 1: OK relay is pulsed after an OK tightening and goes low after 100 ms.
Example 2: Reset batch input is pulsed when activated and goes low after 100 ms.

9836 3123 01

281

Logic configurator

15.2

Process description (an example)

When a work piece is positioned, a proximity switch in the fixture detects its presence. The work
piece is held in position by an air cylinder. The position work piece fixtured is detected by a
second proximity switch. When the two proximity switches work piece in place and work piece
fixtured are active, the tightening operation can begin. After finalizing the tightening operation,
a green lamp lights and stays lit to indicate the OK result to the operator.

15.3

Logic operators and function blocks

15.3.1

Logic gates

282

9836 3123 01

Logic configurator

Symbol

9836 3123 01

Description

Input

Output

The output signal is HIGH only if both inputs to the gate are A
HIGH.
0
If neither or only one of the inputs is HIGH, the output is
LOW.
0

A AND B

The output signal is HIGH if one or both inputs to the gate A

are HIGH. If neither of the input is HIGH, the output signal
0
is LOW.

A OR B

The output signal is HIGH if one, and only one of the inputs A
to the gate is HIGH.If both inputs are LOW or both are HIGH,
0
the outputs signal is LOW.

A XOR B

The outputs signal is LOW only if both the inputs to the gate A
are HIGH. If one or both inputs are LOW, the output signal
0
is HIGH.

A NAND B

The output signal is HIGH output results if both the inputs A

to the gate are LOW.If one or both input is HIGH, the outputs
0
signal is LOW

A NOR B

The outputs signal is HIGH if both inputs to the gate are the A
same. If one but not both inputs are HIGH, the outputs signal
0
is LOW.

A XNOR B

283

Logic configurator

Symbol

Description

Input
1

15.3.2

Output
1

Function blocks

.
Symbol

Name

Description

Flip Flop Reset

The Flip Flop gate is also called latch or bi-stable relay and acts like a
Dominant (Flip Flop memory. R and S stand for Reset and Set. The stored bit is present on
RS)
the output marked Q1.
If S receives a positive flank (transition low to high) while R1 is low,
then the Q1 output goes high, and stays high when S returns low.
If R1 goes high while S is low, then the Q1 output goes low, and stays
low when R1 goes inactive.
If S goes high while R1 is high, then the output Q1 remains low since
priority is given to the R1 input.
//table fig
Flip Flop Set
If S1 receives a positive flank while R is low, then the Q1 output goes
Dominant (Flip Flop high, and stays high when S1 returns low.
SR)
If R goes high while S1 is low, then the Q1 output goes low, and stays
low when R returns low.
If R goes high while S1 also is high, then the Q1 output remains high
since priority is given to the S1 input.
//table fig

284

Delay

The Delay is implemented as a shift register. It has a preset timer (delay

time) multiple with the PLC tick.
PT stands for Preset Time and is configurable.

Timer ON (TON)

The output Q is triggered only if the input IN is held high during at least
Present Time (PT). The output Q goes low when the input IN goes low.

9836 3123 01

Logic configurator

Symbol

9836 3123 01

Name

Description

Timer OFF (TOF)

Q is triggered every time the input IN receives a positive flank The output
is high during Present Time (PT) after the input IN has gone low.

Pulse

Present Time (PT) corresponds to the pulse ON and OFF time.

The pulse frequency is equal to f = 1 / (2 * PT) Hz
The output Q is active while the input IN is high.

Timer Pulse (TP)

Q is triggered for Present Time (PT) after a positive flank.

Note that if the new input up flanked takes place while Q is high it will
be ignored.

Timer Pulse Reset

(TPR)

Q is triggered for Present Time (PT) after a positive flank.

Note that if a new positive flank is received while Q is high, the "on"
timer will be reset and the output will be held high for a new PT time.

285

Logic configurator

Symbol

Name

Description

Counter Up (CTU)

The CTU has one output Q.

PV is the preset value of the counter i.e. the counter value to reach for
the output to be forced high.
The counter up has a current counter value CV. When CV is equal to
PV the output Q goes high.
CV is incremented after every positive flank of the CU input
Note that if CV = PV, then CV is not incremented.
CV is reset after a positive flank on the input R.
The output Q is kept high while CV = PV and until R receives a positive
flank

Counter Down (CTD) The CTD has one output Q.

PV is the preset value of the counter i.e. the start value of the counter.
The counter down has a current counter value CV. When CV is equal to
zero the output Q goes high.
CV is decremented after every positive flank of the CD input
Note that if CV = 0, CV is not decremented.
CV is reloaded (CV is set equal to PV) after a positive flank on the input
LD.
The output Q is kept high while CV = 0 and until LD receives a positive
flank.

15.4

Logic Configurator setup

The first step to program the Logic

Configurator is to open a Configurator sheet.
Right-click Logic Configurator in the PF Map
and select Create new Logic Configurator.

286

9836 3123 01

Logic configurator

ToolsTalk proposes an ID no. for the new

Configurator sheet, but this can also be chosen
by the user.
Select a name that relates to the function the
Configurator sheet should have.
Click OK to confirm.
A warning appears.
Click OK.

9836 3123 01

287

Logic configurator

A new window appears where the next step is to define the number of inputs for the Configurator
sheet.

288

9836 3123 01

Logic configurator

Click the Set number of inputs key.

Move the slide bar (or type in the number

directly) to set an input count.
Click OK. A new window appears that shows
the layout of the Configurator sheet with the
selected number of inputs.
Click OK again to reach the setup window.
Now it is time to configure the inputs, outputs
and logical gates.

Let's start with the inputs. Click on the Input key to select the input event. By selecting Digital input
from the first drop-down menu, the events tied to the inputs of the controller can be reached.
If choosing Digital outputs, the list of events will contain the signals generated in the controller.

9836 3123 01

289

Logic configurator

Next, let's define what the output signal of the Configurator sheet should be used for.
If the output signal should be used as input to another Configurator sheet, or be put out directly on a
physical Relay, no action is required in this window. The output signal from the Configurator sheet
is automatically labeled "Logic Relay #", where "#" is the number of the Configurator sheet. The
signal "Logic Relay #" is available in the drop-down menu of e.g. the Relay setup window under
"Accessories" in the PF Map.
If the output of the Configurator sheet should be used for other purposes, click on the Output. Then
select up to four events under Trigger digital inputs, or one of the three quick choices (Select Job,
Select Pset and Use text).
Click OK when finished.

290

9836 3123 01

Logic configurator

Now the logical grid remains to be set up.

By clicking on the keys in the gate symbol, a drop-down menu showing the logic functions appear.
N
e!ot

See table in section Logic gates for a description of the available gates (AND, OR, XOR, NAND,
NOR, XNOR).
See table in section Function blocks for a description of the available functions (Pass, NOT, Timer,
Delay, Flip Flop, Counter).
Select the gate and where applicable, the timer or counter value.
If the depth of the grid (right-to-left) needs to be increased for your functionality, click on the Plus
icon to insert a new level. To reduce the depth of the grid, click the corresponding Minus sign.

9836 3123 01

291

Logic configurator

292

9836 3123 01

Logic configurator

15.4.1

Simulation

The Logic Configurator features an off-line simulator that helps verifying the logical grid. The
line at the lower part of the window is blue and low as long as the input settings and logic gates
result in a LOW output signal. When the inputs and the grid result in a HIGH output signal, the
line turns green and alters to the high position. The transitions up and down of the simulator will
shift to the right in the window due to the time factor.
Correspondingly, the colors of the connections in the logical grid changes color - blue when
inactive and green when active.
Manipulate the simulator input signals by clicking on the switch symbol in the input blocks. One
click will toggle the status of the signal between HIGH and LOW.
N
e!ot

Click the Restart simulation key to clear (set zero) all signals.
Click Store to save all settings.

9836 3123 01

293

Monitors

16

Monitors

16.1

Introduction

ToolsTalk offers several ways of displaying the tightening result:

Functions

Description

Result monitor

Result monitor displays tightening results and statistics.

Job monitor

Displays created Jobs and provide functionality for

managing Jobs.

Operator monitor

Displays tightening result information, also containing

graphic representation such as charts and status
indicators.

Picture monitor

Displays a visual description of the tightening process,

suitable for training purposes.

Tracking results

Tracking Results continuously displays tightening

results, see section Tracking Results for more
information.

Get All Results

Displays result information from all tightenings stored

in the controller memory. The information can be
exported to a file such as a Microsoft Excel sheet.

Trace

Trace displays detailed chart information from the

latest tightening.

To open monitors:

In the main Menu list, select Window > Activate > Result.
In the PF Map, expand the Monitors branch and double-click on the monitors.
On the Toolbar, use the drop menu to the right of the Monitor icon.

9836 3123 01

295

Monitors

16.2

Result monitor

In the PF Map Monitor branch, double-click on

Result Monitor.

The Result Monitor presents the latest tightening results from the controller and the used Pset.
The tightening result includes the Final torque, Final angle, Overall status, Torque chart and
Angle chart. Select between Torque Chart, Angle Chart or Torque/Angle Plot to display results
for a unique Pset.
For Pulsor Focus, final torque will be shown if torque monitoring is on and at least one manually
measured torque value was written in during Tool Setup.
It is possible to display several windows with different views, with a maximum limit of four.

296

9836 3123 01

Monitors

9836 3123 01

297

Monitors

16.3

Job monitor

In the PF Map Monitor branch, double-click on Job

Monitor.
Job Monitor displays Jobs and provides

functionality for managing Jobs.

For a function description (Restart Job, Decrement,
Increment, Bypass, Abort Job and Job off) see
section Job.

298

9836 3123 01

Monitors

16.4

Operator monitor and Picture monitor

16.4.1

Operator monitor

In the PF Map Monitor branch, double-click

on Operator Monitor.

Select Operator Monitor.

Click OK and the monitor appears (see figure
and table below).

9836 3123 01

299

Monitors

Part

Description

PF name

Name of the controller unit.

Pset

Pset used to perform the tightening.

VIN

Vehicle Identification Number.

Over all status

Indicator for the overall status of the tightening.

Final torque

Final torque of the tightening.

Final torque status

Status-indicator for final torque (Yellow-Low/ Green-OK/Red-High).

Final angle

The final angle of the tightening.

Final Angle status

Status-indicator for final angle (Yellow-Low/ Green-OK/Red-High).

300

9836 3123 01

Monitors

Part

Description

Batch

The order of the current operation in the batch

Batch order

The overall status for the respective operation in the batch.

Plot Chart

Displays the final torque and final angle, relative to the acceptance window

Torque chart

Displays the torque as a function of time

Events

Warnings and events.

Right-click anywhere in the window to open

the Options menu.

Option

Description

Activate presentation

User preferences for the content of

the operator monitor

Set background Color

The option to set the background

color of the operator monitor

Toggle window

Maximize or minimize the window

Toggle mouse cursor

The mouse is visible or invisible

Set label color

Option of setting the label color for

the operator monitor

9836 3123 01

301

Monitors

Choosing Activate Presentation the user

customizes the information shown in the
Operator Monitor by checking the boxes.
Click OK.

16.4.2

Picture monitor

The Picture monitor is a feature that gives the user visual guidance throughout the Job sequence. The next
tightening (Pset) in the job can be presented graphically with an image (e.g. a picture of the area where a
bolt is placed).

302

9836 3123 01

Monitors

To open the Picture monitor, select Picture

Monitor and click OK.
To edit Picture monitoring, choose Picture
Setup after selecting Picture Monitor.
Click Set Picture and select an image-file
using the file selector window.
N
e!ot

The user has the possibility to associate an

image-file with a Pset (available format;
*.jpg", *.bmp", *.ico, *.emf and *.wmf). Select
a Pset from the list.
To import saved settings for the Picture monitor click on Read from file.
To save the settings click on Store to file. A Save As-window will appear and the user can choose
where to store the file containing the settings. When finished click OK.

9836 3123 01

303

Monitors

16.5

304

Identifier monitor

9836 3123 01

Monitors

In the PF Map Monitor branch, double-click on

Identifier Monitor.
Identifier monitor displays the status
(accepted/not accepted) of the identifier included
in the Work order and Optional identifier (not
included in work order). For more information,
see section Identifier.
N
e!ot

In the example below, all Identifier input sources

are set to "Ethernet/serial".

9836 3123 01

305

Monitors

Function

Description

Bypass identifier

Skips a specified identifier type in a work order.

If a type is not included in the work order, bypassing the first type in the work order is not possible.

Reset latest identifier The latest accepted identifier string is cleared with the command (or digital input) Reset latest
identifier.
It is not possible to perform Reset latest identifier for the last type in a work order.
Reset all identifier

306

All accepted identifier strings are cleared with the command (or digital input) Reset all identifiers.

9836 3123 01

Monitors

16.6

Get all results

The controller can store up to 5000 individual tightening results. With the Get all results option, the user
is able to retrieve and view these. The user also has the choice of saving them to a text file or an Excel file.
Select Get all results under
Monitors in the toolbar.

Choose a specific Pset or Multistage

and click OK.

The tightening results from that Pset/Multistage appear. Picking up data takes some time depending on the
type of connection and the number of results.
By choosing Save to file the results are saved into a text file.
The user can also choose to open and view the results in Microsoft Excel by selecting Open in Excel. This,
of course, requires a properly installed version of Microsoft Excel.

9836 3123 01

307

Monitors

For every tightening result there are a number of values associated, such as torque and angle value etc. One
of these values is "result type" and this value is typically 'tightening' for a normal tightening result. Other
common values are 'loosening', 'increment' or 'decrement' etc.
As from W10.13 software version a new result type has been added, called 'Latent'. A latent result is a result
type that has been added to the system due to situations with latency of wireless tools. Such a result has been
entered into the PF4000 controller from the wireless tool after the point in time when a Job abortion or a
selection of new Job/Pset has been done. For being monitored in TTPF it is stored in the PF4000 database
and thus, if there is a connection to it, it is also stored in ToolsNet. When a wireless tightening controller
system is controlled by an upper level customer system, this result type is very valuable when trying to find
out to where all performed tightening results has been reported if there are some missing.

308

9836 3123 01

Trace

17

Trace

17.1

Introduction

ToolsTalk provides a Trace function designed to present extensive information about the
tightenings.
There are three different ways to open the
Trace section:

In the PF Map branch, double-click Trace.

In the main Menu list, select Window >
Activate > Trace.

Click the Trace icon on the Toolbar.

17.2

Trace window

Select which type of chart to view; Torque over time, Angle over time, Speed over time, Torque and angle
over time, Torque over angle, Torque and Speed over time, Vmin vmax over time, Tool pressure over time.

9836 3123 01

309

Trace

Click Scale limits to configure the axis according to preference.

With Angle offset selected, Trace shows graph from the P120 Start final angle i.e. the Angle axis is set to
zero according to the P120 value. Traces that are below this value are shown in grey color.
With Envelop selected, the sample spread between traces is shown. Envelop is made of two traces; one made
of the maximum sample values and one with the minimum sample values taken from all displayed traces.
With Auto update selected, the charts are automatically updated as new tightening data arrives. If deselected,
the user can choose which trace to view.
The Limits function allows the user to customize the limits in the chart.
History settings make it possible to view previous OK/ NOK traces. To view History set the Index according

to the number of the trace that should be displayed and press Get. E.g. Index 2 results in that the second last
OK/ NOK trace is displayed. The number of stored traces is limited by C607 No. of Traces.
There are two alternatives for saving traces from this window; saving the active trace or saving all traces.
Note that from the File menu it is also possible to print the latest trace as it is shown in the window, or print
all types of charts for the latest trace.
Zooming in to a smaller part of the chart is done by selecting an area (i.e. clicking the mouse button somewhere
in the chart, moving the cursor down and to the right, and releasing the mouse button). Unzooming is done
by clicking the mouse button and move it up to the left before releasing it.
Only Pulsor Focus: Note that since the air pressure sensor in the tool does not measure correctly when doing
a CCW-tightening the trace functionality cannot be used in this case.

310

9836 3123 01

Trace

9836 3123 01

311

Statistics

18

Statistics

18.1

Introduction

The controller has extensive statistics functionality. The values are updated after each tightening, and can
be shown on the display in real time, or sent to a PC. It is also possible to send statistical reports to a printer.
There is a LED for statistical alarms on the front panel of the controller unit.
Statistic functionality is not enabled by default. To enable the function, go to PF Map>Controller>Configuration>Startup and parameter C251 Use statistics.
Settings are made in PF Map>Pset>Statistic Programming.

Statistics are calculated based on the following result parameters:

Result

Unit

Description

Torque

Nm*

Final torque in selected tq presentation unit.

Aangle

deg

Final angle in degrees.

Number of pulses

Number of pulses in the tightening.

* = Other units can be used.

Line pressure is displayed in the unit stated in parameter Air Pressure presentation unit [C504], see section
Controller Display.
The following statistical results are calculated and displayed for torque and angle parameters:
Results

Description

# Results

Total number of results that the stat calculations are based on for the analyzed Pset.

Min

Lowest result in analyzed Pset.

Max

Highest result in analyzed Pset.

Range (Max - Min)

Low

% low tightenings in analyzed Pset.

OK

% OK tightenings in analyzed Pset.

9836 3123 01

313

Statistics

Results

Description

High

% high tightenings in analyzed Pset.

The mean value for the selected Pset.

Sigma. Shows the calculated standard deviation.

Mean - 3 sigma
-

Mean + 3 sigma
+

6 x sigma

Cr

Cr is a calculated viability number (capability). The lower value, the better process.

Cp

Cp is a viability factor. The higher value the better process.

Cpk

Cpk is a viability factor. The higher value the better process.

Cam

Viability factor. The higher the value the better the process.

Sub-group results

Description

Min

Lowest result in the latest completed subgroup.

Max

Highest result in the latest completed subgroup.

Range for the latest completed subgroup.

Mean value for the latest completed subgroup.

Sigma for the latest completed subgroup.

Other definitions

Description

Mean of subgroup range (number of subgroups).

314

9836 3123 01

Statistics

Sub-group results

Description
Mean of subgroup average (number of subgroups).

In order to rapidly detect changes in the process, the controller is equipped with a number of statistical alarm
limits based on the x and R calculations for torque and angle.
Statistical Process Control (SPC) functions are used on torque and angle.
All calculations are performed on the Pset that the tool is currently running with.
If any of the following criteria are true, then the stat alarm is lit and a relay (if used) is activated. The tool
may still run even if an alarm is issued. The alarm is only a warning. The alarm signals remain active until
the process falls within all limits again or the result memory is cleared. This means that the alarm does not
switch off during tightening.

18.2

Statistic alarm

x
>UCL

x
< LCL
R > UCL
R < LCL
Cp < 2.0
Cpk < 1.33

x
SPC
and R compared with LCL / UCL alarms cannot function until the LCL and UCL have been programmed.

9836 3123 01

315

Statistics

18.3

Trend deviation alarm

Trend deviation check and alarm are measured and compared against X-bar and the range for the currently
used Pset.
7 points consecutively increasing
7 points consecutively decreasing
7 points consecutively above average
(X
and / or

7 points consecutively below average

(X
and / or

1 point outside

X
R
or
+/-2 sigma (sigma for the whole population)
Point = subgroup
The mean is the average of

x
and r

X
and

.)
This means that the SPC trend alarms cannot function until the number of tightenings in the memory corresponds with the user-specified number of subgroup parameters.

316

9836 3123 01

Statistics

18.4

Calculation of UCL and LCL

The controller calculates recommended values for UCL and LCL. The operator can then choose if he wants
to use these values or enter another value.
Subgroup size, Subgroup frequency and Number of subgroups parameters are used in the calculations.

18.5

Calculation of mean values

The controller calculates the mean values

X
Rand

The operator can choose to use these values or enter another value.
Subgroup size, Subgroup frequency and Number of subgroups parameters are used in the calculations.

18.6

Calculation formulas

When a stat display is requested, the whole memory is calculated. This is also done when shifting Pset.
The controller controls the lowest and highest values. If some of these drop out from memory once it is full
(first in - first out), the entire memory is recalculated.
The formula for group range is calculated after each completed subgroup.
The formulas for the statistic parameters used by the controller are as follows:
Xi = value

n = number of tightenings
Min = minimum value from all the tightenings in the test series
Max = maximum value from all the tightenings in the test series
minl = minimum acceptable value
maxl = maximum acceptable value

9836 3123 01

317

Statistics

Range = R = Max Min

Mean = X =

1 n
Xi

n i =1

= s n 1 =

1 n 2
2
X i nx
n 1 i =1

CR =

6*
Maxl Minl

CP =

Maxl Minl
6*

Maxl X X Minl
CPK = min
,
3 *
3 *
Tightenings
X1

X2

X3

X4

X5

X6

X7

X8

X9

X10

Xi

Xi+1

Xi+2

Xi+3

Xi+4

Xi+5

Xi+6

Xi+7

Xi+8

Xi+9

Xi+10

Xi+11

Xi+12

Xi+13

Xi+14

Xi+..

A subgroup is a group of tightenings. Subgroup size is freely programmable and in the example above it is
set to 5, which means that all values in the same group range from i to i+4.
X-bar is the calculated average of the last completed subgroup.
Subgroup size = Group size = z

318

9836 3123 01

Statistics

Grouprange = Wn = max[ X i +1 , X i + 2 , , , , X i + z ] min[ X i +1 , X i +1 , , , , X i + z ]

Wn +1 = max[ X i + z +1 , X i + z + 2 , , , , X i + 2 z ] min[ X i + z +1 , X i + z + 2 , , , , X i + 2 z ]
n

W
W =

j = n 5

CAM =

1.746(max l min l )
6 *W

The formula for CAM is calculated using the first 6 subgroups. After that, a new calculation is made using
each completed subgroup in conjunction with the last 6 subgroups.

X =

1 n
xi
n i =1

R=

1 n
ri
n i =1

XUCL = X + (A2 R )

XLCL = X (A2 R )
RUCL = D4 R
RLCL = D3 R
A2, D3 and D4 are tabular constants and depend on the subgroup size.

18.7

Constants for calculation of SPC variables

Subgroup

Divisors for
estimation of
standard div.

Factors for control limits

D2

C4

A2

D3

D4

A3

B3

1.13

0.798

1.88

3.27

2.66

9836 3123 01

3.27

319

Statistics

Subgroup

Divisors for
estimation of
standard div.

Factors for control limits

D2

C4

A2

D3

D4

A3

B3

1.69

0.886

1.02

2.57

1.95

2.57

2.06

0.921

0.73

2.28

1.63

2.27

2.33

0.940

0.58

2.11

1.43

2.09

2.53

0.952

0.48

2.00

1.29

0.03

1.97

2.70

0.959

0.42

0.08

1.92

1.18

0.12

1.88

2.85

0.965

0.37

0.14

1.86

1.10

0.19

1.82

2.97

0.969

0.34

0.18

1.82

1.03

0.24

1.76

10

3.08

0.973

0.31

0.22

1.78

0.98

0.28

1.72

11

3.17

0.975

0.29

0.26

1.74

0.93

0.32

1.68

12

3.26

0.978

0.27

0.28

1.72

0.89

0.35

1.65

13

3.34

0.979

0.25

0.31

1.69

0.85

0.38

1.62

14

3.41

0.981

0.24

0.33

1.67

0.82

0.41

1.59

15

3.47

0.982

0.22

0.35

1.65

0.79

0.43

1.57

16

3.53

0.984

0.21

0.36

1.63

0.76

0.45

1.55

17

3.59

0.985

0.20

0.38

1.62

0.74

0.47

1.53

18

3.64

0.985

0.19

0.39

1.61

0.72

0.48

1.52

19

3.69

0.986

0.19

0.40

1.60

0.69

0.50

1.50

20

3.74

0.987

0.18

0.42

1.59

0.68

0.51

1.49

21

3.78

0.988

0.17

0.42

1.58

0.66

0.52

1.48

22

3.82

0.988

0.17

0.43

1.57

0.65

0.53

1.47

23

3.86

0.989

0.16

0.44

1.56

0.63

0.55

1.46

24

3.90

0.989

0.16

0.45

1.55

0.62

0.56

1.45

25

3.93

0.990

0.15

0.46

1.54

0.61

0.57

1.44

320

9836 3123 01

Power Focus quick reference guide

19

Power Focus quick reference guide

The Quick guide is provided as a separate document; use it as a reference guide when programming the
Power Focus. A more general description of the tightening and control strategies available can be found in
the previous chapters in this user guide.

9836 3123 01

321

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

20

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

20.1

Introduction

The following sections list the digital inputs and outputs (relays) and the fieldbus items.

20.2

Digital output (relay) and fieldbus items from controller

In this section follows a description of the possible items to select when data menu from the controller is
configured.
Note! The fieldbus items functionality and corresponding digital input/output functionality may in some

cases differ. Contact Service responsible for further info.

For fieldbus: Set signal = a signal to set a bit/byte/bytes in the PLC. Reset signal = a signal to reset a
bit/byte/bytes in the PLC.
Sound: time duration for all
Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length

Value

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

Active XML This shows send result to XML or not

Result Ack
Alarm

Follow the Alarm light 1 bit

on the controller front.

Angle status Status Angle result.

9836 3123 01

Time

Tensor ST/SL

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

0 = Off
1 = On

Alarm on/
Alarm off

1 byte
ASCII
character

O = OK
L = Low
H = High

2 bitsBF

00 = Not
used
01 = OK
10 = High

Tightening
result
/ Start
new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or

323

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length

Value

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

11 = Low

new Job
selected

Angle status Angle result is above

HIGH
max limit.

1 bit

0 = Not
used1 =
High

Tightening
result
/ Start
new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

Angle status
LOW

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = Low

Tightening
result/
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

Angle status Angle result is within

OK
limits.

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = OK

Tightening
result
/ Start
new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

0 = Not
completed
1 = Done

Batch
finished /
Reset
result

O = OK
N = NOK

Tightening
result/
Start new
tightening

Batch done

Indicates batch finished. 1 bit

Batch done OK or
NOK.

Batch status Batch OK (done) or

NOK

324

1 byte
ASCII
character

Tensor ST/SL

Time

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

9836 3123 01

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length

Value

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

Time

Tensor ST/SL

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

2 bits
BF

00 = Not
used
01 = OK
10 = NOK

or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

Batch status Batch is NOK.

NOK

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = NOK

Tightening
result
/ Start
new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

Batch status
OK (nxOK)

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = OK

Tightening
result
/ Start
new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

Indicates tool battery

empty

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = Battery
empty

Tool
battery
empty / no
signal

Battery low Indicates tool battery

low

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = Battery
low

Tool
battery
low / no
signal

0 = Off
1 = On

Calibration
date
expired /
Reset or
set a new
calibration
date

Battery
empty

Calibration
alarm

9836 3123 01

Calibration date expired. 1 bit

New date to be entered.

325

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length
Channel ID

Gives the channel ID

2 - 8 bits
number on the fieldbus in the
controller.
same
byteBF
16 bits in
one word
U16

Value

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

Time

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

0000
0001=CH 1
0001
0000=CH
16

The
controller
ready and
channel
ID
programmed
00.0001=CH in config /
1
No signal
00.1000=CH
8

Channel
name

Shows C311 Channel

name

16-200
bits
CSC,
CSCI

Current

Indicates tightening
result final current in
percent (%).

2 8 bits
BF

Integer
number

16 bits
U16

Integer
number

Completed
batch

Indicates tightening
result final current in
percent (%).

BFU16

Completed
batch bit
(0-6)

Display currently completed batch.

Cycle abort

Display cycle aborted

by cycle abort timer
expired

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = Cycle
abort

Cycle
Abort /
Reset
result

Cycle
complete

Tightening is finished,
OK or NOK.

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = Cycle
complete

Tightening X
done /
Start new
tightening
or new

326

Tensor ST/SL

Channel
name
stored in
controller
set / No
signal
Tighten
result /
Tighten
started or
Pset
Selected
or Job
selected
Batch
Counter
Changed /
No signal
X

9836 3123 01

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length

Value

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

Time

Tensor ST/SL

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

Pset
selected or
new Job
selected
Cycle start

Indicate cycle started.

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = Cycle
started

Cycle start X
/ Start
new
tightening

DigIn# # =
1-4

Mimic the status on a

DigIn in the controller
or I/O Expander. The
input must be
configured to fieldbus
DigIn # X. There are
four different items.

1 bit

0 = Input
Off
1 = Input
On

DigIn
Controlled by DigOut
controlled # monitored 1 - 4 To PF
1-4

1 bit

0 = DigIn
bit reset
1 = DigIn
bit set

DigIn
control1Set
/ Reset

Dir switch
CW

Indicates tool Switch is 1 bit

in CW direction.

0 = Ring
CCW
1 = Ring
CW

Ring CW
/ Ring
CCW

Dir switch
CCW

Indicates tool Switch is 1 bit

in CCW direction.

0 = Ring
CW
1 = Ring
CCW

Ring
CCW /
Ring CW

Direction
alert

Direction alert is active

Disabled FB Mimic the status on a

1 bit
job status
digital input Disable FB
Job status in the
controller or I/O
Expander.

0 = Enabled
Job status
1=
Disabled
Job status

Disable
FB Job
Status /
Enable FB
Job status

Dset
calibration
value

See Item
Final
Torque.

Dset data
/ No
signal

9836 3123 01

Shows the tool

calibration value in
selected engineering
units.

4 bytes
fixed
point

327

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length

Value

Set
signal/
Reset
signal

Time

Tensor ST/SL

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

Effective
loosening

Set when the controller 1 bit

reaches the minimum
loosening torque
(defined in % of tool
max torque).

Loosening X
limit
reached' /
'Cycle
start'

Enable
scanner

The relay enable scanner is set when the tool trigger is pressed X
during tool locked condition, and if no job is running.

Error code

Shows event code.

External
controlled
relays 1-10

Relay controlled by external source outside Pthe controller.

Set when External monitored inputs 1-10 are enabled.

Fieldbus
Carried
Signals
Disabled

Indicates fieldbus signals disable.

Fieldbus
handshake
ack

Indicates handshake
from PLC received by
the controller.

Fieldbus
Offline

When fieldbus goes offline the light on this bit turns off.

Fieldbus
relay [1-4]

Relays controlled from fieldbus.

Final angle

Final angle result.

328

1-Effective
loosening
present, 2Effective
loosening
not present
during
cycle

Duration

2
Binary
bytesU16 representation
(Decimal 065535)

1 bit

2 byte
U16

0 = Not
used
1=
Handshake

Binary
representation
(Decimal 065 535)

Event
occurs /
Event
acknowledge
or time
out

Handshake
set /
Handshake
reset

Tightening
done /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or

9836 3123 01

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length

Value

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

Time

Tensor ST/SL

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

new Job
selected
Final angle
start

Indicate final angle

started.

Final torque Final torque result.

9836 3123 01

bit

4 byte

Final
Angle
Start /
Cycle
Completed
The value
is 2 digits if
torque
value is less
than 100,
one digit if
100 <=
torque
value <
1000 and 0
if torque
value >=
1000.
For
example, if
torque
value is
25.64, the
two byte
integer part
shows 25
and the two
byte
decimal
part shows
64; if
torque
value is
345.5, the
integer part
shows 345
and
decimal
part shows
5; if torque

Tightening
done /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

329

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length

Value

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

Time

Tensor ST/SL

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

value is
2431, the
integer part
shows 2431
and
decimal
part shows
0. The
value is
represented
in the
selected
engineering
units in the
controller.
Function
button

Function button pressed .

Function
button ack.

Function button pressed acknowledge.

High

The result is above any of the programmed max limits.

High angle

The result is higher than max angle limit.

High current Current status is high.

High PVT
monitoring

PVT monitoring is high

High PVT
selftap

PVT selftap is high

High
rundown
angle

Rundown angle is high

High torque The result is higher than max relative torque limit.
Home
position

330

Indicates that the socket 1 bit

has reached the position
set by digital input Set
home position, or an
Open end head in open
position.

0 = Not
used
1 = Home
position

Socket in
home
position /
Start new
tightening

9836 3123 01

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length

Value

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

Received X
identifier
type /
Bypass
identifier /
Reset
latest
Identifier
/ Reset all
identifier

Time

Identifier
identified /
Identifier
recognized

An identifier with Type 1 bit

1, 2, 3, 4 has been
entered in correct order
and has been accepted
by the system logic.

0 = not
used
1=
identified

Identifier X
identified
/ Start
new
tightening

Identifier
multi

Shows an identifier,
Max length 100 bytes.

16 - 800
bits
CC

Max 100
char in a
string

16 - 800
CSCI

Max 100
char

Multi
identifier
selected /
No signal

16 - 200
bitsCSC

Max 25
char

Identifier
result part
A-D

Show identifier result

part, witch in each
tightening result.

Identifier
type #
# = 1-4
Received

An identifier with Type 1 bit

1, 2, 3, 4 has been
entered in correct order
and has been accepted
by the system logic.

Identifier
received

An identifier string is
received.

Illuminator

Echo tool illuminator

LED.

Job done
status

Job OK (done) or NOK 1 byte

(done) or aborted
ASCII
(reset).
character

1 bit

2 bits
BF

9836 3123 01

Tighten
result /
Start new
tightening

0 = Led off Light on /

1 = Led on light off
O =OK
N = NOK
A=
Aborted
00 = Not
used
01 = OK
10 = NOK
11 =
Aborted

Tensor ST/SL

Job done
or reset /
Start new
tightening
or new
Job
selected

331

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length
Job done
status job
aborted

Set
signal/
Reset
signal

Time

Tensor ST/SL

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = Job
aborted

Job
X
aborted /
Start new
tightening
or new
Job
selected

Job done
Job is NOK (Not all
status NOK tightening OK).
/Job NOK

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = NOK

Job done / X
Start new
tightening
or new
Job
selected

Job done
Job is OK (nxOK
status OK
(nxOK) /Job
OK

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = OK

Job done / X
Start new
tightening
or new
Job
selected

Job Off

1 bit

0 = Job on
1= Job off

Job off /
Job on

Job running A Job is selected and

running.

1 bit

0 = Job
done and
no Job
selected
1 = Job is
running

Job
selected /
Job done

Keep alive
ack

Indicates fieldbus
communication alive,
which sends back the
save value received
from PLC.

2 - 8 bits
in the
same
byteBF

00000000 =
0
11111111 =
255

Keep alive
value
changed /
No signal

Lifted
socket
number

Indicates which socket

is lifted.

16 bits
OA

Byte
0=Device
ID
Byte
1=lifted
socket
number, if

Socket
lifted /
socket
back to
position

332

Running Job was

aborted.

Value

Duration

Active when in Job off

mode.

9836 3123 01

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length

Value

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

Time

Tensor ST/SL

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

255=more
than one
socket
lifted
Line control Line control warning.
alerted 1

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = Line
control
alerted 1

Line
X
control
alerted 1 /
Start new
tightening

Line control Line control warning.

alerted 2

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = Line
control
alerted 2

Line
X
control
alerted 1 /
Start new
tightening

Line control A Job with Line control 1 bit

done
has been completed
without receiving Line
control alert 2.

0 = Not
used
1 = Line
control
done

Line
X
control
done /
Start new
tightening

Line control Indicates that the

1 bit
start ack
controller received Line
control start.

0 = Line
control start
reseted
1 = Line
control start

Line
control
start bit
set / Line
control
start bit
reset

Line control Indicates line control

1 bit
started
start set in the
controller. Activate with
J330 set to Yes.

0 = Not
used
1 = Line
control start

Line
X
control
started /
Start new
tightening

Line
Active if the latest
pressure out measured line pressure
of limits
was outside stipulated
limits.
Lock at
batch done

9836 3123 01

Indicate tool locked at

batch done which is
activated by P152

1 bit

0 = Not
used

Lock at
batch
done /

333

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length

Duration

Value

Set
signal/
Reset
signal

1 = Tool
locked

Unlock
tool

Time

Tensor ST/SL

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

Logic relay
1-10

The result of a logic configuration with the corresponding

number. (PF4000 only.)

Loosening
disabled

Loosening function currently disabled.

Low

The result is below any

of the programmed min
limits.

Low angle

The result is lower than

min angle limit.

Low current Current status is low.

Low PVT
monitoring

PVT monitoring is low

Low PVT
selftap

PVT selftap is low

Low
rundown
angle

Rundown angle is low

Low TQ

The result is lower than

min relative torque
limit.

Max
coherent
NOK
reached

Goes high when max

coherent NOK
tightening counter is
reached.

Max NOK X
reached /
Reset
NOK
counter

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = Max
NOK
reached

Monitoring Monitoring setup is

setup active ongoing.

Motor
tuning
disabled

Necking
failure

334

Motor tuning function

currently disabled.
X

9836 3123 01

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length

Duration

Value

Set
signal/
Reset
signal

Time

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

New Job
selected

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = New
Job

New Job X
Selected /
Start new
tightening

New Pset
selected

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = New
Pset

New Pset X
Selected /
Start new
tightening

Next tight

Indicates that the controller started a new tightening.

No tool
connected

Indicates controller has 1 bit

no connection with tool

NOK

Any result is above or below any of the programmed max or X

min limits, or some other not approved result such as rehit.

0 = Not
used1 =
Tool
connected

Tensor ST/SL

Controller
has no
connection
with tool /
no signal

Nr of pulses The latest number of

high
pulses above the Pset
limits.

Nr of pulses The latest number of

low
pulses below the Pset
limits.

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

NxNOK

Batch status NOK.

NxOK

Batch status OK.Only available in the Job function.

Off

Output is not used.

OK

All results are within the specified limits.

Open End
tuning
disabled

Open End function currently disabled

Open
protocol
commands
disabled

Set when the Open Protocol commands disable is activated.

In this case all commands that the controller will receive from
Open Protocol are disabled.

Open
Protocol

Indicates connection
1 bit
with open protocol lost.

9836 3123 01

0=connected Open
1=disconnected protocol

335

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length

Value

connection
lost

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

Time

Tensor ST/SL

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

disconnected
/ Open
protocol
connected

PF ready

No severe errors in PF.

PIN code
OK

A PIN code entered on the RFID card reader has been validated X
by the controller.

Positioning
disabled

Positioning function currently disabled.

Power ON

Indicates that the controller is power supplied.

Pset final
angle min /
Pset final
angle max /
Pset step1
speed / Pset
step2 speed/
Pset
rundown
angle
min/Pset
rundown
angle max.

Shows Pset parameters 2 bytes

from the running Pset. U16
Pset step1 speed / Pset
step2 speed shown in
percent of max speed or
rpm depending on C502
Speed unit.

Binary
representation
(Decimal 065535)

New Pset
selected or
updated /
No signal.
On until
new Pset
is selected
or current
Pset
updated

Pset final
target / Pset
final torque
min / Pset
final torque
max / Pset
start final
angle

Shows Pset parameters 4 bytes

from the running Pset in Fixed
selected engineering
point
units.

See Item
Final
Torque.

New Pset
selected or
updated /
No signal.
On until
new Pset
is selected
or current
Pset
updated

Pset Target
Angle

Show Pset parameter

P123 Target angle.

336

1 bit

2 bytes
U16

0=Errors in
PF
1=No
errors in PF

PF ready
(no errors)
/ PF not
ready
(errors)

New Pset
selected or

9836 3123 01

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length

Value

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

Time

Tensor ST/SL

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

updated /
No signal.
On until
new Pset
is selected
or current
Pset
updated
Pset with
Tool Setup
performed

The selected Pset has a

Monitoring setup
performed and is ready
for use.

Pulse
frequency
Tool Drift
alarm low

The latest average pulse

frequency value is
below the active Tool
drift alarm limit.

Pulse
frequency
Tool Drift
alarm high

The latest average pulse

frequency value is
above the active Tool
drift alarm limit.

Pulsor Tool
Enabled

This relay is active as

long as the controller
wants the air supply to
the tool enabled.

PVT
Indicates PVT
compensate compensate

PVT mon
status / Run
down angle
status / PVT
selftap
status /

9836 3123 01

4 bytes
Fixed
point

Status on one of the

1 byte
result parameters PVT ASCIIcharacter
mon, Rundown angle,
PVT selftap or Current.
2 bitsBF

2 bytes
integer part
and 2 bytes
decimal
part

Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

O = OK L
= LowH =
High

Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset

00 = Not
used01 =
OK10 =

337

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length
Current
status

Value

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

High11 =
Low

selected or
new Job
selected

PVT mon
status HIGH
/ Run down
angle status
HIGH /
PVT selftap
status HIGH
/ Current
status HIGH

Result is above max

1 bit
limit. There are three
different variables in the
setup.

0 = Not
used
1 = High

Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

PVT mon
status LOW
/ Run down
angle status
LOW / PVT
selftap
status LOW
/ Current
status LOW

Result is below min

limit. There are three
different items in the
setup.

0 = Not
used
1 = Low

Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

PVT mon
A result is within limits. 1 bit
status OK / There are three different
Run down
variables in the setup.
angle status
OK / PVT
selftap
status OK /
Current
status OK

0 = Not
used
1 = OK

Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

Read result
Handshake
ack

0 = Not
used
1 = Read
2 = Skip
4 = Flush
8 = Result
data in
queue

Result is
in the
queue or
Readresult
Handshake
is set in
To PF /
No signal

338

Handles read result

1 bit

1 byte
BF

Time

Tensor ST/SL

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

9836 3123 01

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length

Value

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

Time

Tensor ST/SL

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

Received
identifier

Indicates identifier has

been received by the
controller.

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1=
Received
identifier

Received X
identifier /
Start new
tightening

Rehit

Indicates tool is rehit

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = Rehit

Tightening X
result /
Reset
result

Remaining
batch

Display currently
remaining batch

BF
U16

Batch
Counter
Changed /
No signal

Remaining Display currently remaining Batch. Batch Counter 1 to 99 can

batch bit 0-6 be displayed. "0" means that there is no remaining batch
counter (batch is completed).
Result type

Shows what type of

result is, i.e. tightening
result, loosening result
and so on.

Ring button Ring button pressed

ack
acknowledge.

2 - 8 bits
BF

1 to 13 is
defined for
the
different
result type

Tighten
result /
Reset
result

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = New
Pset

Ring
Button
Pressed /
Start new
tightening

RT Tool
Drift alarm
low

The latest average

relative torque deviation
value is below the active
Tool drift alarm limit.

RT Tool
Drift alarm
high

The latest average

relative torque deviation
value is above the active
Tool drift alarm limit.

Rundown
Angle

Show Result Rundown 2 bytes

angle
U16

9836 3123 01

Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening

339

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length

Value

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

Time

Tensor ST/SL

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected
Rundown
time low

The latest rundown time

value below the Pset
limits.

Rundown
time high

The latest rundown time

value above the Pset
limits.

Running job Running Job

ID
identification number.

2 - 8 bits
in the
same byte
BF

0000 0001
= Job 1
0001 0000
= Job 16

16 bits in
one word
U16

00.0001
= Job 1
00.1000
= Job 8

Job
selected /
Job done

Running Job Shows selected Job.

bit 0-8
0 = no running Job.
Running
Pset ID

Running Pset
identification number.

X
2 - 8 bits
in the
same byte
BF

0000 0001
= Pset 1
0001 0000
= Pset 16

16 bits in
one word
U16

00.0001
= Pset 1
00.1000
= Pset 8

2 - 8 bits
in the
same byte
BF

0000
0001=Pset2
0001
0000=Pset
17

Running
Pset ID 0 is
1

Shows running Pset and

Pset number is bit field
number +1, i.e. 00 is
Pset 1.

Running
Pset bit 0-9

Shows selected Pset.

0 = no Pset selected, tool locked.

340

Pset
selected /
No signal.
On until
new Pset
is selected

Pset
selected /
No signal.
On until
new Pset
is selected
X

9836 3123 01

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length
Safe to
disconnect
tool

1 bit

Value

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

Ack for
disconnect
tool request
from
fieldbus.

Disconnect
tool
allowed /
Done

Sent
tightening
ID

Indicates which
2 bytes
tightening result is sent U16
to PLC.

Integer
value

Result is
sent to
PLC / No
signal

Selected
channel in
Job

Indicates selected
channel in a forced
order Cell Job.

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1=
Selected
channel

Prompt
selected
channel /
Cancel
prompt
channel

Selector
socket info

Indicates the socket

status on a selector

16 bits
OA

Byte
0=Device
ID
Byte
1=lifted
socket
position

Socket
lifted /
socket
back to
position

Selector info Indicates selector socket 32 bits

and LED information. OA

Byte 0 =
device ID
Byte 1=lift
sock no.
Byte 2, 3
=selector
LED

Select Led
or socket
changed /
No signal

Service
indicator
alarm /
Service
indicator

Indicates that the

1 bit
number of tightenings
in the tool memory has
reached the service
interval limit.

0 = Alarm
Off
1 = Alarm
On

Slowdown
tightening

Signal from STwrench

via PF to robot for
slowing down
tightening movement

1-Slower
tight speed
required; 0Normal
tight speed

9836 3123 01

1 bit

Time

Tensor ST/SL

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

Service
indicator
alarm on /
Reset
counter

Tool
running
up / Tool
running
down

341

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length

Value

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

Time

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

Start trigger Used to let the tool trigger or the external tool start trigger
active
control Illuminator. This relay function is available for
Illuminator only.
Stat alarm

Echo display stat LED. 1 bit

0 = Off
1 = On

Stat alarm X
On / Stat
alarm Off

Stop
tightening

Signal from STwrench

via PF to robot for
stopping tightening
movement

1 bit

1-Tightening
movement
shall stop;
0-No
restrictions

Tool
running
up / Tool
running
down

Sync
channel#
Green/Red/Yellow
LED # = 110

A result from a Sync

1 bit
channel. Follow tool
light. There are 30
(3x10) different items in
the setup.

0 = Not
used
1 = green /
red / yellow

Sync
tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

Sync ch1
status /..../
Sync ch10
status

Indicate Sync channel

XX result status.

00 = Not
used
01 = Sync
Channel
OK
10 = Sync
Channel
OK

Sync
tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

2 bitsBF

8
O = Sync
bitscharacter Channel
OKN =
Sync
Channel
NOK
Sync ch1
Indicates Sync channel 1 bit
status NOK XX result status NOK.
/.../ sync

342

0 = Not
used

Sync
X
tightening
result /

Tensor ST/SL

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

9836 3123 01

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length
ch10 status
NOK / Sync
spindle (110) NOK

Value

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

1 = Sync
Channel
NOK

Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

Time

Sync ch1
status OK
// Sync
ch10 status
OK/ Sync
spindle (110) OK

Indicates Sync channel 1 bit

XX result status OK.

0 = Not
used
1 = Sync
Channel
OK

Sync
X
Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

Sync total
status

Indicates Sync total

result status.

0 = Not
used
1 = Sync
Channel
OK
00 = Not
used
01 = Sync
Total Status
OK
10 = Sync
Total Status
NOK

Sync
Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

2 bitsBF

Tensor ST/SL

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

8
O = Sync
bitscharacter Total Status
OK
N = Sync
Total Status
NOK
Sync total
Indicates Sync total
status NOK result status.Indicates
/ Sync NOK Sync total result status
NOK.

9836 3123 01

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = Sync
Total Status
NOK

Sync
X
tightening
result /
Start new
tightening

343

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length

Value

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

Time

Tensor ST/SL

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected
Sync total
status OK /
Sync OK

Indicates Sync total

result status OK.

1 bit

Tightening
angle high

The latest tightening

angle value above the
Pset limits.

Tightening
angle low

The latest tightening

angle value below the
Pset limits.

Tightening
time low

The latest tightening

time value below the
Pset limits.

Tightening
time high

The latest tightening

time value above the
Pset limits.

Tightening
date

Tightening date taken

from the most recent
result. Format
YYYY:MM:DD

Sync
X
tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

80 bit (10 I.e.

characters/ 2000:05:07
bytes)CSC (->10
ASCII
characters)
80
bitsCSCI

344

0 = Not
used
1 = Sync
Total Status
OK

Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
I.e.
selected or
70:50:0002 new Job
(<- from
selected
right to left)

9836 3123 01

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length

Value

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

Tightening
date day

The tightening date (day 16 bit

part only) taken from
(one
the most recent result. word)
U16

1 - 31

Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

Tightening
date month

The tightening date

(month part only) taken
from the most recent
result.

16 bit
(one
word)
U16

1-12

Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

Tightening
date year

The tightening date

(year part only) taken
from the most recent
result.

16 bit
(one
word)
U16

Year
number 4
digits

Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

Tightening
disabled

Tightening function currently disabled.

Tightening
status

Combined status for all 1 byte

OK = O
tightening result
ASCII
NOK = N
parameters that are used. Character

Tightening
status high

9836 3123 01

Indicate tightening
result status is high.

2 bits
BF

00 = Not
used
01 = OK
10 = NOK

1 bit

0 = Not
used

Time

Tensor ST/SL

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected
Tighten
result /

345

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length

Value

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

1 = High

Reset
result

0 = Not
used
1 = Low

Tighten
result /
Reset
result

Tightening
status low

Indicate tightening
result status is low.

1 bit

Tightening
time

The tightening time

taken from the most
recent result. Format
HH:MM:SS

64 bit (8 I.e.
characters)CSC 08:15:08 (>8 ASCII
characters)
24 hour
64
bitsCSCI

I.e.
80:51:80
(<- from
right to left)

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

Tightening
time hour

The tightening time

(hour part only) taken
from the most recent
result.

16 bit
(one
word)
U16

0 - 24 hour Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

Tightening
time min

The tightening time

(minutes only) taken
from the most recent
result.

16 bit
(one
word)
U16

0 - 60 min

Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

Tightening
time sec

The tightening time

(seconds only) taken
from the most recent
result.

16 bit
(one
word)
U16

0 - 60 sec

Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset

346

Time

Tensor ST/SL

9836 3123 01

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length

Value

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

Time

Tensor ST/SL

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

selected or
new Job
selected
Tightening Tightening result has
status NOK one or more Not OK
results.

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = NOK

Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

Tightening
status OK

All tightening result is

OK.

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = NOK

Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

Tool
connected

Indicates connection
1 bit
established between tool
and controller

0 = Not
used
1 = OK

Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

Tool
disabled

Indicates if the tool is

disabled or not.

1 bit

0 = Tool
enabled
1 = Tool
disabled

Tool
disable /
Tool
enable

Tool
enabled

Indicates if the tool is

enabled or not.

1 bit

0 = Tool
disabled
1 = Tool
enabled

Tool
enable /
Tool
disable

9836 3123 01

347

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length

Value
0 = Not
used
1 = Green

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

Time

Tightening
result or
flash
green light
/ Start
new
tightening
orReset
LED

Tensor ST/SL

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

Tool green
light

Relay follows tool green 1 bit

light. Also following
function Flash tool
green light (no
flashing).

Tool in
product
space

Tool is located in product space

Tool in
work space

Tool is located in work space

Tool locked Tool is locked (tool not ready).

Tool locked is the inverse of Pulsor Tool Enabled.

N
e!ot

For Pulsor Focus, use Pulsor Tool Enabled instead.

Tool
loosening

Tool loosening in
progress.

1 bit

0 = Tool is
not
loosening
1 = Tool is
loosening

Tool is
loosening
/ Tool is
stopped

Tool ready

The controller is ready 1 bit

to do tightenings. A
Valid Job and/or Pset is
selected. The tool will
start when the trigger is
pressed.

0 = Tool is
not ready
1 = Tool is
ready

Tool is
ready /
Tool is
not ready

Tool red
light

Relay follows tool red

light (no flashing).

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = Red

Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening

Tool
running

The tool is running.

1 bit

0 = Tool is
not run
1 = Tool is
running

Tool is
running /
Tool is
stopped

348

9836 3123 01

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length

Value

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

Time

Tensor ST/SL

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

Tool serial
no

Show tool serial number 32 bits

after each tightening
U32

Tool start
switch

Relay that follows the 1 bit

tool start input. Follow
the configured Tool start
select source.

0 = Not
Tool is
used
rotating /
1 = rotating Tool
stopped

Tool
tightening

Relay that follows the

tool trigger.

1 bit

0 = Tool is
not tighten
1 = Tool is
tightening

Tool is
Tightening
/ Tool is
stopped

1 bit

0 = Not
Tightening
used
result or
1 = Yellow fatal error
/ Start
new
tightening
or error
Ack

0=
connected
1=
disconnected

Intel
Tighten
Endian 32 result /
bits integer Start new
tightening
32 bits
Intel
U32_HNW Endian 32
bits integer

Tool yellow Relay follows tool

light
yellow light (no
flashing).

ToolsNet
connection
lost

Indicates lost connection 1 bit

with Tools Net.

Torque
status

Status torque result.

Torque
Torque result is above
status HIGH max limit.

9836 3123 01

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

1 byte
O = OK
ASCII
L = Low
Character H = High
2 bits
BF

00 = Not
used
01 = OK
10 = High
11 = Low

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = High

Tools Net
connection
lost /
Connected

Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected
Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening

349

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length

Value

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

Time

Tensor ST/SL

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected
Torque
Torque result is below
status LOW min limit.

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = Low

Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

Torque
status OK

Torque result is within

limits.

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = OK

Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
Pset
selected or
new Job
selected

Tracking
disabled

Tracking function currently disabled

VIN input

Shows the VIN number 24-208 bit

input from fieldbus,
(3-26
serial or Ethernet.
bytes)CSI
Changes as soon as the
number is given. This is
not the VIN used in the
tightening result. If the
VIN is longer then the
VIN input length the
controller will take the
first x characters and cut
the end. If the VIN
number is shorter then
this parameter length the

350

One ASCII Identifier

sign for
selected
each
/No signal
character.First
byte is
counter.
Counter
increases
each time a
new
identifier
string
inputted.

9836 3123 01

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length
controller will not fill
with zero.

Value

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

Time

Tensor ST/SL

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

16-200 bit Identifier

(2-25
input
bytes)CSC character
string.One
ASCII sign
for each
character.
16-192 bit In Intel
(2-24
Endian
bytes)CSCI mode,
whole
words.One
ASCII sign
for each
character.
32-208 bit In Intel
(4-26
Endian
bytes)CSII mode,
whole
words.One
ASCII sign
for each
character.
First byte is
counter.
Counter
increases
each time a
new
barcode
inputted.
U32

9836 3123 01

Convert
barcode to
U32
number.
Corresponding
to Identifier
U32 in To
PF side.

351

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length

Value

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

Time

Tensor ST/SL

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

U32_HNW Convert
barcode to
U32_HNW
number.
Corresponding
to identifier
U32_HNW
in To PF
side.

VIN used in Shows the VIN number

tightening
used in a tightening.
This is the VIN used in
the tightening result. If
the VIN is longer then
the VIN input length the
controller will take the
first x characters and cut
the end. If the VIN
number is shorter then
this parameter length the
controller will not fill
with zero.

352

U16

Convert
barcode to
U16
number.
Corresponding
to identifier
type U16 in
To PF side.

U16

Convert
barcode to
U16
number.
Corresponding
to identifier
type U16 in
To PF side.

16 - 200 One ASCII

bit (2-25 sign for
bytes)CSC each
character.

Tightening
result /
Start new
tightening
or new
16 - 192 Only show Pset
bits (2 in Intel
selected or
24
Endian and new Job
bytes)CSCI must be
selected
whole
words.
16
bitsU16

Convert
barcode to
U16
number.
Corresponding

9836 3123 01

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

String
length

Value

Duration
Set
signal/
Reset
signal

Time

Tensor ST/SL

To next
Blue
tightening Tracking LED

TLS
ST
Tag
Sound Iluminator LED

to identifier
type U16 in
To PF side.
32
bitsU32

Convert
barcode to
U32
number.
Corresponding
to identifier
U32 in To
PF side.

32
Only show
bitsU32_HNW in Intel
Endian.Convert
barcode to
U32_HNW
number.
Corresponding
to identifier
U32_HNW
in To PF
side.
16 - 200
bitsCSCI

20.3

Max 25
char

Digital input and fieldbus items to controller

This section contains a description of the items that can be selected when data to the controller is configured.
For fieldbus: Set signal = a signal to set a bit/byte/bytes in the PLC. Reset signal = a signal to reset a
bit/byte/bytes in the PLC.

9836 3123 01

353

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items
String
length
Data type Value

Abort Job

Aborts the running Job. Job status is 1 bit

Job aborted.
8 bit (1
byte)
Charcter

0=Not
used
1=Abort

Digital inputs
Set signal/
Reset
Internal
signal
I/O
Abort
Job/no
signal

I/O
ST
Expander GPIO

Function
button
(optional)

A=Abort

Abort Job and Abort Job And Reset all result status 1 bit
status

0=Not
used
1=Abort

Abort job
and status
/no signal

Ack error
message

Acknowledges an event/error
message.

0=Not
used
1=Ack
Error

Ack event X
message/
no signal

Active XML
result send

This is a command to tell the

controller not to send result to XML
master PC

Batch
decrement

Decrements the batch counter with 1 bit

one step. In Job, batch decrement is
only possible from the Job reference
and it is not possible to decrement
batch once the Job is completed.

0=Not
Batch
X
used
decrement/no
1=Decrement signal

Batch
increment

Increases the batch counter with one 1 bit

step.
Batch status is depending on Batch
status at increment/bypass [C134].

0=Not
Batch
X
used
increment/no
1=Increment signal

Bypass
Identifier

Bypasses the next identifier in the

Work order for entering identifier
types.

1 bit

1=Increment Bypass
X
0=Bypass next
Id
identifier
/no signal

1 bit

0=Not
Bypass
used
Pset/no
1=Bypass signal
Pset in Job

Bypass Pset in Skips the next Pset in the running

Job
Job.
Batch status is depending on Batch
status at increment/bypass [C134].
Click wrench
1-4

354

1 bit

Click wrench number connected to the controller.

Use in combination with the click wrench tightening strategy to confirm
a click wrench operation.

9836 3123 01

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items
String
length
Data type Value

Digital inputs

I/O
ST
Expander GPIO

Function
button
(optional)

Set DigIn X
controlled
/Reset
DigIn
controlled

Disable
When this digital input goes high following events occur:
X
fieldbus
Fieldbus communication is disabled.
carried signals Relay fieldbus carried signals disabled goes high.
In ToolsTalk monitoring mode on fieldbus To PF side, it is possible to
display changes in signals sent to the controller over the FieldBus. (Note
that the signals have no effect on the controller, since all FieldBus
communication is disabled).
On the FieldBus side from PF all bits will be reset to zero.
The traffic of keep alive signals continues on the FieldBus. In this way no
event codes (no connection on fieldbus) will be displayed.
All tools are enabled (presupposed that the tools were disabled from a
source over the fieldbus before then).
If there is a running job, which has been selected via the fieldbus, the job
will be aborted.

Disable ST
scanner

Disables scanning from ST scanner. 1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = disable
ST scan

Disable
X
ST
scanner
/no signal

Disconnect
tool

Sends disconnect tool request.

0 = Not
Disconnect X
used
tool /no
1=
signal
disconnect

Dig out
Monitored by DigIn Controlled 1 - 4 1 bit
monitored # =
1-4

1 bit

0 = reset
1 = set

Set signal/
Reset
Internal
signal
I/O

External
Used for external input, for example from a PC application.
monitored 1-8

Fieldbus digin These inputs give a direct link to FieldBus. Fieldbus digital input numbers X
[1-4]
must be configured in the controller, I/O expander and in FieldBus. Fieldbus
mimics the status of a digital input.

Fieldbus
handshake

Sends to the controller to check if

fieldbus works.

Flash tool
green light

Activates the tool green light

1 bit
(flashing at approximately 1.33 Hz).

9836 3123 01

1 bit

0=Not
Fieldbus
used
Hand
1=Handshake shake Set
/Fieldbus
Handshake
Reset
0=Not
used

Tool light
flash

355

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items
String
length
Data type Value

Digital inputs
Set signal/
Reset
Internal
signal
I/O

I/O
ST
Expander GPIO

Function
button
(optional)

orTool light
flash green

The light is on until tightening starts.

After tightening the tool light
indicates status according to result.
This input is ignored during
rundown.

1=Tool
green/no
light flash signal

Flash tool
yellow light, or
Tool lights
flash yellow

Activates the tool yellow light

1 bit
(flashing at approximately 1.33 Hz).
The light is on until tightening starts.
After tightening the tool light
indicates status according to result.
This input is ignored during
rundown.

0=Not
used
1=Tool
light flash

Forced CW
once

The tool will be forced to perform one loosening even if the ring is
positioned in CW.
After the loosening has been performed the tool will return to the current
ring position

Forced CW
toggle

The tool will be forced to perform loosening until the function has been
selected again.A
fter the function has been selected again the tool will return to the current
ring position.

Forced CCW
once

The tool will be forced to perform one loosening even if the ring is
positioned in CW.
After the loosening has been performed the tool will return to the current
ring position

Forced CCW
toggle

The tool will be forced to perform loosening until the function has been
selected again.
After the function has been selected again the tool will return to the current
ring position.

ID Card

Signal input from the card reader that an ID Card is inserted in the card
reader.

Identifier

Input of VIN number from the PLC.

Set identifier input source in the
controller to "Fieldbus".
0 string is ignored.

356

24 - 208
bit (3-26
bytes)
CSI

Tool light X
flash
yellow/no
signal

One
New VIN
ASCII
input
sign for
/no signal
each
character
First byte
is counter

9836 3123 01

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items
String
length
Data type Value
16 - 200
bit (2-25
bytes)
CSC

One
ASCII
sign for
each
character

2 bytes in
the same
word
U16

U 16: If
the value
is less then
5 digits
decimal,
the
controller
will fill
with zeros
in front.

Digital inputs
Set signal/
Reset
Internal
signal
I/O

I/O
ST
Expander GPIO

Function
button
(optional)

4 bytes in U32: If the

two words value is
U32
less then
10 digits
decimal,
the
controller
will fill
with zeros
in front.
4 bytes in Only for
two words Intel
U32_HNW format

9836 3123 01

16 - 192
(2 - 24
bytes
CSCI

One
ASCII
sign for
each
character,
string is in
Intel byte
order

32 - 208
bytes)
CSII

One
ASCII
sign for
each
character.

357

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items
String
length
Data type Value

Digital inputs
Set signal/
Reset
Internal
signal
I/O

I/O
ST
Expander GPIO

Function
button
(optional)

First byte
is counter.
String is in
Intel byte
order.
Identifier_Multi Max 100 characters in identifier
string.

16 - 800
bits
CSC

Char
string

16 - 800
bits
CSCI

Intel
Endian

16 bits in
one word
U16

00.0001
= Job 1
00.1000
= Job 8

Identifier
/no signal

Job abortion in Indicates that a Job abortion is in

progress relay progress.
Job off

Gets off Job mode and unlocks tool. 1 bit

Job restart

Restart the running Job. All Batch counters are reset and the Job option
timers will be restarted.

Job select bit

0-6

Job select input when selecting Job from digital input. Bit-0 set equals Job X
1, bit-0 and bit-1 set equals Job 3 etc.

Job select

Selects a Job. Job select source must 2 - 8 bits

be set to Fieldbus. Job 0 = no Job
in the
selected.
same
byte.BF

Keep alive

Sends to the controller to check if

fieldbus communication alive.

Last DigIN

Must be the last one

358

0=Job On Job
1=Job Off Off/Job
On

0000 0001 Select

= Job 1
Job/no
0001 0000 signal
= Job 16

16 bits in
one
wordU16

00.0001
= Job 1
00.1000
= Job 8

2 - 8 bits
in the
same
byteBF

00000000 Keep alive

=0
changed/no
11111111 signal
= 255

9836 3123 01

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items
String
length
Data type Value

Digital inputs
Set signal/
Reset
Internal
signal
I/O

I/O
ST
Expander GPIO

Function
button
(optional)

Line control
alert 1

Input for a position breaker. Gives 1 bit

alarm if a Job with line control is not
finished.

0=Not
used
1=Line
control
alert 1

Line
control
alert 1/no
signal

Line control
alert 2

Input for a position breaker. Gives 1 bit

alarm if a Job with line control is not
finished.

0=Not
used
1=Line
control
alert 2

Line
control
alert 2/no
signal

Line control
start

Input signal to start the line control

function.

0=Not
used
1=Line
control

Line
control
start
set/Line
control
start reset

Logic digin 1- DigIn not connected to any function but used by the Logic Operator
10
function.(PF4000 only)

MasterUnlockTool Unlocks all locks which are regarded 1 bit

as event controlled.

Open Protocol When activated all commands received by the controller via Open Protocol X
commands
are rejected.
disable

Off

The input is not used.

Pset select bit

0-9

Pset select input when selecting Pset

from digital input. Bit-0 set equals
Pset 1, bit-0 and bit-1 set equals Pset
3 etc.

Pset select

Select a Pset. C200 Pset must be set 2 - 8 bits

to "Fieldbus". Pset0 = no Pset
in the
selected.
same byte.
BF

1 bit

16 bits in
one
wordU16

9836 3123 01

0 = Not
used
1 = Master
Unlock

Master
unlock
tool/no
signal

0000 0001 Select

= Pset 1
Pset/no
0001 0000 signal
= Pset 16
00.0001
= Pset 1
00.1000
= Pset 8

359

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items
String
length
Data type Value

Pset select 0Is1 Selects a Pset. C200 Pset must be set

to "Fieldbus". Pset0 = no Pset
selected.Number 0 = Pset1 number
1 = Pset2 etc.

2 - 8 bits
in the
same byte.
BF

Digital inputs
Set signal/
Reset
Internal
signal
I/O

I/O
ST
Expander GPIO

Function
button
(optional)

0000 0001 Select

= Pset 2
Pset/no
0001 0000 signal
= Pset 17

Pset select and Selects Pset and sets its batch

16 bits
set batch size size.Byte0: PsetID; Byte1: BatchSize OA

Byte 0 =
PsetID
Byte 1 =
Batch size

Set Batch
Size
andSelect
Pset/no
signal

Pset toggle

0 = Not
used
1 = Pset
Tog

Pset
X
Toggle/no
signal

Toggle between Psets connected to

one socket in a selector.

1 bit

C200 Pset must be set to

"Selector".

Pulsor Tool
Enable

Will unlock any software

functionality lock such as Lock on
reject or Lock at batch done etc.

N
e!ot

Pulsor Tool Enable do not unlock

digital inputs like tool disable
n.o/n.c, tool tightening disable etc.
Read result
handshake

Handles read results.

1 byte
BF

Relay pos# # = Controls a relay from fieldbus. In I/O 1 bit

1-4
setup the selected relay must be
programmed to fieldbus relay x.
There are four different items.

Remote start
cont.,

Tool starts tightening. The tool stops

if the input signal disappears (equal
to a start with tool trigger).

0 = Not
used
1 = Read
2 = Skip
4 = Flush

ReadResult
Handshake
/no signal

0 = Relay
OFF
1 = Relay
ON

Set
fieldbus
relay x
/Reset
fieldbus
relay x
X

T WARNING

The position of
the tool direction ring is not taken
into account. This may cause tool

360

9836 3123 01

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items
String
length
Data type Value

Digital inputs
Set signal/
Reset
Internal
signal
I/O

I/O
ST
Expander GPIO

Function
button
(optional)

reaction forces in a direction

unexpected to the operator.
N
e!ot

Remote start is not available for

Tensor STB tools.
Remote start
pulse

Tool starts tightening if the input

pulse is > 100 ms. Tool runs until
target is reached.

T WARNING

The position of
the tool direction ring is not taken
into account. This may cause tool
reaction forces in a direction
unexpected to the operator.
N
e!ot

Remote start is not available for

Tensor STB tools.
Request ST
scan

Sends a scan request to ST scanner. 1 bit

The scan LED on an ST scanner is
lit if a scan request is configured for
the LED in ST scan configuration.
Scanner source must be correct

0 = Not
used
1=
request

Request
ST
Scan/no
signal

Reset all
Identifiers

Resets all identifiers and relays for

identifier.

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = Reset
all ID

Reset all X
identifier/no
signal

Reset batch

Reset Batch counter for current Pset. 1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = Reset
the batch

Reset
batch /no
signal

Reset bistab
relay 1

Reset bi-stable relay No. 1

Reset bistab
relay 2

Reset bi-stable relay No. 2

Reset Job
status

Resets Job done status.

9836 3123 01

1 bit

0 = Not
Reset Job
used
Status /no
1 = Reset signal
Job Status

361

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items
String
length
Data type Value

Digital inputs
Set signal/
Reset
Internal
signal
I/O

I/O
ST
Expander GPIO

Function
button
(optional)

Reset latest
Identifier

Resets the latest identified identifier. 1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = Reset
latest Id

Reset
X
latest
identifier
/no signal

Reset NOK
counter

This digital input unlocks (if locked) 1 bit

and resets the max coherent not ok
tightening counter.

0 = Not
used
1 = Reset
NOK
counter

Reset
X
NOK
counter
/no signal

Reset relays

Resets all Timer and To next tight

1 bit
relays (Tracking event relays are not
reset).

0 = Not
used
1 = Reset

Reset
relay /no
signal

Reset result
status

Resets all result status on relay, RE- 1 bit

Alarm and fieldbus.

0 = Not
Used
1 = Reset
result

Reset
result
status /no
signal

Restart Job

Stops current Job and restarts the

same Job from 0.

1 bit

0 = Not
Restart
used
Job /no
1 = Restart signal
Job

Select next
Pset

Select higher number Pset.

1 bit

0 = Not
Select
X
used
next Pset
1 = Select /no signal
next Pset

Select previous Select lower number Pset.

Pset

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = Select
previous
Pset

Select
previous
Pset /no
signal

0=device
ID
1=not
used
2=position
1-4
3=position
5-8

Set
selector
green light
/reset
selector
green light

Selector
control green
light

362

Used to set green light on selector

32 bits
when selector external controlled is OA
active. Two bits for one position, 01
flash, 10 solid others off.

9836 3123 01

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items
String
length
Data type Value

Selector
control red
light

Used to set red light on selector when 32 bits

selector external controlled is active. OA
Two bits for one position, 01 flash,
10 solid others off.

Set batch size / Sets batch size in indicated Pset ID

Set batch size (Set Batch Size Pset ID). These two
Pset ID
items must be used together.
0<Batch Size<=99

Digital inputs
Set signal/
Reset
Internal
signal
I/O

0=device
ID
1=not
used
2=position
1-4
3=position
5-8

Set
selector
red light
/reset
selector
red light

2 - 8 bits
in the
same
BF

00000000
=0
11111111
= 255

Set batch
size and
Pset id /no
signal

2 bytes
U16

Binary
representation
(Decimal
0-65535)

I/O
ST
Expander GPIO

Set bistab relay Activate bi-stable relay No. 1

1

Set bistab relay Activate bi-stable relay No. 2

2

Set CCW

Sets direction according to input

1 bit
level. Low level corresponds to CW
and high level corresponds to CCW.
SL tool only.

0 = set
CW
1 = set
CCW

Set
CCW/Set
CW

Set home
position

Sets home position for home position 1 bit

strategy.

0 = Not
used
1 = Set
home
position

Set home X
position/no
signal

Set monostab
relay 1

Activate mono stable relay No. 1

Set monostab
relay 2

Activate mono stable relay No. 2

Set selector
LED

Sets/Resets selector LED from

fieldbus Byte0: DeviceID; Byte1:
Not used; Byte2: Sel LED 1-4;
Byte3: Sel LED 5-8

9836 3123 01

32 bits
OA

Byte 0 =
Device ID
Byte 1 =
Not used

Function
button
(optional)

Set
selector
LED/no
signal

363

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items
String
length
Data type Value

Digital inputs
Set signal/
Reset
Internal
signal
I/O

I/O
ST
Expander GPIO

Function
button
(optional)

Byte2, 3 =
selector
LED
Start ST scan

Sends a scan start request to ST

scanner. Scanning starts directly.
Scanner source must be correct.

Store current
tightening
program in the
tool

This is a command input to store the

current tightening program settings
into the wireless tool NVRAM. The
tool must be set in standalone mode

TCB air hose

test

When activated, the TCB will

perform an air hose test

Timer enable
tool

Used with the function Timer enable 1 bit

tool that locks the tool according to
configuration. The function unlocks
the tool for a period of five seconds.
Once the period expires, the tool is
locked again. If a start attempt is
made before five seconds have
passed, the tool remains unlocked
until it is stopped or button is
released (plus that a new five seconds
period starts).

0 = reset
1 = set

Toggle
CW/CCW

Toggles direction between CW and

CCW. SL tool only.

1 bit

0 = Not
Toggle
X
used
CW/CCW/no
1 = Toggle signal

Toggle
CW/CCW for
next run

Changes direction and changes back 1 bit

automatically after one run. SL tool
only.

0 = Not
Toggle
X
used
CW/CCW
1 = Toggle for next
run
/no signal

Tool disable
n.c.

The tool does not start when this

input is active. If the tool rotates, it
will immediately stop. The input is
active when the circuit is opened
(normally closed).

Tool disable
n.o.

The tool does not start when this

input is active. If the tool rotates, it

364

1 bit

0 = Not
used
1 = Start
ST Scan

Start ST
Scan/no
signal

Timer
Enable
Tool
/Timer
Enable
Released

9836 3123 01

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items

Digital inputs

String
length
Data type Value

Set signal/
Reset
Internal
signal
I/O

Tool
disable
/Tool
enable

I/O
ST
Expander GPIO

Function
button
(optional)

will immediately stop. The input is

active when the circuit is closed
(normally open).
Tool disabled

Fieldbus disable tool. To avoid

conflicts this parameter shall not be
selected if Tool enabled is used.

1 bit

0 = Enable
tool
1=
Disable
tool

Tool enabled

Fieldbus enable tool. To avoid

conflicts this parameter shall not be
selected if Tool disabled is used.

1 bit

0=
Tool
Disable
enable/Tool
tool
disable
1 = Enable
tool

Tool in work
space

TLS System reports that the tool is

in work space via Open protocol
interface.

Tool in
product space

TLS System reports that the tool is

in product space via Open protocol
interface.

Tool lights flash green, see Flash tool green light

Tool loosening The function is similar to tool disable 1 bit
disable
n.o only applicable to loosening

0=
Tool
Loosening loosening
enable
disable
1=
Loosening
disable

Tool start
loosening

Starts the tool in loosening direction. 1 bit

Direction depends on CW/CCW in
PF. Tool start input source must be
set to Fieldbus.

0 = Stop
tool
1 = Start
loosening

Tool start
tightening

Starts the tool in tightening direction. 1 bit

Direction depends on CW/CCW in
PF. Tool start input source must be
set to Fieldbus.

0 = Stop
Start
tool
tightening/Stop
1 = Start tool
tightening

Tool stop

Stops the tool.

0 = Not
used
1 = Stop
tool

9836 3123 01

1 bit

Start
X
loosening
/Stop tool

Stop
tool/no
signal

365

Digital I/O and fieldbus items

Name

Description

Fieldbus items
String
length
Data type Value

Digital inputs
Set signal/
Reset
Internal
signal
I/O

Tool tightening The function is similar to tool

1 bit
disable
disable n.o. but only for tightening

0=
Tightening
Enable
1=
Tightening
Disable

Tool
X
tightening
disable
/Tool
tightening
enable

Tool tightening Tool starts tightening if the pulse is 1 bit

pulse
longer than 100 ms and continues
until target or current limit is reached

0 = Not
used
1 = Start
Tighten
Pulse

Tool
tightening
start/no
signal

Unlock tool

0 = Not
used
1=
Unlock
tool

Unlock
tool /no
signal

Will unlock any software

1 bit
functionality lock such as Lock on
reject or Lock at batch done etc.
N
e!ot

Unlock tool does not unlock digital

inputs like tool disable n.o/n.c,
tool tightening disable etc.

I/O
ST
Expander GPIO

Function
button
(optional)

N
e!ot

For Pulsor C, use Pulsor Tool

Enable instead.

366

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

21

Parameter list

This section lists the controller parameters.

21.1

Pset

21.1.1

Programming

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

P100

Control strategy

For a description of the options, see section Control strategies.

Tq con
Tq con/ang mon
Tq con/ang con (AND)Tq con/ang con (OR)
Ang con/tq mon
DS con
DS con/tq mon
Reverse ang
Reverse tq
Click wrench
Rotate spindle forward
Rotate spindle reverse
Home position forward
Home position reverse
EP monitoring
Yield
Yield / Tq con (OR)
Pulsor fixed
Pulsor control
Snug gradient
Residual Tq/Time
Residual Tq/Angle
Breakaway peak
Loose and tightening
Pulsor angle shutoff

IF DS tool: DS
con ELSE: Tq
con/ang mon

N
e!ot

The Reverse angle, Rotate spindle forward/reverse, and Home position

forward/reverse strategies are not applicable for Open end tools.
P101

9836 3123 01

Tightening strategy One stage: tightening is performed in one stage. Control is done from Two stage
P110 Cycle start until P113 Final target is reached.

367

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

Two stage: tightening is performed in two stages. Control is done from

P110 Cycle start until P111 First target. The tool stops and then
accelerates to a lower speed and controls until P113 Final target is
reached.
Quick step: quick step is a variant of a two stage tightening. The
difference is that the tool speed changes directly from the higher speed
to the lower speed without stopping.
Ergo ramp: This is a two stage strategy with a constant increase in
torque during the second stage of the tightening. Gives the operator
constant reaction torque in the tool regardless of joint hardness.
P104

Rundown angle

This parameter is optional. If chosen, there are two alternatives.

No
From start: The rundown phase starts when the tool trigger is pressed
and continues until the torque value reaches P116 Rundown complete.
From cycle start: The rundown phase starts when the torque level
exceeds the P110 Cycle start torque level and continues until P116
Rundown complete is reached.

P105

Zoom step

This parameter enables the zoom step function. Zoom step strategy
combines quick tightening with high precision and low scatter.

P107

Click wrench no.

This parameter is only used if Click wrench is chosen as Control strategy Click wrench 1
[P100]. It is used to connect the click wrench strategy to any one of
four defined DigIn.

P108

Start Trace from

Will generate a Trace from Tool start or P110 Cycle start.

For STwrench, only P110 Cycle start is available.

P110 Cycle start

P109

Monitor end time

from

Decides if monitoring of end time (cycle complete) will start from

P110 Cycle start or P116 Rundown complete.

P110 Cycle start

P110

Cycle start

Defines the starting level for a tightening cycle.

IF P100 Control
strategy is set to
DS con or DS
con/tq mon: 0.1
* T102
ELSE:0.05 *
T102 Tool max
torque

P111

First target

Defines the level at which the changeover takes place between the first 0.25 * T102
and second stage in a two stage tightening, quick step or ergo ramp. Tool max
torque

P112

Final tq min

Monitoring limit minimal accepted torque. Connected to [P645].

P113

Final target

Defines the desired final torque value when a torque (tq) Control strategy 9999 Nm
[P100] is used. The tool shuts off when the final target value is reached.

No

0.3 * T102 Tool

max torque

N
e!ot

368

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

To maintain accuracy when tightening, final target shouldn't be lower

than specified minimum for the tool in use. Refer to tool catalogue for
necessary data.
P114

Final tq max

Defines the upper torque limit for OK tightening. The tool shuts off if 0.5 * T102 Tool
the torque value exceeds this value.].
max torque

P115

Cycle complete

This parameter indicates the torque level when the tightening cycle is 0.03 * T102
complete (valid if the tool has shut off prior to reaching this level).
Tool max
torque

P116

Rundown complete The torque level when the rundown phase is finished. (Only used if
P104 Rundown angle or any of the PVT options are selected).

0.2 * T102 Tool

max torque

P118

Measure torque at

Defines at what point the torque is measured.

Torque peak: gives the highest torque value during the tightening.
Angle peak: gives the torque at the highest angle value.
Shut off: measures the torque when the target condition has been
fulfilled.

Torque peak

P119

Loosening limit

Defines the limit for a valid loosening. Adjustable from 0 to T102 Tool 0.1 * T102 Tool
max torque
max torque.

P120

Start final angle

Angle measurement starts when the torque value exceeds this value. 0.25 * T102
P120 Start final angle must be selected equal to or greater than P110
Tool max
torque
Cycle start.
(If a PVT option is used then it has to be greater than P116 Rundown
complete.)

P121

Measure angle to

Defines to what point the final angle is measured. The start point is
always P120 Start final angle.
Torque peak: gives the angle at the highest torque value.
Angle peak: gives the highest angle value during the tightening.
Cycle complete: measures the angle at P115 Cycle complete.
Shut off: measures the angle when the target condition has been
fulfilled.

Angle peak

P122

Final angle min

This parameter indicates the lower limit for final angle. If the final
angle is below this level the tightening is considered as NOK.

0 deg

P123

Target angle

Indicates the target value for the angle in degrees when angle control, 0 deg
ang con, is used. When this value is reached the tool is turned off.

P124

Final angle max

Defines the upper limit for the tightening angle. If the angle exceeds
this level the tightening is considered as NOK and the tool will shut
off.

P125

Rundown angle
min

This parameter indicates the min limit value for P104 Rundown angle. 0 deg
If the angle is smaller than this value at P116 Rundown complete, low
is indicated and the tool will shut off.

9836 3123 01

9999 deg

369

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

P126

Rundown angle
max

This parameter indicates the max limit value for P104 Rundown angle. 9999 deg
If the angle is larger than this value, high is indicated and the tool
will shut off.

P127

Final angle max

mon

Defines the upper limit for the tightening angle. If the angle exceeds 9999 deg
this level the tightening is considered as NOK but the tightening will
NOT shut off due to this.

P128

Rehit angle

Defines the maximum angle difference (between two torque points in 0 deg
a fastening) that will cause a rehit detection.
Only for Manual Wrench tool.

P130

Soft start speed

Defines the tool speed during the soft start interval.

10%
Allowed interval is between 1 and 30 percent of maximum tool speed.

P131

Step 1 speed

Defines the first step speed.

Speed is adjustable between 1 and 100 percent of max tool speed.

P132

Step 2 speed

Defines the second step speed.

40%
Speed is adjustable between 1 and 40 percent of the tool max speed.
If two stage tightening is used the speed in the second step will increase
according to the P136 Step 2 ramp until it reaches this value. If quick
step is used the tool changes to step 2 speed directly without using a
ramp.

P133

Loosening speed

Defines speed during loosening. The value is adjustable between 1 and 100%
100 percent.

P134

Loosening ramp

Defines acceleration during loosening. The value is adjustable between 0%

0 and 100 percent. A low percentage gives fast acceleration.

P135

Step 1 ramp

Defines step 1 acceleration. The value is adjustable between 0 and 100 0%

percent. A low percentage gives fast acceleration (0% is normally
used).

P136

Step 2 ramp

Defines step 2 acceleration. A low percentage gives fast acceleration

(0-100%).

20%

P137

Ergo ramp

Defines the acceleration. The value is adjustable between 0 and 100

percent. Only used if ergo ramp is chosen as the P101 Tightening
strategy.

40%

P138

Zoom step speed

Defines the speed used for zoom step strategy. The value is a percentage 10%
of the tools max speed. The value is adjustable between 1 and 20
percent.
To set zoom step speed, parameter P105 Zoom step must be active.

P139

Speed unit

Sets speed parameters (P130-P133, P138 and P161) relative to tool

max speed ("Percent") or absolute ("RPM") for current P-set.

100%

Percent
N
e!ot

370

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

Changes between RPM and % due to less accuracy in % can lead to

quantization effects in values for speed parameters.
P141

End time

Defines the time required for the torque level to stay below 115 Cycle 0.2 s
complete before the tightening is aborted (valid if the tool has not shut
off prior to reaching cycle complete). The value is adjustable between
0.02 and 5.0 seconds.

P142

Soft start time

During this time, from the moment that the tool trigger is pressed, the 0.2 s
spindle rotates very slowly. This gives the operator a chance to fit the
socket on the screw. The value is adjustable between 0.0 and 5.0
seconds.

P143

Tool idle time

Defines the idle time between a completed tightening and the start of 0.0 s
the next tightening. (Used in Multistage).
The value is adjustable between 0 and 32 seconds.

P144

Cycle Abort timer If the tool does not reach its shut off point, this timer will shut it off.
The timer is activated when the tool trigger is pressed.The value is
adjustable between 0.1 and 60.0 seconds.

30 s

P150

Batch count

Off

Activates a function that measures how many times a tightening is

repeated. It must be determined from where P151 Batch sizevalue
should be read, if this parameter is activated.
Options:
Off: Batch count functionality is not used.
Pset: Use Batch size in Pset (P151).
Fieldbus: An external source decides P151 Batch size via fieldbus.
Ethernet/Serial: An external source decides P151 Batch size via
Ethernet or serial interface.
N
e!ot

If batch count is used in a Job (that includes the specific Pset), this
parameter is recommended to be set to Off.
P151

Batch size

The size can be 1 - 99.

1
To set this parameter, the Batch count [P150] must be in active mode.
N
e!ot

Batch size defined in Job overrides batch size defined in Pset.

P152

Lock at batch done The tool will be locked when reaching Batch done. Batch done is
No
reached when the number of correct tightenings is equal to P151 Batch
size.

P153

Max coherent
NOK's

9836 3123 01

Defines the number of possible subsequent NOK (not OK) tightenings. 0 (Off)
This parameter is overruled by M208. To be able to set a value for
P153 the parameter J301 Job type must be set to 'Forced' or 'Free and
forced'.
Range: 1-10.

371

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

P160

High speed
rundown

High speed rundown is a function for reducing the cycle time by

Off
running the tool at high speed during rundown.
High speed rundown is a stage inserted between Soft start and Step 1,
i.e. the Soft start time and Soft start speed affects the number of degrees
of the rundown phase. This gives the possibility for fast tightening
cycles even for long bolts with a small angle that require a slow stepone speed to avoid overshoots.

P161

Rundown speed

Rundown speed in percent.

P162

High speed interval High speed rundown interval.

P163

High speed ramp

P164

Disable high speed Disable the high speed rundown function after a NOK tightening and Off
rundown speed
enable high speed rundown speed when the tightening is OK. This
once if NOK
function is only possible to enable if the P160 is On.

P170

Adjustable limit

Adjustable positioning limit for open end tools. Used to set torque limit No
for the positioning of the tool after tightening. If set to No the internal
default value is used as limit.

P171

Limit

Maximum torque during positioning. Default value is tool dependent Tool dependent
and stored in tool memory. The max value is limited to T424 Max torque
positioning limit.

100 %
9999 deg

Defines the acceleration to P161 Rundown Speed during the high speed 10%
rundown stage. The value is adjustable between 0 and 100 percent. A
low percentage gives fast acceleration.

N
e!ot

The limit must be lower than the maximum torque in reverse specified
by the open end gear supplier. Using higher values can result in
damaging the open end gear.
P180

Delta angle

Gradient angle interval

10 deg

P181

Delta torque

Gradient torque interval

Tool dependent,
5% of Tool max
tq

P182

Torque limit

Torque search limit for snug detection

Tool dependent,
Tool max tq

P183

PVT distance

Defines how many degrees before the Snug point the start value of the 0 deg
PVT compensation torque shall be used.

P184

PVT interval

The angle interval after the PVT distance point, during which the PVT 0 deg
compensate torque is evaluated.

P185

Compensate value Option to choose between an average value and peak value during the Average
PVT interval.

372

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

P186

Delay monitoring
after cycle start

During this interval all Snug Gradients found will be disregarded. The 0 deg
delay interval starts when Cycle start has been passed.

P190

Snug PVT
monitoring min

The lowest torque value allowed while searching after Snug point.

P110 Cycle start

P191

Snug PVT
monitoring max

The highest torque value allowed while searching after Snug point

P182 Torque
limit

21.1.2

Default setup

Programming +

Parameter
number

Parameter name

P200

Current monitoring

Description

Default setup
N
e!ot

No

This function is not applicable for DS tools.

Activates the current monitoring function.
The spindle torque is proportional to the motor current. By measuring
motor current a method of measurement that is independent of the
torque transducer is achieved. The torque forming current is expressed
as percentage of nominal current at T102 Tool max torque. Set an
acceptance window for the torque as redundant process control via
parameters P201 CM min and P202 CM max.
P201

CM min

Defines min limit for OK tightening.

0.0%

P202

CM max

Defines max limit for OK tightening.

150%

P210

Selftap

Activates the PVT selftap function.

No
When the joint has a torque peak at the start of the tightening it can be
recommended to use the PVT selftap monitoring option to ensure that
the tightening gets the right characteristics. It also makes it possible to
perform tightenings where the start torque is higher than P113 Final
target or P114 Final tq max.

P211

Selftap interval

Defines the section where measuring is performed.

Setting is performed in degrees in the interval 1 to 9999.

P212

No. of selftap
windows

Defines the number of windows that the P211 Selftap interval is to be 1

divided into. Each window is then evaluated separately.
Mean value foundations are calculated from a number of windows to
reduce the effect of noise. Fewer number of windows mean that more
samples will be grouped together, hence one odd sample will have less
impact on the calculated mean value and vice versa. A higher P212
No. of selftap windows makes the monitoring more sensitive whereas
a lower number will filter more noise.
The number of windows can be chosen between 1 and 9999.

9836 3123 01

373

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

P213

Selftap min

Indicates the lowest torque level for the interval. If the torque level
P115 Cycle
falls below this level, a low-level alarm will be generated.
complete
If P109 Monitor end time from is set to Cycle start, then range is from
P115 Cycle complete value to P214 Selftap max.
If P109 Monitor end time from is set to Rundown complete, then range
is from 0 to P214 Selftap max.

P214

Selftap max

This parameter indicates the highest torque level for the interval. If the 9999 Nm
torque level exceeds this level, a high level alarm will be generated.
Range is from P213 Selftap min to T102 Tool max torque.

P220

PVT monitoring

Activates the PVT monitoring function.

P221

PVT delay interval Defines delay before P220 PVT monitoring starts.
Setting is performed in degrees in the interval 0 to 9999.

0 deg

P222

PVT monitor
interval

Defines the interval during which the P220 PVT monitoring is to be

performed.Setting is performed in degrees in the interval 1 to 9999.

1 deg

P223

No. of PVT
windows

Defines the number of windows that the P222 PVT monitor interval is 1
to be divided into. Each window is then evaluated separately.
Mean value foundations are calculated from a number of windows to
reduce the effect of noise. Fewer number of windows mean that more
samples will be grouped together, hence one odd sample will have less
impact on the calculated mean value and vice versa. A higher P223
No. of PVT windows makes the monitoring more sensitive whereas a
lower number will filter more noise.
The number of windows can be chosen between 1 and 9999.

P224

PVT min limit

This value is evaluated against the monitor interval peak value at the P115 Cycle
end of the interval. If the torque value falls below this limit, an alarm complete
is generated.
If P109 Monitor end time from is set to Cycle start, then range is from
P115 Cycle complete value to P225 PVT max limit.If P109 Monitor end
time from is set to Rundown complete, then range is from 0 to P225
PVT max limit.

P225

PVT max limit

This parameter is monitored in real time during the monitor interval

and if exceeded, an alarm is generated.

P230

PVT comp

When this option is set to Yes a prevailing torque PVT compensate No

is (measured at the interval of 20 samples preceding start of P231 PVT
comp point) used as reference for the torque during the actual tightening
cycle.

Default setup

No

P116 Rundown
complete

N
e!ot

All torque values; i.e. P113 Final target, P111 First target and P114
Final tq max are compensated (subtracted) from the prevailing value.
Also, the results are compensated.
P231

374

PVT comp point

The value can be set between 0 and 9999 degrees.

10 deg

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

P240

Tool tightening
direction

CW/CCWSelect tool rotation direction. "CW" for right hand threaded CW

screws and "CCW" for left hand threaded screws. To be able to start
in the decided direction, turn the tool direction switch to its correct
position.

P241

Soft stop

Yes/No
Yes
The PF will ramp down the torque when target is reached. The Yes
option is recommended.

P242

Alarm on rehit

Yes/No
No
If selected, Power Focus will detect rehits (event code E112 Rehit).
The red tool LED will be lit when a rehit is detected. The criteria for
a rehit are a short or a non-existent second stage in combination with
a slow speed in the first stage.

P243

Alarm on tq <
target

Yes/No
No
Decides if the tightening should be approved if the final torque is lower
than the P113 Final target but above P112 Final torque min.

P244

Alarm on lost
trigger

Yes/No
No
Power Focus will detect if the tool trigger was released before the P113
Final target was reached.

P245

DS torque tuning
factor

Only used if DS con is chosen as a P100 Control strategy. It

100%
compensates for the error that DS measurement induces. The value can
be set between 80 and 220 percent. For information how to adjust the
DS torque-tuning factor, see section DS con

P246

Alarm on end time Yes/No

shutoff
If end time times out before P113 Final target was reached then an
event code will be displayed.

No

P247

Socket release

Rotates the socket approximately three degrees backwards after the

tightening is done.

For all tools but

REVO: No

P250

Gradient
monitoring

Monitors the torque increase or decrease for an angle window.

No

P251

Gradient torque
min

Minimum increase of the torque for the angle window.

P252

Gradient torque
max

Maximum increase of the torque for the angle window.

9999

P253

Joint hardness

Hardness coefficient for the joint.

1- hard joint, 20- soft joint

10

P254

Start torque

Torque threshold where the gradient monitoring is to be started.

Start final angle

P255

Angle offset

Additional angle from P254 Start torque before gradient monitoring is 0 deg
started.

9836 3123 01

Default setup

375

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

P260

Start torque

The torque threshold where the yield control is to be started.

0.0 Nm
N
e!ot

Yield control is activated by selecting the P100 Control strategy to

Yield or Yield/Tq con (OR). The P101 Tightening strategy can be set
to One stage, Two stage or Quickstep, and yield control will always
interact in the second stage of the tightening.
P105 Zoom step strategy ending is disabled when yield control is
selected. An additional tightening angle can be added after the yield
point is reached by setting an angle to the P264 Extra angle step
parameter.
P261

Step angle

Defines the angle interval between the sample windows.

0 deg

P262

Window angle

Defines the length of the angle interval (the window) in which an

average of the torque values shall be calculated.

0 deg

P263

Yield slope ratio

This parameter decides the sensitivity of the yield point detection. The 50 %
set value is the percentage of the maximum slope, at which the yield
point is considered reached. 100% corresponds to the maximum slope
during the tightening (early shut-off and highest sensitivity), and 0%
to a completely horizontal portion of the trace (late shut-off close to
or after peak torque).

P264

Extra angle step

Additional angle step after the yield point is reached.

P270

Soft start angle

An angle step where the fastening process is regarded as started.

P271

Soft start angle

torque max

The fastening process is not allowed to continue if the torque level

exceeds the parameter P271 Soft start angle torque max value

P272

First target angle

min

The fastening process is not allowed to continue when the angle

corresponding to first target torque is lower than the P272 First target
angle min value.

P273

First target angle

max

The fastening process is not allowed to continue when the angle

corresponding to first target torque is higher than the P272 First target
angle max value.

P280

Post view torque

Enable/disable the post view torque functionality. Only useful if torque No

is to be measured during monitoring interval.
Some joints have a torque peak prior of P116 Rundown complete. Post
view torque function makes it possible to monitor torque values during
two specified angular intervals. The interval start is defined as angle
prior to rundown complete. Torque is then monitored for a specified
angular interval. Evaluation (OK/NOK) is done when rundown
complete is reached.

0 deg

N
e!ot

Not accessible when any PVT-option is selected.

376

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

P281

Post view min

torque

Defines the low limit for the torque during the entire interval.

P110 Cycle start

P282

Post view min

monitoring start

Start of min monitor interval.

9999

P283

Post view min

Length of min monitor interval.
monitoring interval

P284

Post view max

torque

Defines the high limit for the torque during the entire interval.

P116 Rundown
complete

P285

Post view max

monitoring start

Start of max monitor interval.

P286

Post view max

Length of max monitor interval.
monitoring interval

21.1.3
Parameter
number

Pset setup
Parameter name

Description

P400

View existing
Psets

To view existing Psets in the current PF channel. Both numbers and

logical names will be displayed.

P401

Create new Pset

To create and open a new Pset. Each Pset has a unique ID number
between 1 and 250 (or up to 300 with the Configurable Memory
functionality).

P402

Name Pset

Used when a selected Pset is to be named with a logical name. Up to

25 characters.

P403

Copy Pset

Used when a source Pset is to be copied to a destination Pset.

P404

Delete Pset

Used when a Pset is to be removed.

Default setup

Empty string

N
e!ot

If a Pset is a part of a Job it can not be deleted.

P406

Pset updated

Timestamp (date and time) for latest Pset modification. Not editable.

P409

Pset updated by

Displays the name of the user who last changed the Pset. Not editable.
If no user has logged in the filed values are: TTPF if changed via
ToolsTalk, OPER if changed via the controller, and BLANK if the Pset
has been created in an earlier version of the software.

P410

Delete Pset results Used when all results that belong to the current Pset are to be cleared.

P411

Delete all results

9836 3123 01

Used when all Pset results are to be cleared.

377

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

P420

Comment

The comments displayed here are entered in a dialog box each time a No
Pset is stored. A prerequisite is that parameter C600 is set to Pset
comments. Length 0-100 characters.

21.1.4
Parameter
number

Default setup

Statistic programming
Parameter name

Description

P500

Min valid stat tq

limit

The result must be greater than or equal to this value in order for it to 0 Nm
be included in the statistical calculations.

P501

Max valid stat tq

limit

The result must be less than or equal to this value in order for it to be 9999 Nm
included in the statistical calculations.

P502

Subgroup size

Defines the subgroup size for statistical diagrams and control limits.
If this parameter is changed, the results will be recalculated.
Group size can be set between 2 and 20.

P503

No. of subgroups

The controller can automatically calculate statistical control limits. In 10

order for these limits to be reasonable, they must be performed on a
greater number of tightenings. This parameter is used to set the number
of subgroups used for these calculations.

P504

Subgroup
frequency

Defines which subgroups that will be used in the statistical calculations. 1

If the frequency is 4 then only every fifth subgroup will be used.

P505

Latest n values

The latest number of values (1 - 100) that is used in the statistical

calculations.

30

P506

SPC alarm tq

With this parameter it is possible to switch on or off the torque SPC

alarm function.

Off

P507

SPC alarm angle

With this parameter it is possible to switch on or off the angle SPC

alarm function.

Off

508

SPC alarm CM

With this parameter it is possible to switch on or off the current SPC

monitoring alarm function.

Off

P510

Torque X-bar LCL The lower control limit for mean value.
Calculated automatically or entered manually.

0 Nm

P511

Torque X-bar UCL The upper control limit for mean value.
Calculated automatically or entered manually.

9999 Nm

P512

Torque range LCL The lower control limit for range.

Calculated automatically or entered manually.

0 Nm

378

Default setup

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

P513

Torque range UCL The upper control limit for range.

Calculated automatically or entered manually.

9999 Nm

P514

Torque X-bar-bar

The desired mean value for calculated mean values for groups of
tightenings.

0 Nm

P515

Torque range-bar

The desired mean value for calculated mean ranges for groups of
tightenings.

0 Nm

P520

Angle X-bar LCL

The lower control limit for mean value.

Calculated automatically or entered manually.

0 deg

P521

Angle X-bar UCL The upper control limit for mean value.
Calculated automatically or entered manually.

9999 deg

P522

Angle range LCL

The lower control limit for range.

Calculated automatically or entered manually.

0 deg

P523

Angle range UCL

The upper control limit for range.

Calculated automatically or entered manually.

9999 deg

P524

Angle X-bar-bar

The desired value for calculated mean values for groups of tightenings. 0 deg

P525

Angle range-bar

The desired value for calculated mean ranges for groups of tightenings. 0 deg

P530

Rundown angle X- The lower control limit for mean value.

bar LCL
Calculated automatically or entered manually.
This function is only available if parameter P104 Rundown angle is
selected.

0 deg

P531

Rundown angle X- The upper control limit for mean value.

bar UCL
Calculated automatically or entered manually.
This function is only available if parameter P104 Rundown angle is
selected.

9999 deg

P532

Rundown angle
range LCL

The lower control limit for range.

Calculated automatically or entered manually.
This function is only available if parameter P104 Rundown angle is
selected.

0 deg

P533

Rundown angle
range UCL

The upper control limit for range.

Calculated automatically or entered manually.
This function is only available if parameter P104 Rundown angle is
selected.

9999 deg

P534

Rundown angle X- The desired mean value for calculated mean values for groups of
bar-bar
tightenings.
This function is only available if parameter P104 Rundown angle is
selected.

0 deg

P535

Rundown angle
range-bar

0 deg

9836 3123 01

The desired mean value for calculated mean ranges for groups of
tightenings.

379

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

This function is only available if parameter P104 Rundown angle is

selected.
P540

Selftap X-bar LCL The lower control limit for mean value.
Calculated automatically or entered manually.
This function is only available if parameter P210 Selftap is selected.

0 Nm

P541

Selftap X-bar UCL The upper control limit for mean value.
Calculated automatically or entered manually.
This function is only available if parameter P210 Selftap is selected.

9999 Nm

P542

Selftap range LCL The lower control limit for range.

Calculated automatically or entered manually.
This function is only available if parameter P210 Selftap is selected.

0 Nm

P543

Selftap range UCL The upper control limit for range.

Calculated automatically or entered manually.
This function is only available if parameter P210 Selftap is selected.

9999 Nm

P544

Selftap X-bar-bar

The desired value for calculated mean values for groups of tightenings. 0 Nm
This function is only available if parameter P210 Selftap is selected.

P545

Selftap range-bar

The desired value for calculated mean ranges for groups of tightenings. 0 Nm
This function is only available if parameter P210 Selftap is selected.

P550

PVT X-bar LCL

The lower control limit for mean value. Calculated automatically or

entered manually.
This function is only available if P220 PVT monitoring is selected.

0 Nm

P551

PVT X-bar UCL

The upper control limit for mean value. Calculated automatically or

entered manually.
This function is only available if P220 PVT monitoring is selected.

9999 Nm

P552

PVT range LCL

The lower control limit for range. Calculated automatically or entered 0 Nm

manually.
This function is only available if P220 PVT monitoring is selected.

P553

PVT range UCL

The upper control limit for range. Calculated automatically or entered 9999 Nm
manually.
This function is only available if P220 PVT monitoring is selected.

P554

PVT X-bar-bar

The desired value for calculated mean values for groups of tightenings. 0 Nm
This function is only available if P220 PVT monitoring is selected.

P555

PVT range-bar

The desired value for calculated mean ranges for groups of tightenings. 0 Nm
This function is only available if P220 PVT monitoring is selected.

P560

CM (X-bar) LCL

The lower control limit for mean value.

Calculated automatically or entered manually.

0%

P561

CM (X-bar) UCL

The upper control limit for mean value.

Calculated automatically or entered manually.

9999%

380

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

P562

CM R LCL

Defines the low limit for permitted variations in the range calculations. 0%

P563

CM R UCL

Defines the high limit for permitted variations in the range calculations. 9999%

P564

CM (X bar-bar)

Defines the desired CM average for all of the subgroups calculated

0%
automatically or entered manually. (If calculated: In each subgroup the
average tightened CM value is calculated. Then an average is calculated
based on all of the averages.)

P565

CM (R bar)

Defines the desired average of the CM variation for all of the subgroups. 0%
Calculated automatically or entered manually. (In each subgroup the
average tightened CM variation is calculated. Then an average is
calculated based on all of the averages.)

21.1.5

Default setup

Programming

P60x Monitoring setup

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

P600

Monitoring setup
performed

Date for latest Monitoring setup.

P601

No of tightenings

Number of tightenings in latest Monitoring setup.

P602

View Result

Button. Active as long as proposed monitoring parameters are

unchanged.

P603

Perform
Monitoring Setup

Button. Perform new Monitoring setup.

P611

Tightening angle
start

Angle is measured from this threshold torque.

50% of target

P612

Rundown pulse
filter active

Defines if pulses during rundown phase shall be filtered away when

calculating tightening results.

Yes

P614

Pulse count start

Defines from where pulse count will start.

Options: From first pulse and From start final angle

From first pulse

P620

Rundown time min Checkbox. With this setting it is possible to activate monitoring of the No
active
current parameter.

P621

Rundown time min Defines the lower limit for rundown time.

P622

Rundown time
max active

9836 3123 01

Default setup

Checkbox. With this setting it is possible to activate monitoring of the No

current parameter.

381

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

P623

Rundown time
max

Defines the upper limit for rundown time.

1000

P630

Tightening time
min active

Checkbox. With this setting it is possible to activate monitoring of the No

current parameter.

P631

Tightening time
min

Defines the lower limit for tightening time.

P632

Tightening time
max active

Checkbox. With this setting it is possible to activate monitoring of the No

current parameter.

P633

Tightening time
max

Defines the upper limit for tightening time.

1000

P639

Start final angle

max

Checks if second pulse torque is higher than this value. System will
shut off directly if this happens.

1000

P640

No of pulses min
active

Checkbox. With this setting it is possible to activate monitoring of the No

current parameter.

P641

No of pulses min

Defines the lower limit for number of pulses.

P642

No of pulses max
active

Checkbox. With this setting it is possible to activate monitoring of the No

current parameter.

P643

No of pulses max

Defines the upper limit for number of pulses.

P644

Relative shutoff
torque min active

Checkbox. With this setting it is possible to activate monitoring of the Off

current parameter.

P645

Relative shutoff
torque min

Defines the lower limit the relative shutoff torque. Connected to [P112]. 50%

P646

Relative shutoff
Checkbox. With this setting it is possible to activate monitoring of the Off
torque max active current parameter.

P647

Relative shutoff
torque max

Defines the upper limit the relative shutoff torque. Connected to [P114]. 150%

P648

Trigger lost

Determines if monitoring of machine shutoff shall be active. If the

tool trigger is released before the machine shuts off when this
parameter is active the tightening will not be approved and an event
code will be displayed.

P650

Keep Pset torque

limits

Checkbox. With this setting the Pset torque monitoring limits will be Off
kept even if a new Monitoring setup is performed.

9999

On

P66x - P69x Control parameters

382

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

P660

Pset pressure

For the Control strategy, this is the air pressure supplied to the tool Yes
before tightening. For the Pulsor Fixed strategy, this pressure is used
throughout the whole tightening.

P661

Rundown pressure When the trigger is pressed, rundown is started and the air pressure
start
is set to this value. A rundown air pressure ramp is often useful,
especially if a low Pset pressure and rundown pressure start is used.

P662

Rundown pressure During rundown, an air ramp is applied if P663 > P661. Every 50 ms Yes
increment
the pressure is incremented by this value.

P663

Rundown pressure The rundown pressure maximum value.

final

Yes

P664

Loosening pressure The air pressure when performing a loosening.

Yes

P665

Final pressure

Air pressure during second step of an angle tightening, i.e. when Start Yes
final angle [P120] is exceeded.

P670

Speed

Decides if Tool Setup shall be accurate or fast

P674

Aim factor

Higher value leads to quicker regulation but less accuracy. Should be Yes
between 1 and 5.

P676

Torque pulse
threshold

Below this threshold, a pulse is not counted as strong enough to start Yes
regulation. Mostly used with prevailing torque joints, e.g. Nyloc
nuts. Expressed in % of target torque.

P680

Tool model used

The tool model used when performing Tool Setup.

No

P681

Tool Setup
performed

The date and time when the Tool Setup was started.

No

P682

Torque tuning
factor

The current torque tuning factor. May be modified through the Torque Yes*
Tuning Adjustment function.*
1.00

P683

Joint hardness

P684

Air shutoff time

The air shutoff time from the Air Hose Test performed just before
Tool Setup.

No

P685

Max available
pressure

The max available pressure from the Air Hose Test performed just
before Tool Setup.

No

P686

Extrapolation
shutoff threshold

When a pulse reaches this torque level the system starts to determine Yes
when to shut off the air pressure. Expressed in % of target torque.

P687

Tool setup
tightening count

The number of tightenings performed during Tool Setup, not including No

deleted tightenings.

P688

New measured
torque

The measured torque value written in when performing a Torque

Tuning Adjustment. The parameter is set in the Torque Tuning
Adjustment window.

9836 3123 01

Editable

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

383

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Editable

P689

Tool Setup torque

tuning factor

The Torque Tuning Factor generated during Tool Setup.

No

P690

Pulse count shutoff Maximum number of pulses allowed during a tightening. When this Yes
limit
limit is reached, the system shuts off air to the tool.

P691

Angle shutoff limit

Yes

P78x - P79x Control parameters

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

P785

Measured torque

The mean value of the manually measured torques during Tool Setup. No

P794

Max requested
pressure

No

P795

Max received
pressure

No

P796

Number of extra
pulses

No

21.2

Multistage

21.2.1

Setup

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

M100

View existing
Multistages

To view all existing Multistages.

M101

Create new
Multistage

To create a new Multistage.

M102

Copy Multistage

Used for the copying of an existing Multistage.

M103

Delete Multistage

Used when a Multistage is to be deleted.

384

Editable

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

21.2.2

Multistage programming

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

M200

Multistage name

Used when a selected Multistage should be given a name (optional).

M201

Stage list

Stage list specifies the list of available Psets that can be linked together Pset 1
into a Multistage. Executes the specified link list of Psets into a
Multistage.

M202

Batch count

Activates a function that measures how many times a Multistage

Off
tightening is repeated. It must be determined from where the batch
size value should be read, if the batch count is activated.
Options:
Off: batch count is not used.
Pset: use Psets batch size.
Fieldbus: An external source decides batch size via fieldbus.
Ethernet/serial: an external source sets batch size via Ethernet or serial
interface.

Default setup

N
e!ot

If batch count is used in a Job (that includes the specific Pset), this
parameter is recommended to be set to Off.
M203

Batch size

Specifies the number of Multistage tightenings in a batch. The range 1

is 0 to 99.

M204

Lock at batch OK

The next time batch OK is reached the tool will be disabled until it is No
unlocked by the operator.

M208

Max coherent
NOKs

Defines the maximum allowed amount of possible NOK (not OK)

Off
subsequent tightenings. This parameter overrules P153 Max coherent
NOKs.

M210

Torque result

Defines from what stage the torque result will be received.

Accessible when torque is selected as a P100 Control strategy.

Last stage

M211

Angle result

Defines from what stage the angle result will be received.

Accessible when angle is selected as a P100 Control strategy.

Last stage

M212

Rundown result

Defines from what stage the rundown angle result will be received.
Accessible when parameter P104 Rundown angle is used.

Last stage

M213

PVT Selftap result Defines from what stage the PVT selftap result will be received.
Accessible when P210 Selftap is activated.

Last stage

M214

PVT mon. result

Defines from what stage the PVT mon. result will be received.
Accessible when P220 PVT monitoring is activated.

Last stage

M215

CM result

Defines from what stage the current monitoring result will be received. Last stage
Accessible when P200 Current monitoring is activated.

M216

Trace

Defines the point from what stage the graph results (Trace diagram)
will be received.

9836 3123 01

Last stage

385

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

M217

Post view torque

result

Defines from what stage the graph will be received.

Accessible when P280 Post view torque is activated.

Last stage

M220

Min valid stat tq

limit

>=Cycle start, < Max valid stat tq limit

The result must be greater than or equal to this value to be included
in the statistical calculations.
Not accessible when a DS strategy or reverse is selected (see P100
Control strategy).

P110 Cycle start

N
e!ot

Results are only stored in the Multistage, not in the individual Pset.
M221

Max valid stat tq

limit

>Min valid stat tq limit, <=tool max torque

The result must be less than or equal to this value to be included in
the statistical calculations.
Not accessible when a DS strategy or reverse is selected (see P100
Control strategy).

T102 Tool max

torque

N
e!ot

Results are only stored in the Multistage, not in the individual Pset.
M222

Subgroup size

2 - 20
4
Defines the size of the subgroup that forms the basis for the statistical
calculations. If this parameter is changed, all statistics have to be
recalculated or deleted.
Not accessible when a DS strategy or reverse is selected (see P100
Control strategy).
N
e!ot

Results are only stored in the Multistage, not in the individual Pset.
M223

No. of subgroups

1 - 7500
10
The controller calculates control limits on request. For these limits to
be relevant they must be based on a large number of data, at least 100.
This parameter defines the number of subgroups to be used in the
statistical calculations. If this parameter is changed, all the results have
to be recalculated.
Not accessible when a DS strategy or reverse is selected (see P100
Control strategy).

M224

Subgroup
frequency

1 7500
1
This parameter indicates the number of subgroups that are disregarded
between every stored subgroup.
Not accessible when a DS strategy or reverse is selected (see P100
Control strategy).

M225

Latest n values

1 100
30
The number of tightening values which are included in the latest
statistical calculations. Not accessible when a DS strategy or reverse
is selected (see P100 Control strategy).

386

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

M226

SPC alarm tq

This parameter switches the torque SPC alarm function on or off.

Not accessible when a DS strategy or reverse is selected (see P100
Control strategy).

Off

M227

SPC alarm angle

This parameter switches the angle SPC alarm function on or off.

Not accessible when a DS strategy or reverse is selected (see P100
Control strategy).

Off

M228

SPC alarm CM

This parameter switches the current monitoring SPC alarm function

on or off.
Accessible when P200 Current monitoring is activated.

Off

Description

Default setup

21.3

Job

21.3.1

Setup

.
Parameter
number

Parameter name

J100

View existing Jobs To view existing Jobs in the current PF channel. Both numbers and
logical names will be displayed.

J101

Create new Job

Create and open a new Job.

1
Each Job has a unique ID number between 1 and 99 (or up 400 with
the configurable memory function). Combining selected
Psets/Multistages creates a Job.
The new Job contains default values on all parameters.

J102

Name

The name of the Job helps the operator to identify the different Jobs
(Maximum 25 characters).

J103

Copy Job

The controller offers the possibility to copy the properties of an already

existing Job to another Job. If the target Job has not already been
created it will be created automatically. The source Job keeps its Job
ID and the target Job gets a new Job ID.

J104

Delete Job

This function deletes an already existing Job from the controller

memory and the RBU. A running Job will be considered as aborted
before it is deleted.

9836 3123 01

None

387

Parameter list

21.3.2

Programming

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

J300

Job list

The Job list specifies the Psets and Multistages that can be included None
in the Job. The total number of Psets/Multistages in one Job can not
exceed 50.
This parameter contains:
PF channel: Controller channel ID that the selected Pset and Multistage
belongs to.
Pset/Ms (Event): identification number of Psets/Multistages included
in the Job. The Psets/Multistages specified in the Job must be
predefined, and they can be included in more than one Job. Same
Pset/Multistage can be used several times in a Job.
Pset name: name of the selected Psets/Multistages. (Pset name is not
visible in Job list on PF Graph).
Auto select: yes = auto select, no = manually select.
With auto select the Job functionality automatically chooses the next
Pset. With a manually selected Pset/Multistage the operator must
manually choose the next Pset.

Default setup

N
e!ot

This function is only available for forced order jobs.

It is not possible to use the auto select functionality for free order jobs
(see parameter job order type [J301]).
A job has override privileges, in comparison to a single Pset, on a
selected possible number of NOT OK tightenings.
A batch size should be specified for each Pset or Multistage in a Job.
The batch size specifies the number of tightenings to be performed
for each Pset or Multistage. Maximum batch size is 99. It is possible
to define free running Psets/Multistages by setting batch size to 0. In
this case, the bypass function must be used to be able to continue the
selected Job
Max coherent Not OK tightenings (NOK's): Max coherent Not OK
tightenings (NOK's) are a selectable possible number of Not OK
tightenings for each Pset/Multistage in a job.
If max coherent NOK's [P153]is used for the Psets or Multistages
included in the Job, these settings are ignored by the Job setting.
The tool will be locked (for both tightening and loosening) when
number of possible not OK tightenings is reached for each batch.
When the tool is locked due to possible not OK tightenings the only
ways to unlock the tool are:
Reset counter for performed not OK tightening via a digital input.
Select abort job (in case the selected job shall not lock the tool).
Select job off.
J301

388

Job type

A Job must be defined as Forced order Job, Free order Job or Free
and Forced order Job.
Free order: Offers the operator to perform Psets/Multistages in any
order. The JobMembers work independently from each other. In a

Forced

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

CellJob with free order, all JobMembers are able to perform tightenings
at the same time.
Forced order: Psets/Multistages must be performed in the order
specified in the Job list. One Job Member at a time performs a
tightening while the other Job Members are locked.
Free and forced order: Offers the operator to perform
Psets/Multistages in the same controller channel as the order defined
Job, but the operator is free to perform tightening from any channel
in the Job.
J302

Lock at job done

Yes: tools of the Job members will be disabled during a Job except Yes
the member who performs tightening according to the Job list. After
a Job is completed or aborted, tools of all Job members will be disabled
for both tightening and loosening. The tool remains locked until a new
Job is selected or the tool is enabled again.
No: the tool will be enabled for all Job members after the Job is
completed. For those Job members who are not involved in the Job
the tool will be enabled also while the Job is in progress.

J303

Tool loosening

This parameter controls the tool loosening functionality during a

Enable
running job.Enable: tool loosening functionality is unlocked during a
running job. Tool loosening is enabled for all job members.Disable:
tool loosening functionality will be locked during a running job.Enable
only on NOK tightening: The tool loosening is disabled during a job
but it will be enabled when a NOK tightening is performed.

J304

Repeat job

After a Job is completed, the Job will be automatically restarted. To

turn off this feature the Job must be aborted, deleted or the Job Off
mode must be selected.

No

J310

Increase batch at
tightening

OK: Specifies that only accepted tightenings will be considered

OK

performed and counted.

OK+NOK: Specifies that also not accepted tightenings will be
considered performed and counted.
N
e!ot

This will also have direct effect on the batch status, which will be
NOK (nxNOK when not accepted tightening is performed and counted
in a Job).
J311

J312

9836 3123 01

Batch status at
increment/bypass

OK: The batch status will be OK at Batch Increment or Bypass event. NOK

The nxOK LED on PF Graph, Pulsor Focus or PF Compact will light.

NOK: The batch status will be NOK (nxNOK) at Batch Increment or
Bypass event.

Decrement batch at Decrement batch at OK loosening makes it possible to redo the latest No
OK loosening
made tightening/increment in a job. The batch counter of the Pset or
multistage is decreased with one step. It is not possible to go back one
step after the job has been completed.

389

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup
N
e!ot

If "batch counter type" is set to OK and last tightening was a NOK

tightening, an OK loosening will not decrease the batch counter.
J320

Max time to start

job

This parameter defines time limit, from the Job is running to the first 0
tightening is started or Batch increment/bypass is performed. If the
time limit is exceeded the Job will be aborted. The timer restarts if a
Job is reselected.
Allowed values are between 1 - 9999 seconds. Value 0 (seconds)
deactivates this function.

J321

Max time to
complete job

This parameter defines time limit, from Job is up running to the last
tightening in the Job is started. If the time limit is exceeded the Job
will be aborted.
Allowed values are between 1 - 9999 seconds. Value 0 (seconds)
deactivates this function.

J322

Display result at
auto select

This parameter is a timer for Jobs with auto selected Psets. It defines 0
the time for tightening result to be displayed on a controller. The result
disappears, and led OK, NOK and nxOK shots off, when the tool
trigger is pushed or if the time limit is exceeded.
The timer also works for Restart Job, when a Job is completed, before
another Pset is selected or when a Pset is deselected.
Allowed values are between 1 - 60 seconds. Value 0 (seconds)
deactivates this function.

J330

Use line control

The Job will be ready to start when a Job with activated Line control No
has been selected and Line control start signal has been received.
Otherwise, if Line control start signal has not been received the Job
will not be ready to start and the tool will be locked until the Line
control start signal is received.
A Line control start signal is an external signal defined to be received
by the controller unit from a digital input. This signal can be received
before or after a Job selection.
Line control start signal status will be cleared when the running Job
has been completed or aborted.
Line Control related inputs/outputs have only effect on a JobReference.

J341

Result of nontightenings

Yes: one null result for batch increment or decrement will be stored No
in the controller database. One null result will be stored in the database
for each step and remaining Psets in a job in case of bypass Pset or
abort job.
No: No null results will be stored in the controller database.

J342

Reset all identifiers If activated, a reset will be made for all identifiers (Type 1, Type 2,
at Job done
Type 3 and Type 4) at Job done.

No

J350

Header in result
view

Pset name

390

Select whether running Pset name, Job name or PF name shall be

displayed in the header of result view (PF Graph display).

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

21.4

Controller

21.4.1

Information

Parameter
number

Parameter name

C100

Main code version The version number of the controller software release (i.e. the full software package).

C101

Application code
version

The version number of the application code.

C102

Parameter tree
version

The version of the parameter-tree.

C103

RBU code version The version number of the RBU-code.

C104

Boot code version The version number of the Boot-code.

C105

DSP code version

The version number of the DSP-code.

C106

MC code version

The version number of the MC-code.

C110

Controller type

The type of controller.

C111

Serial number

The serial number of the controller unit. It is possible to change the number.

C115

RBU type

The type of RBU (Rapid Backup Unit) inserted in the controller. The available RBU types
are; Bronze, Silver, Gold, DS, X or a Customer special.

C116

RBU serial number The serial number of the RBU (the hard-coded, unique, MAC-address).

C118

MAC address

Ethernet MAC address.

C119

Drive size

Shows the drive size of the controller. Available drive sizes are:SL, Small, Medium, Large,
Uni, IRC.

21.4.2

Description

Configuration

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

C200

Pset

Defines what device is to be used when selecting the running Pset.

Available options; Off, Selector, DigIn, Ethernet/Serial, Identifier,
Fieldbus, PF Keyboard, Fieldbus selector, STwrench tag and ST
Selector.

Off

C201

Job

Defines what device is to be used when selecting the running Job.

The option is accessible when Job is accessible (RBU type).

Off

9836 3123 01

391

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

Available options; Off, DigIn, Ethernet/Serial, Identifier, Fieldbus

and PF Keyboard
C202

Job override

Defines what device is to be used when selecting the running Job.

This source has a higher priority than C201 Job. The option is
accessible when Job is accessible (RBU type).
Available options; Off, DigIn, Ethernet/Serial, Identifier, Fieldbus
and PF Keyboard

C204

Tag ID select
source

Defines whether Flexible Tag ID mapping shall be uesd or not.It is

Off
only available for BMW RBU and then when C200 'Pset select souce'
is set to 'STw Tag'

C205

Tag ID select
source list

A table defining which Tag ID that is mapped to available Pset ID:s 'Tag ID' equal to
Only available for BMW RBU and then when C200 Pset select source 'Pset ID'
is set to STw Tag.

C210

Lock on reject

When this parameter is activated, the tool locks when a NOK

No
tightening has occurred.
Available options; No, DigIn unlock and Rev ring unlock To unlock
tool use digital input unlock, rev ring unlock, Fieldbus or the
Ethernet/serial protocol.

C211

Result of nontightenings

Yes/No
No
If Yes is selected, then a non tightening event i.e. loosening, batch
operation will generate a result.
If the checkbox is selected, then the non-tightening events; OK
loosening, batch increment or batch decrement generate a result that
is stored in the PF database. This parameter is used for Pset and
Multistage. For Job, see J341.

C212

Unlock tool at Pset Unlocks tool at Pset select when user has performed all tightenings
select
in a batch and the tool has been locked due to 'Lock at batch done'.
Preconditions: P150 'Batch count' is set to Pset and 151 'Batch size'
and P152 'Lock at batch done' has been set.

No

C220

Disable loosening
at OK

Yes/No
Used to prevent the operator from loosening a correctly tightened
joint.

No

C230

OE positioning
type

Reverse/Forward/Reverse Torque Based

Selects type of positioning mode for open end.

Forward

C240

Reset batch at Pset Yes/No

change
Resets the batch counter when a new Pset is selected.

Yes

C241

Reset batch at Pset Yes/No

store
Used if batch counter for a Pset is to be stored, and a reset of batch
counter is wanted.

Yes

392

Off

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

Parameter
number
C242

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

Decrement batch at Yes/No/If last tightening OK

OK loosening
If YES, an OK Loosening generates a batch decrement for both OK
and NOK tightening. Set to If last tightening OK to decrement only
for OK tightening.

No

N
e!ot

This function only works with a single spindle, NOT with Sync..
C243

Batch status at
increment

OK/NOK
Defines if an increment or bypass operation is OK or NOK.

NOK

C244

Increase batch at
tightening

OK tightening
OK+NOK tightening
Defines if batch counter shall be increased at OK tightenings or at
OK+NOK tightenings.

OK

C250

Use last Pset

Yes/No
Use last Pset which was selected before the controller reboots.

No

C260

Set

Time and date are set by this command.

C270

Events

Opens the window for event log and display options.

21.4.3

Network

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

C300

IP address

The IP address is a number for identification in a network.

0.0.0.0

C301

Subnet mask

Specifies the number of IP addresses on the subnet and also the number 0.0.0.0
of the controller unit that can be placed below a Net reference, if no
router is used.

C302

Default router

IP address of the router used on the subnet.

C310

Channel ID

Identification number of the channel/system to which the programming 0

refers. Valid values are 0-20. 0 is only used for standalone controllers.

C311

Channel name

Name of controller. It is possible to use up to 25 characters.

C312

Cell reference IP

Defines the IP address to the controller acting Cell reference.The Cell 0.0.0.0
reference monitors and collects information from the Cell members
included in the group.

0.0.0.0

N
e!ot

This IP address must be written into each included Cell member.

C313

9836 3123 01

Cell ID number

The Cell ID is a unique number for the Cell reference (a kind of

identification number).

393

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

Valid values are 0-1000. Accessible when the controller is a Cell

reference.
C314

Cell name

A unique name to be able to find the Cell in the network.

It is possible to use up to 25 characters. Accessible when the controller
is a Cell reference.

C315

Net reference IP

Defines the IP address to the controller acting Net reference.The Net 0.0.0.0
reference monitors and collects information from the Net members
included in the group.
N
e!ot

This IP address must be written into each included Net member.

C316

Job reference IP

Defines the IP address to the controller acting Job reference.The Job 0.0.0.0
reference monitors and collects information from the Job members
included in the group. RBU dependent.
N
e!ot

This IP address must be written into each included Job member.

C317

Sync reference IP

Defines the IP address to the controller acting Sync reference.The

Sync reference monitors and collects information from the Sync
members included in the group. RBU dependent.

0.0.0.0

N
e!ot

This IP address must be written into each included Sync member.

C320

Multicast on

On/Off. Enable/disable Multicast functionality.

C321

Multicast IP
address

It is possible to set this IP address between 224.0.0.1 (all devices on 225.6.7.8

this sub net) and 239.255.255.255 (multicast standard).
Only valid if C320 Multicast is activated.

C322

Port

Port number for multicast communication.

8086

C323

Results

None/All/Not ok
The results that are reported to the multicast address.

All

C324

Traces

None/All/Not ok
The traces that are reported to the multicast address.

None

C325

Sync status

On/Off. Used if sending Sync status on multicast.

Off

C326

Event code

On/Off. Used if sending event code on multicast.

Off

C330

Port

Port number for open protocol server Ethernet communication.

4545

C331

Serial cable loss

detection

When enabled, the controller detects cable loss when running open
protocol serial on serial port 1 or 2.

On

C332

Latent result
reporting

Defines whether latent results from wireless tools (i.e. results received No
by Power Focus after radio shadow or in any case after the selection

394

Off

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

of a new Job or similar) shall be reported to upper level system (=Yes)

or only stored in the PF db (=No).
C333

Tool command
acknowledge

Defines whether Open protocol commands shall be acknowledged by Controller ack

the controller or by the tool.This parameter is applicable when using
a wireless tool connected to the Power Focus.

C334

Job abort result

request

Defines the Power Focus handling at Job selection when a wireless

tool is connected.
Possible alternatives:
1. 'Result request' (Job abortion is in progress until the tool has been
locked and all results have been retrieved)
2. 'Tool inaccessible' (The PF tries to lock the tool and retrieve the
results but if the tool is inaccessible, job abortion is forced anyway
in the PF)
3. 'Unconditional' (No communication is done with the tool. Job
aborted immediately)
In all alternatives above it is ensured that all results from the tool are
stored in the PF database.

C340

Port

Port number for ToolsTalk Ethernet communication.

6543

C350

ToolsNet on

On/Off
Off
Result after each tightening is recorded in ToolsNet. A ToolsNet
database registers and stores the results from tightenings, traces, data
and history. Each controller units can store information from
approximately 5000 tightenings. But the capacity in the ToolsNet
database is, in principle, unlimited. The information can be mapped
against the controller, object or VIN-number, as desired.

C351

IP address

IP address for ToolsNet server. Only valid if C350 ToolsNet is

activated.

0.0.0.0

C352

Port

Port number for ToolsNet communication.

6570
N
e!ot

Port 6570 is not to ToolsNet but to the PIM server which connects
controller units to ToolsNet.
C353

Traces

None/All/Not ok
The traces reported to ToolsNet.

C354

Keep Pset date on

restore

Used to keep Pset time stamp when Pset data is read from file.
Off
On: Pset date is kept when uploading file to controller. Off: Pset date
is changed to current date when uploading file to controller.

C360

Port

Port number for Acta Ethernet connection.

9836 3123 01

None

6540

395

Parameter list

21.4.4

COM Ports

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

C400

Baud rate

The baud rate of the Serial 1 COM port on the MC-card of the
controller.
Options: 2400, 4800 and 9600 bit/s

9600 bit/s

C401

Protocol

The type of protocol running on the serial 1 COM port on the MCcard of the controller.
Options: None, ASCII, 3964R and IDESCO

ASCII

C410

Baud rate

The baud rate of the Serial 2 COM port on the CC card of the
controller.
Options: 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 bits/s

9600 bit/s

21.4.5

Display

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

C500

Language

Select language for the controller display.

Options available in ToolsTalk: Chinese, English, French, German,
Italian, Japanese, Brazil, Spanish, Swedish and Polish

English

C501

PF tq presentation Select unit for showing torque.

unit
Options: Nm, lbf.ft, lbf.in, kpm, kgf.cm, ozf.in, and dNm.

Nm

C503

Torque with PVT

comp

Add PVT compensate value to display torque value.

No

C504

Air pressure
presentation unit

Options: Bar, PSI, kpond/cm2 and kPa

Bar

C510

One channel

Shows how the result after a tightening will be presented in the

controller user interface.
Four variables can be shown at the same time. In PC, activate the part
window with the left mouse button, open the list with variables with
the right mouse button, and select the variable to follow.

C511

Two channels

Possible to show two controller channels at the same time. Select

window to edit with keys 1, 2, 3 and 4. Then press the enter key to
activate list of options. Pset and PF channel no. is changed with Pset
(-/+) and change (-/+) keys. This function is valid only for the PF
Graph and Pulsor Focus user interface.

C512

Compact display

Used to set up the compact display.

C520

Viewing angle

Set the PF Graph display-viewing angle to modify display visibility.

(Not for ToolsTalk PF user).

396

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

C530

Soft keys enabled

Function that connects and disconnects the menu selection keys. On Yes
the controller the function keys and plus (+) and minus (-) key will
be locked.

C540

Backlight auto off If selected, the lights on the PF Graph display will turn off after 30 Yes
minutes of inactivity. The light will turn on again after a key is pushed
or after a tightening.

C550

Theme

Selected color theme. Available options: PF4000, Classic, Night

C551

OK background

Background color in result windows for OK results.Available options: Default

Default, Black, White, Green

C552

OK foreground

Foreground (text) color in result windows for OK results.Available

options: Default, Black, White, Green

Default

C553

NOK background

Background color in result windows for NOK results.Available

options: Default, Black, White, Green

Default

C554

NOK foreground

Foreground (text) color in result windows for OK results.Available

options: Default, Black, White, Green

Default

Default setup

21.4.6

Default setup

PF4000

Memory

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

C600

Type

Presents different options to configure the memory.

Default
Access is depending on RBU type.
configuration
Available options: Default configuration, More Psets, More Jobs,
More results, More events, More Identifiers and Totally configurable,
Pset comments.

C601

No. of Psets

Number of Psets possible to configure.

Always readable. Writable if C600 Type is set to "Totally
configurable".
Scope: 1 to 600

250

C602

No. of Jobs

Number of Jobs possible to configure.

Always readable. Writable if C600 Type is set to "Totally
configurable".
Scope: 1 to 700

99

C603

No. of Results

Number of results possible to save.

Always readable. Writable if C600 Type is set to "Totally
configurable".
Scope: 1 to 9000

5000

9836 3123 01

397

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

C604

No. of Identifier
result parts

Number of VINs possible to save in each result.

Always readable. Writable if C600 Type is set to "Totally
configurable".
Scope: 1 to 4

C605

No. of Events

Number of events possible to save.

Always readable. Writable if C600 Type is set to "Totally
configurable".
Scope: 1 to 800

100

C606

No. of Statistical
events

Number of statistical events possible to save.

Always readable. Writable if C600 Type is set to "Totally
configurable".
Scope: 1 to 500

100

C607

No. of Traces

Number of traces possible to save

Always readable. Writable if C600 Type is set to "Totally
configurable".
Scope: 1 to 100

C609

Estimated memory Command that informs the user about the memory allocation.Always
usage
readable. Not writable.

C610

Delete all results

Tightening and statistical database for the controller is deleted.

C611

Total reset

Totally reset of the controller memory.

T NOTICE!

All programming, tightenings and statistics will be

deleted.
C612

Reset general event All events in the general event log are deleted.
log

C613

Reset statistical
event log

21.4.7

All events in the statistical event log are deleted.

Accessibility

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

C800

Use

Prevents parameter updates on the controller keyboard and from

ToolsTalk applications.

No

C801

Entry

Specify unit allowed to enter the password. Options: Tools Talk and All
All

C802

Setup password

Choose a password, which will give write access to all parameters

except those for the network.

398

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

Parameter
number
C803

21.5

Parameter name

Description

Communication
password

Choose a password, which will give write access to the network

parameters.

Default setup

Tool

The tool parameters are visible depending on which tool is connected. For STB, most parameters are invisible
when the tool is offline.

21.5.1

Information

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

T100

Tool type

Shows information about the connected tool type.

T101

Usage

Type of tool, fixed or handheld. Fixed tools have a lower max speed,
which means that this parameter has to be evaluated when calculating
the speed factor.
Options: Handheld and Fixed
Accessible when a tool is connected, except STB offline.

T102

Max torque

Shows the maximum tightening torque for the tool in chosen unit.
Nm
Possible values between 0.1 and 6553 Nm.
The value is possible to change if correct password privileges are met.
Accessible when a tool is connected, except STB offline

Default setup

N
e!ot

This parameter must only be changed by users with tool knowledge.

Read only access for ST/SL tools and STB online.
T103

Gear ratio

Shows the mechanical gear ratio for the tool.

T104

Production date

Tool production date. In Unix format.

T105

Serial number

Shows the serial number of the tool

T106

Denomination

Shows the name of the connected spindle type

T107

Product number

Shows the product number of the connected spindle

T108

Memory type

Tool NVRAM memory type: 0: Standard or 1: Extended

T110

Size

Shows information about the motor size in the tool.

T111

Type

Shows information about the connected Tensor tool type.

9836 3123 01

399

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

Accessible when an ETX tool is connected.

T112

Serial number

Shows the serial number of the tool.

Accessible when an ETX tool is connected.

T113

Denomination

Accessible when an ETX tool is connected.

T114

Product number

Accessible when an ETX tool is connected.

T120

Serial number

Accessible when an ETX tool is connected.

T121

Denomination

Accessible when an ETX tool is connected.

T122

Product number

Accessible when an ETX tool is connected.

T130

Application code
versions

Shows the version number of the application code.

T131

Boot code version Shows the version number of the boot-code.

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

T130

Application code
versions

Shows the version number of the application code.

T131

Boot code version

Shows the version number of the boot-code.

T140

Module type

Shows what type of module that is connected. E.g. IRC-B or

IRC-W.

T141

Device type

Shows the connected device type. E.g. cB-OWS451 or cBOWSPA311g.

T142

Device SW version

Shows the software version number of the radio module.

T150

SSID

Shows the SSID of which the tool is connected to.

T151

IP address

Shows the tool IP address.

T152

Hostname

Shows the tool hostname.

T153

MAC address

Shows the MAC address of the tool.

T16x

STwrench information

T160

smartHEAD torque

Show smartHEAD capacity.

T161

STwrench chip

Informs if the RFID is mounted or not.

T162

TAG id

Show TAG identifier from TAG.

T163

Torque correction
coefficient

Show torque correction coefficient from TAG.

400

Default setup

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

T164

Angle correction
coefficient

Show angle correction coefficient from TAG.

T165

Nominal torque

Show nominal torque (at measured angel).

21.5.2

Default setup

Configuration

The tool parameters are visible depending on which tool is connected. For STB, most parameters are invisible
when the tool is offline.
Parameter
number
T200

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

Tool start select source Defines which device is allowed to start the tool.
Tool trigger
When safety trigger is used, GPIO 4 function must be set to
Off.
To start the tool, safety trigger and start trigger must be pushed
simultaneously (second button must be pushed within 0.5 s
from first button, order is arbitrary). If any safety trigger or
start trigger is released while tool is running, tool will stop
immediately.
Once tool has been started using safety trigger, both buttons
must first be released to allow the tool to be started again.
Options available: Tool trigger, DigIn, Fieldbus, Sync start,
Remote start, Front/Push start, Front/Push start AND Tool
trigger, Front/Push start OR Tool trigger, Safety trigger
N
e!ot

Remote start is not available for Tensor STB tools.

T201

9836 3123 01

Timer enable tool

Determines if and how the tool shall be locked by default,

Off
and requires to be unlocked by digital input Timer enable
tool.
The function unlocks the tool for a period of T202 seconds.
Once the period expires, the tool will be locked again. If a
start attempt is made before T202 seconds have passed, the
tool will remain unlocked until it is stopped or button is
released.
Options:
Off: timer enabled tool functionality will not be in use.
Always: timer enabled tool functionality will be in use, and
that tightening, loosening and positioning (for Open end tools)
will be disabled.
Tightening: timer enabled tool functionality will be in use,
and that tightening will be disabled.

401

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

Loosening: timer enabled tool functionality will be in use,

and that loosening will be disabled.
Positioning: timer enabled tool functionality will be in use,
and that positioning (for Open end tools) will be disabled.
N
e!ot

At least one input source must be configured to use digital

input Timer enable tool, otherwise the configuration will be
useless (the tool will be disabled and it will not be possible
to enable it).
T202

Timer enable tool time Timer function within range 0.5 to 5.0 seconds.
For more information, see section Tool

0.5 s

T203

Direction alert

Possibility to add alert to tool direction. Options: Off, CW,

CCW.

Off

T204

Alert type

Defines the type of alert for T203. Options: Buzzer, flash tool
LEDs, buzzer and LEDs.

T205

TAG ID control

Checks that the right Tag is inserted in STwrench before

enabling the tol, whenever the Pset or Job is selected via any
external source (see C200 Pset).
This feature is available as from W14.0 SW release

T206

Trigger Off delay

A delay from releasing the trigger until the tool shuts off. To 0
be used when using the 'push to start' feature and the trigger
signal is lost for short while.Value to be multiplied by 10 for
getting value in milliseconds. (Max value: 15 which is equal
to 150 ms)

T207

STwrench Relay access Activates functionality for the STwrench to set two relays
('Stop tightening' and 'Slowdown tightening') in the PF for
sending commands to external system (robot).

Off

T210

Mode

Off

T220

Enable

T221

Volume

Available options: Low, Medium, High

T224

Events

The event-sound configuration.

T230

CW pressed

Defines the function of function button when ring is in CW

position. Available functions are described in chapter.

T231

CCW pressed

Defines the function of the function button when ring is in For SL-drive: 97
CCW position. Available functions are described in chapter. (Toggle CW CCW)

402

Defines the function of the Tool accessory bus.

Available options: Off, Power on, General purpose IO, ST
Bus
Not applicable on SL drives.

On
High

For SL-drive: 97
(Toggle CW CCW)
Otherwise: Off

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup
Otherwise: Off

T232

CW single push

Defines the function of function button single push when ring Off
is in CW position. Available functions are described in
chapter.

T233

CCW single push

Defines the function of function button single push when ring Off
is in CCW position. Available functions are described in
chapter.

T234

CW double push

Defines the function of function button double push when

Off
ring is in CW position. Available functions are described in
chapter.

T235

CCW double push

Defines the function of function button double push when

ring is in CCW position. Available functions are described
in chapter.

T236

Push detection interval Defines the maximum time that may elapse from button down 300
to button up for a push to be detected. Range: 250 to 1000
ms.

T237

Next push interval

Defines the maximum time that may elapse from successful 300
detection of a push for a new push to be detected. Range: 250
to 1000 ms.

T240

Events

The blue LED is used to highlight events similar to the relays Off
of the controller. The blue LED may be set to highlight several
events. Use the add key to add events and set duration.
Remove events with the remove key. Available functions are
described in chapter.

T250

Illuminator mode

Defines operation mode of illuminator (LEDs in front of the Off

tool and corresponding relay function). Available selections
are off, on, tracking event and event controlled.

T251

On event

Defines which event (relay function) that is used to turn on

illuminator while operating in tracking event or event
controlled mode. For available events see Digital I/O and
fieldbus items (Blue LED).

T252

Off event

Defines which event (relay function) that is used to turn off Off
illuminator while operating in event controlled mode. For
available events see Digital I/O and fieldbus items (Blue
LED).

T253

On time

Defines how long illuminator will remain lit, if not turned off 60
by event, while operating in tracking event or event
controlled mode.

9836 3123 01

Off

Off

403

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

On time period starts to elapse when on event occurs. In case

on event occurs again before on time has elapsed, the on time
period will be restarted.
T260

Control type

Selection of tool light control sources. Defines which protocol PF-controlled:1

the tool lights should follow:
Available options: PF-controlled:1, PF-controlled:2, PFcontrolled:3, Light off.
The table below shows the functionality of the tool LED's for
each option.

T261

Use on time

On/Off. Defines whether the tool LED's should light for a

specified period of time (on) or continuously (off) after a
tightening.

T262

On time

Select time for tool light LED, can be set between 0 and 300
seconds. Only valid if C261 Use on time is On.

T263

Indicator mode

Configures ST tool to show selected Pset (Pset 1-8) on the

tool LED's.
Available options: Off, Pset indication
Applicable only if an ST tool is connected.

T270

Power save timeout

Tool will turn off automatically if inactive for this period of 30

time.
Unit: Minutes. Min value: 1. Max value: 120.

T271

Start condition

Tool radio start condition

Alternatives: Off, Connected, Start request

Off

T272

Link timeout

After this timeout the tool is considered offline.

Unit: Milliseconds. Min value: 1000. Max value: 60000.

5000

T276

Max sender power

Max sender power on the IRC module. Only IRC-B.

Full

T277

Torque and angle trace Whether or not a torque and angle trace should be produced No
for every tightening. Only IRC-B.

T278

Power save

Sets if the parameter T270 Power save timeout is active or

not.

T279

Delay "tool lock"

This setting determines if a tool lock request shall be delayed On

until the current tightening/loosening/positioning is completed.

T290

Primary tool

Expected primary tool connection. Cable or IRC.

T292

IRC pairing

When selected, IRC pairing starts if tool is in pairing mode

and tool connection is IRC-B.

T293

Power Focus IP port

Port for STB tool IP connection.

404

Off

Off

On

Cable

6677

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

T294

Serial port

Serial port where IRC-B device is connected. Serial 2 or

internal.

Serial 2

T296

IRC-W operational
mode

Operational mode when IRC-W is used. Ad-hoc or

Infrastructure

Ad-hoc

T297

IRC-W channel

Radio channel when IRC-W is used. Valid channels: Auto,

1-14, 36, 40, 44, 48

Auto

Option

Yellow tool light

Red tool light

PF-Controlled:1

LOW. Torque and/or HIGH. Torque and/or OK. Torque and

angle values under
angle values over
angle values within
specified limits.
specified limits.
specified limits.

PF-controlled:2

Customer specific.

PF-controlled:3

Event code to be
acknowledged

Light off

Tool LED's functionality disabled.

Tightening NOK

Green tool light

Tightening OK

T60x Work Object Led

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

T600

Work object led

function

Options: Off, on and Tool usage

Tool usage

T601

Work object led

timeout

Sets timeout period for work object LED, 0 -9999

5 sec

21.5.3

Diagnostics

The tool parameters are visible depending on which tool is connected. For STB, most parameters are invisible
when the tool is offline.
Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

T300

Sensor tracking

Sensor tracking monitors the torque and angle sensors in real-time. A window with torque,
angle and zero offset values updates continuously. Sensor status is monitored while the
spindle is rotated (manually) or if the tool is heated/cooled etc. The motor does not run.
An exit-button ends the command and returns the user to the main diagnostic window.
N
e!ot

9836 3123 01

405

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description
Sensor tracking function is not possible to use during a tightening. For DS tools have torque
and zero offset tracking no validity since they have no transducer. The value presented is
therefore set to zero (0).

T310

Ttigger

Diagnostics for tool LED's and buttons.

T311

Direction ring

Diagnostics for tool LED's and buttons.

T312

Function button

Diagnostics for tool LED's and buttons.

T313

Lights

Diagnostics for tool LED's and buttons.

T320

Motor temp.

Shows the current motor temperature.

T321

Motor temp. limit

Temperature when the motor is considered overheated.

T322

No. of over temp.

Number of times the motor has reached its temperature limit.

T323

Peak motor temp.

Maximum measured motor temperature.

T330

Radio diagnostics

The measured round-trip when pinging the tool and RSSI value

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Tool Tracking

Button. Opens the window for starting tool tracking.

TCB Air hose test Button. Opens the window for starting a TCB air hose test.
T342

Max available air

pressure

Shows the maximum available air pressure (in bar). Not editable.

T343

Air shut off time

Shows the amount of time (in seconds) the air was shut off. not editable.

T344

Air hose test

performed at

Time stamp for latest performed air hose test. Not editable

21.5.4

Maintenance

The tool parameters are visible depending on which tool is connected. For STB, most parameters are invisible
when the tool is offline.
Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

T400

Calibration value

Shows the calibration value stored in the tool.

T401

Calibration date

Shows the date of latest calibration for the tool. Automatically updated
when the calibration value is set.

406

Default setup

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

T402

Set calibration
value

This parameter sets the T400 Calibration value and the T401 Calibration
date in the tool memory, and performs a shunt calibration. The shunt
calibration is useful for determining if the shunt calibration value
received at a previous shunt calibration tends to drift away. The shunt
calibration is also performed before each new tightening, and the same
checks and boundaries apply.

T403

Normalization
value

Shows the normalization value for the tool.

Valid scope: 100 to 9999.

1000

T404

Calibration alarm

0 = No alarm is active, 1 = activating of parameter T405 Calibration

alarm date. (Unix format no of seconds from 1970-01-01).

T405

Calibration alarm
date

This parameter makes it possible to change date for next calibration

alarm.

T406

Set calibration
alarm date

Not applicable in the PF Graph HMI.

T410

Total no. of
tightenings

Total number of tightenings performed by the tool during its entire

lifetime.

T411

Service indicator

Enable/disable (on/off) tool service indicator alarm function.

T412

Number of
tightenings since
service

Number of performed tightenings since latest tool service.

T413

Service interval

Number of tightenings between tool services. This parameter serves

as service indicator alarm limit. Value between 1 and 250 (x 10 000).

T414

Latest service date Shows the date of when the latest service was performed.
Automatically updated when Service counter reset is performed.
Possible to set manually to any date.

T415

Service counter
reset

T416

Lock tool on alarm Enables/disables lock on alarm. Tool will be locked while service
indicator alarm or while wear indicator alarm is activated.

T417

User message

Shows a user specified message-string of maximum 35 characters plus

a null-termination. The message shall be stored in the tool memory.

T418

Date for next

service

Sets the date for the next planned service.

T420

Use Open end

Defines if a tool with an Open end head should be used.

T421

Inverted motor
rotation

Shows if the Open end has to use an inverted motor rotation.

9836 3123 01

Default setup

Sets T412 Number of tightenings since service to zero, sets 414 Latest
service date to current date and sets T411 Service indicator to off.

407

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

T422

Open end
Defines if Open end CW (clockwise) or CCW (counter clockwise) is
tightening direction to be used.

T423

Open end tune

The Open end tune command sets the reference position of the Open
end head, and measures the gear ratio and gear play. The tool rotates
slowly in the reverse direction until its true open position at the
mechanical stop in the Open end head is reached. Open end tuning
measures the total T103 Gear ratio and writes the new value to the tool
memory.

T424

Max torque
positioning limit

Defines the max value for P171 Limit

T430

Wear indicator

Enables/disables (on/off) the wear indicator alarm function.

T431

Wear used

For every tightening the wear is calculated through a formula with inparameters: torque, speed and temperature etc.
As soon as a tightening or loosening is started, the wear is calculated
and added to T431, which is the accumulated wear since last service.
When the T431 has reached 100%, it's time for service
When the tool has been serviced this parameter is set to 0.

T432

Remaining
tightenings

Estimated number of tightenings that can be performed before wear

indicator alarm occurs.

T433

Alarm factor

Using T433, the customer can scale the effective service interval (time 100%
to wear alarm is activated). In case T433 is set to 25%, the alarm will
activate 4 times earlier than by default. In case T433 is set to 400%,
the alarm will activate 4 times later than default.

T434

Min wear
tightenings

An additional condition for activation of wear indicator alarm.

Specifies the minimum amount of tightenings (since latest service)
that must be performed before wear indicator alarm activates.

T440

QRTT on

On/Off
Off
Automatic tool calibration using the ACTA 4000 and a QRTT device
is enabled in this branch. A tool calibration session is started by
connecting the ACTA to the Power Focus and fit the QRTT device
to the spindle. One Multistage with three Psets is used when the
calibration is run, one torque tightening (for torque calibration) and
two different rotate spindle (for loosening and angle calibration) Psets.
It is necessary for the controller to have enough memory space
available to store the Multistages and Psets needed. If the calibration
shows an unsatisfactory result the operator is assumed to take the
appropriate action. No calibration value (calibration- or normalization
value etc.) will be changed automatically.

T441

QRTT Pset 1

Pset used by ACTA

T442

QRTT Pset 2

Pset used by ACTA

408

250000

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

T443

QRTT Pset 3

Pset used by ACTA

T444

QRTT Mset

Multistage used by ACTA.

T445

Create QRTT

Creates the QRTT Pset and Multistage. Use only when tool is
connected.

T450

Perform motor
tuning

When selected, this parameter will perform motor tuning on the

connected tool.

T451

Perform Sync
motor tuning

When selected, this parameter will perform Sync motor tuning on the
connected tools (a Sync group must exist).

T460

Disconnect tool

Disables reading and writing to the tool memory and allows the user
to change tools without power off.

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

Perform Air sensor Button. Performs an air sensor tuning

tuning
T500

Line Pressure

The line pressure entered when air sensor tuning were performed.

T501

Air senor tuning

performed at

Date and time when air sensor tuning was performed.

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

T510

Tool Drift alarm

activated

With this setting it is possible to activate tool drift alarm for the
tool that is being used.

On

T511

Pset used

Displays which Psets are included in the tool drift alarm

evaluation.

1 or all created
Psets

Set Pset used

Button. Used to set Psets to include in the tool drift alarm

evaluation

T512

Sample size

Determines the number of tightenings that shall be used when

calculating the running mean value in the tool drift alarm
evaluation.

T513

Tightenings to be
included

Determines if all tightenings shall be included or only approved All

tightenings.

T514

Tool Drift alarm

updated

Time stamp for latest update of tool drift alarm general parameters.

Parameter
number

9836 3123 01

500

409

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

T520

Average torque
deviation Lower
limit

Checkbox. With this parameter it is possible to switch off tool drift

alarm indication for this parameter.

Off

T521

Average torque
deviation Lower
limit

The lower limit for average torque deviation.

Calculated automatically or entered manually.

0.0

T522

Average torque
deviation Upper
limit

Checkbox. With this parameter it is possible to switch off tool drift

alarm indication for this parameter.

Off

T523

Average torque
deviation Upper
limit

The upper limit for average torque deviation.

Calculated automatically or entered manually.

0.0

T524

Average frequency Checkbox. With this parameter it is possible to switch off tool drift
deviation
alarm indication for this parameter.
Lower limit

Off

T525

Average frequency The lower limit for pulse frequency.

deviation
Calculated automatically or entered manually.
Lower limit

0.0

T526

Average frequency Checkbox. With this parameter it is possible to switch off tool drift
deviation
alarm indication for this parameter.
Upper limit

Off

T527

Average frequency The upper limit for pulse frequency.

deviation
Calculated automatically or entered manually.
Upper limit

0.1

View Tool drift

results

Button. Shows the latest tool drift alarm results.

Reset Tool Drift

Alarm

Button. Resets all data for Tool drift alarm

Parameter name

Description

T530

Number of pulses
since service

Shows the number of pulses since last service. Not editable.

T531

Service interval in Sets the number of service intervals.

pulses

Parameter
number

410

Default setup

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

21.5.5

Buzzer configuration

The tool parameters are visible depending on which tool is connected. For STB, most parameters are invisible
when the tool is offline.
Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

E100

Name

Sound buzzer name.

E101

Frequency

Valid scope: 400 - 4000 Hz

800

E102

Time On

Valid scope: 0.01 - 65.0 Seconds

0.1

E103

Time Off

Valid scope: 0.01 - 65.0 Seconds

0.2

E104

Repetition

Valid scope: 0 - 100 times

E105

Volume

Valid scope: 0 - 100 %

50
This parameter is relative (in percent) to parameter T221 Volume,
which could be set to high, medium or low. T221 Volume is found in
the sound setup

21.5.6

Default setup

Sound configuration

The tool parameters are visible depending on which tool is connected. For STB, most parameters are invisible
when the tool is offline.
Parameter
number

Parameter name

W102

Stream name

21.6

Accessories

21.6.1

Digital I/O

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

A110

Relay status

Shows the usage and status of the relay devices.

9836 3123 01

411

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

A111

DigIn status

Shows the usage and status of the digital input devices..

A112

Relay test

Performs a test of the relays used.

T NOTICE!

Be aware of that changing the state of a relay may effect equipment

connected to it. Please ensure that no damage or injury can be caused by the connected
equipment before activating.
N
e!ot

It is not possible to have the controller in normal operation during the test.

21.6.2

I/O bus

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

A230

Selector confirm

Available when A232 Selector external controlled is set to Off

No.
Options: off, on, on with acknowledge.
Off: function disabled.
On: when a new Pset/Multistage is selected the controller
needs a confirmation signal from the selector. This is made
by lifting a socket from the indicated socket tray. The
exception is when a Pset/Multistage from the same socket
tray is selected sequentially. Then no confirmation is
needed.
On with acknowledge: Every time a new Pset/Multistage
is selected the controller needs a confirmation signal from
the selector. This is made by lifting a socket from the
indicated socket tray.
With this option there is no exception when a
Pset/Multistage from the same socket tray is selected
sequentially. Then the controller still needs a confirmation
signal from the selector

Default setup

N
e!ot

Selector confirmation is also applicable when selecting

Psets/Multistages in a Job.
A231

Selector lost mode Determines whether the last selected Pset or "No Pset" is Last Pset
selected when communication with a selector is lost.
Available when A232 Selector external controlled is set to
No.

A232

Selector external
controlled

412

Turns selectors into externally controlled mode. Used to

No
externally control the Selector LED's via fiedldbus items
Selector control green light and Selector control red light.

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

For more information, see section Digital I/O and fieldbus

items.

21.6.3

Tool bus

Parameter
number

Parameter name

A310

GPIO

A311

ST selector

A312

ST scanner

A313

Internal ST selector

A314

TLS ST Tool Tag

A315

Tool control box

21.6.4

Description

Button. Opens a window for setting TCB parameters.

Printer

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

A400

Brand

With parameter printer type the printer is selected.

Options are: IBM, HP and Epson.

IBM

A401

Paper size

With parameter paper size the paper format is selected.

Options are: A4, US Letter or Printer roll.

A4

A402

Continuous print

With this parameter selected, the results after each

tightening are automatically sent to the printer port.

No

A403

Trace with angle

offset

Used when printing a trace from the controller printer port. No

A404

New page at Job

done

With A402 Continuous print and this parameter selected,

each new job is printed on a new page.

A405

Include C311 P402 Adds an extra header containing Channel name, Pset name
VIN
and VIN to the beginning of each batch.

9836 3123 01

No

413

Parameter list

21.7

Sync

21.7.1

Programming
N
e!ot

Sync programming options are only available if the controller is a Sync reference.
Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

S100

Sync group list

Create a Sync group list by selecting available PF units.

S101

Tightening strategy Defines strategy to use for Sync tightening.

State Sync
Available options: Stage and SynchroTork
SynchroTork allows continuous Synchronization of up to six spindles
during final tightening. This will improve assembly quality in the
joints where an even clamp force build-up is critical, such as in U-bolt
applications. The torque difference between the spindles is minimized
during the tightening stage by adjusting the individual speeds.
Synchronization of the tools is assured through high-speed
communication via the proprietary Power Focus accessory bus. It
should be noted that this function does not eliminate the need for a
reaction bar, or similar, in higher-torque applications

Default setup

N
e!ot

Option SynchroTork is only available for PF 4000.

SynchroTork is not applicable for angle and DS control strategies.
S102

Loosening strategy Normal/Sync loosening. Sync loosening is a safety feature that makes Normal
all spindles sense torque before loosening starts. Normal means that
all spindles are loosening with full speed and power.

S103

Continue if Sync
failed

Yes/No. If this option is selected the Sync group is allowed to continue No

tightening with the Sync members that reached the first target value
in time. The spindles that did not reach the first target value in time
are disabled. Only valid for two stage tightenings.

S104

Sync OK time

Used together with continue if Sync failed and defines the time that 2
the spindles in the Sync group wait, after reaching the first target value,
for all spindles to reach the same status. If this time limit is exceeded,
the Sync tightening continues without the spindles that did not reach
the first target in time.
Permitted values are between 0 and 13 seconds.

414

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

21.8

Identifier

21.8.1

Identifier setup

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default setup

I100

Input source

Defines what source is accepted when an identifier from Type 1

is read.
Options: Off, Scanner, Fieldbus, Ethernet/Serial, Ethernet/Serial
& scanner, ST scanner, Scanner & Fieldbus, All.

List menu

I101

Significant
positions

A string of integers that tells PF which positions to look at in the

VIN.

I102

Significant strings A table that matches each filtered string from VIN to a Pset or Job
number.

I103

Send identifier

I104

Significant
TA string of integers that tells the controller which positions in
positions for Result the scanned barcode that are considered for result part A.
Part 1

I105

Belongs to Type

An integer that tells which ID type result part A belongs to.

I107

Length

Length of the incoming identifier string.

Input menu

I180

Identifier work
order

Defines in which order different Identifier types are entered

I181

Tool locked during If selected, the tool is locked until the work order is completed.
work order

I183

Reset all identifiers If selected, all identifiers (in the work order) for the selected Pset 0
at Pset batch done are deleted at batch done and the work order needs to be recreated
for the next Pset. If not selected, usually only one identifier type
needs to be changed (in the work order) for the next Pset.

I184

Ignore Identical
Work Orders

9836 3123 01

Makes it possible to send a 100 character long identifier to the

controller.

If selected, all Work Orders that are repetetive will be discarded

Input menu

415

Parameter list

21.9

Fieldbus

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

F100

FieldBus type

This parameter must be selected first. It includes the types;

DeviceNet, ProfiBus-DP, InterBus, ModBusPlus,
ModBus/TCP, ControlNet, Ethernet/IP, Profinet-IO, FLnet, and InterBus 2Mb.
If there is no fieldbus configuration inside the controller
when open fieldbus icon or read from PF, None will be
shown in the setup . If Offline programming is used, None
is selected when you start. If there is no fieldbus card
installed in the controller, fieldbus programming only works
in Offline mode.

F102

From PF
DataLength

From PF DataLength F102 is the total length in bytes of

the data string sent from the controller to the PLC. The
lengths must be the same as defined in the PLC. Because
swap bytes are needed for some fieldbus type, only even
numbers should be programmed (2, 4, 8, 10, etc). Data
length should be a number higher than zero.
The maximum length that can be programmed is different
for each fieldbus type.

Default value

N
e!ot

If InterBus is used the controller unit has to be restarted

when the data length is changed.
F103

To PF DataLength To PF DataLength is the total length of the data string send

from the PLC to the controller. The length must be the same
as defined in the PLC. Because swap bytes are needed for
some fieldbus types, only even numbers should be
programmed (2, 4, 8, 10, etc). Data length should be a
number higher than zero.
The maximum length that can be programmed is different
for each fieldbus type.
N
e!ot

If InterBus is used the controller unit has to be restarted

when the data length is changed.
F104

From PF Global
DataLength

From PF Global DataLength is the length of sending

broadcast data to the network. This is a special function for
ModBusPlus, not available for other fieldbus types. Max
length = 64 bytes. If only point-to-point data is transferred,
set this parameter to zero.
N
e!ot

From PF Datalength - From PF Global Datalength = From

PF point-to-point DataLength (which is only available in
ModBusPlus).

416

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

Parameter
number
F105

Parameter name

Description

Default value

To PF Global
DataLength

To PF Global DataLength is the length of receiving

broadcast data from the network. This is a special function
for ModBusPlus, not available for other fieldbus types. Max
length = 64 bytes. If only point-to-point data is received,
set this parameter to zero.
N
e!ot

To PF Datalength - To PF Global Datalength = To PF pointto-point DataLength (which is only available in

ModBusPlus).
F106

From PF data
offset

The FL-net memory area 2 for cyclic data transfer is 8192

words. This area is shared by all nodes in the network. Each
node configures the part of the area it will update. "From
PF data offset" is the start address for data from PF.

F107

To PF data offset

The FL-net memory area 2 for cyclic data transfer is 8192

words. This area is shared by all nodes in the network. Each
node configures the part of the area it will update. To PF
data offset is the start address for data to PF.

F110

Set node address

Some buses can use a SW-configured node address and
and baudrate from baud rate. This parameter has two selections:
Software: Makes it possible to program node address and
baud rate from user interface.
Hardware: Node address and baud rate is configured with
the switches on the fieldbus card.
N
e!ot

Normally the switches on the fieldbus card must be set in

a specific way to enable these parameters from ToolsTalk.
F111

FB node address

This parameter specifies the network ID number used in

the fieldbus system. You can set the node address if the
selected fieldbus type has this feature. Two units in the
same fieldbus network cannot have the same node address.
Valid for DeviceNet (0-63).

F112

Baudrate

Communication speed on the fieldbus system.

N
e!ot

The baud rate shall be the same in all controller units and
in the PLC.
F113

Connection mode

This parameter manages the way the fieldbus system detects

changes of data on the different units. Some fieldbus types
have the possibility to set different connection modes.
There are three modes; Polled, Bit Strobe and Change of
State.
N
e!ot

9836 3123 01

417

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default value

The settings in the controller and the PLC must be the same.
F120

Set node address

from

Some buses can use a SW-configured node address. This

parameter has two selections:
Software: Makes it possible to program node address from
user interface.
Hardware: Node address is configured with the switches
on the fieldbus card.
N
e!ot

Normally the switches on the fieldbus card must be set in

a specific way to enable these parameters from ToolsTalk
PF.
F121

FB node address

This parameter specifies the network ID number used in

the fieldbus system. Two controllers in the same fieldbus
network cannot have the same node address.
Valid for Profibus-DP (1-124), ModbusPlus (1-99), and
ControlNet (1-64).

F130

PCP length

Provides a way to send longer data strings than the standard

20 bytes process data. The data package that is sent to or
from the controller can be longer than the 20 bytes process
data. The part exceeding the process data is sent in small
packages. The PCP length defines the package length. PCP
data has lower priority than the process data.
Available selections are 0, 1, 2, and 4. These numbers are
the lengths in words. 0 = no PCP.
N
e!ot

The controller unit has to be restarted when the PCP length

is changed. The length must be the same in the PLC.
F131

Process data length Process data length is the first part of the InterBus message.
The length has to be same for both input and output data.
Maximum Process DataLength is 20 bytes minus the PCP
length in bytes. This means that the highest Process string
length is 20 bytes if PCP is zero.
N
e!ot

The controller unit has to be restarted when the Process

data length is changed. The length must be the same in the
PLC.
F140

418

Set Source address ModBusPlus global data exchanges require a source address,
from
which is a node address where to get the global data from.
Software: the node address is set from user interface.
Hardware: the node address only can be set from the
switches on ProfiBus card.

9836 3123 01

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

F141

Source address

Source address is the network ID number used in the

fieldbus system. Set address to get global data from this
source.

F150

IP address

Set an Ethernet connection IP address for fieldbus module,

such as ModBus/TCP, Ethernet/IP, Profinet-IO, FL-Net.

F151

Subnet mask

Set an Ethernet connection Subnet mask for fieldbus

module, such as ModBus/TCP, Ethernet/IP, Profinet-IO.

F152

Gateway

Set an Ethernet connection Gateway for fieldbus module,

such as ModBus/TCP, Ethernet/IP, Profinet-IO.

F155

Device name

A set for Profinet-IO, define a device name and master need

to know the device name to get communicate with it.

F157

Assembly instance Parameter valid only for Ethernet/IP and works only on
Anybus FW 2.xx or later. It makes possible to configure
Anybus card with Assembly Instances as in FW 1.32 or
earlier.
For 0: it is ODVA compatible, 1: FW 1.32 compatible
(Listen-only 4, Input-only 3)

F160

Virtual fieldbus

This is a choice to make a virtual fieldbus. One virtual

master can have four virtual members

F161

Virtual from PF
data length

From PF Data length for the virtual member.

F162

Virtual to PF data
length

To PF Data length for the virtual member.

F163

Virtual from PF
data offset

From PF data offset for the virtual member.

F164

Virtual to PF data
offset

To PF data offset for the virtual member.

F170

Station number

CC-Link station number selected by software (1-64). Due

to the selection of this number by software, the rotary
switches for the Station Number on the backplane should
be set to 99.

F171

CC-Link version

Can be set to version 1 or 2.

F172

Reverse Rxy byte

order

For CC-Link it is possible to maintain compatibility with

prior PF versions for byte alignment in Rx/Ry area of
from/to PF space. When selected 'yes' the byte alignment
in Rx/Ry area will be opposite to RWw/RWr area and
backwards compatible. Valid choices: 'yes' or 'no' .

No

9836 3123 01

Default value

419

Parameter list

Parameter
number

Parameter name

Description

Default value

F200

FB update interval If the fieldbus system is heavily loaded it might be necessary 0.10 s
to slow down the update interval in the controller fieldbus
card. If this parameter is set to 0.5 seconds the controller
updates the bus every 0.5 seconds. The average data traffic
must be possible to fit within the programmed interval. If
the traffic has a higher peak load the messages are buffered.
Valid settings range from 0.05 to 10 seconds.

F210

Tool stop at offline If the fieldbus system goes down or the controller goes
offline it might be necessary to stop running tool for safety
purpose.
No tool stop: does not stop running tool
Tool stop - fieldbus start: stops running tool if tool start
select source is fieldbus.

F220

Read result
handshake

If selected, the result is not sent until the PLC sends the
read command. To enable this function,
ReadResultHandshake in To PF Setup, and
ReadResultHandshakeAck and SentTighteningId in From
PF setup have to be added in the bitmap.

F300

Bitmap select

This parameter makes it possible to view the bitmap in the

same way in the controller and the PLC configuration
software. It defines if byte 0 or byte 1 shall be to the left.
Default settings are the type that is common for the selected
fieldbus type.
For DeviceNet, Intel Endian must be used. For ProfiBus,
Motorola Endian must be used.

420

9836 3123 01

Event codes

22

Event codes

22.1

Introduction

Event codes are displayed as pop up windows to inform users of the status of controller All events are stored
in the Statistics event log or the General event log, depending on the event code type. The number of events
that can be stored in the log depends on memory configuration (see section Memory). Once the log is full,
the oldest events will be overwritten by the most recent ones.
There are three severity levels defined for the events. The characteristics for each one are:

Info: Events that only informs the user of some activity, for example PF Started.
PF4000 Graph: White background
ToolsTalk: Info symbol
Warning: Events that may indicate unexpected behaviour, for example Torque high.
PF4000 Graph: Yellow background
ToolsTalk: Warning symbol
Error: Severe errors in the system or events that indicates a failure of some sort. Almost all events with
this severity level needs to be acknowledged, for example Current limit reached.

PF4000 Graph: Red background

ToolsTalk: Error symbol

9836 3123 01

421

Event codes

To open the event log, click Get Event Log

in the Options list.
The Event Log window appears.
Click Clear to delete all events in the log.
Click Save to file to store the event log as a
text file.
Click Open in Excel to export the log to
Microsoft Excel .
Click Read to update status of the event code
window.
When option Automatic update is checked,
the events in the log are shown directly when
they appear.

The event codes are logged with four integer parameters shown in the Control column. For some event
codes, these parameters are used to store extra information about the event.
422

9836 3123 01

Event codes

As default, all events are displayed and logged.

It is possible to configure the controller to show or log selected events only.
Open Controller>Configuration>Events and click the Event button to open the Controller Events
window.
Select Log to log the event in the PF Statistic or General event log.
Select Show to display the event in the controller and ToolsTalk interfaces.

The Statistic and General event log can also

be cleared from the system setup branch.
Open Controller>Memory and click Reset
general event log and/or Reset statistical
event log. Confirm the command in the popup window.

9836 3123 01

423

Event codes

22.2

Event code list

The event codes are listed with number, name, description and a procedure to clear the event. The Acknowledge
(ACK) column indicates that the event has to be acknowledged before proceeding. An 'X' in the columns
for Cntrl (Controller) ready and Tool ready indicate that the relay and corresponding fieldbus item are affected,
and that an action (described under 'Procedure') has to be taken before proceeding.
Before any work is performed, ensure that the safety instructions for the controller and the tool have been
read and understood. Note that some of the procedures described only can be performed by an Atlas Copco
authorized service provider. See also the Product Instruction for the controller and the tool.
The events are grouped according to the table below.
Event code

Group

Description

E001-E099

Rundown failures

E100-E199

Event related errors

E200-E299

User input events

E300-E399

Statistical events

E400-E499

Communication events

E500-E599

Hardware events (tool)

E600-E699

Hardware events

E700-E799

Hardware events

E800-E899

Software events

E900-E999

Events MMI

22.2.1
Event
Code

E001-E099 Rundown failures

Event name

Description

E003

Torque measurement possibly

invalid

The programming is incorrect Check the programming for the

as no movement is possible in Pset.
the second stage.
Ensure that there is some
movement in the second stage.

E050

Tool calculation error

Calculation error in the tool.

The results are not reliable.

E051

Tool communication error

Communication error between

tool and controller.

424

Procedure

Cntrl
A C K ready

9836 3123 01

Tool
ready

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

E052

Sensor mechanical error

Sensor wheel mechanical error.

Replace tool.

E053

Sensor signal error

Angular sensor signal fault. If

frequent contact service.

22.2.1.1

Procedure

Cntrl
A C K ready
X

TCB and hose related errors (Pulsor C only)

Event
Code

Event name

Description

E060

Air hose test failed

The air hose test may fail due

to a number of reasons, for
example: tool rotates during air
hose test, no air hose connected
to the inlet of the TCB, the
hose between TCB and tool is
not connected to TCB, no/too
low air pressure to TCB etc.
Air hose test should be
reperformed when issue is
solved.

E061

Air hose length error

Air hose test indicates that the

hose is too long.

E066

Tool control box disconnected

Tool control box disconnected

or not responding.

E067

Tool control box air shutoff error Air hose not connected TCB>tool or TCB unable to shut off
air. Check that the tool hose is
fit between the TCB and tool.
The tool must only be
connected directly to the tool
air outlet on the TCB.

E068

Tool control box wrong model

The TCB model connected is

not supported by this software
configuration.

E069

Tool Control Box pressure error

Check that the TCB is

receiving the correct pressure
input (dynamic) and check all
the hose connections to the
TCB and the tool. If all seems
OK, and the problem prevails
after a restart, the TCB should
be serviced.

9836 3123 01

Tool
ready

Procedure

ACK

Tool
Cntrlready ready

425

Event codes

22.2.2
Event
Code

E100-E199 Event related errors

Event name

Description

Procedure

ACK

Cntrl Tool
ready ready

E102

Rundown prohibited due to Lock An attempt to make a

on Reject
tightening is made and
tightenings are disabled by the
parameter C210 Lock on reject
because the result was not OK.
Additional parameter
information:
First integer parameter:
0=Locked during tightening,
1=locked during loosening
Second integer parameter
0=Service denied, 1=service
aborted

Depending on C210 Lock on reject

configuration, either unlock the tool
by the direction ring or by digital
input Unlock tool or Master unlock
tool.
If applicable, reconfigure C210
Lock on reject .

E103

Tool locked by digital input

One or several of the digital

input functions lock the tool:
Tool disable, Tool tightening
disable, Tool loosening
disable.
Additional parameter
information:
First integer parameter:
0=Locked during tightening,
1=locked during loosening
Second integer parameter
0=Service denied, 1=service
aborted.

Unlock the tool with one of the

following digital input functions:
Tool disable, Tool tightening
disable, Tool loosening disable
Note: Unlock tool or Master unlock
tool will not act as unlock trigger.

E107

Rundown prohibited due to Line

Control, batch not enabled

A Job using line control is

selected with parameter Use
J330 line control. The Job does
not start until a line control
start signal is received from
digital input function Line
control start signal.
Additional parameter
information:
First integer parameter:
0=Locked during tightening,
1=locked during loosening
Second integer parameter
0=Service denied, 1=service
aborted.

Unlock the tool with one of the

following digital input functions:
Line control start signal, Job abort
or Master unlock tool.

426

9836 3123 01

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

Procedure

E112

Rehit

An attempt to tighten an
already tightened bolt was
made.

For information only.

E113

Current limit reached - Rundown The current limit has been

Acknowledge the event.
X
aborted
reached, the drive is disabled. Perform a motor tuning.
Tool>Maintenance>Motor tuning.

E117

Tool locked - cannot access RBU The controller cannot

communicate with RBU. The
controller must be restarted to
protect data.
Additional parameter
information:
First integer parameter:
0=Locked during tightening,
1=locked during loosening
Second integer parameter
0=Service denied, 1=service
aborted.

Acknowledge the event.

X
Turn off the controller and check
that the RBU is correctly connected.
Reboot the controller.

E120

Motor tuning failure

The connection between the

tool and the controller is
incorrect or faulty, or the
remote start connector is
missing or incorrectly wired.
See also subinformation in
chap 22.3.1.

Acknowledge the event. Check that X

the remote start connector on the
controller is present and correctly
wired.
Check that the tool cable and
connectors are undamaged and
correctly connected.
Service the tool.

E121

Open end tuning failure

This event indicates that the

Open end tuning command has
not been successfully
performed.

Acknowledge the event.

X
Check that the remote start
connector on the controller is
present and correctly wired.
Verify that parameters T421-T422
match the geometry of the attached
OE head.
Check that the mechanical stop is
undamaged and working properly.

E122

Open end positioning failure

Open end positioning failed

Remove the tool from the joint.
due to too much torque during Restart the positioning.
positioning phase.

E125

Alarm on timeout / Alarm on

torque lost

This event is issued when

parameter P246 Alarm on end
time shutoff is activated and the
time defined in P141 End time

9836 3123 01

ACK

Cntrl Tool
ready ready

Redo the tightening.

If the event reappears, set P141 End
time to a higher value or set P246
Alarm on end time shutoff to No.

427

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

Procedure

ACK

Cntrl Tool
ready ready

is exceeded before final torque

is reached.
The reason can be that the tool
has slipped off the joint, for
example.
E126

Multistage aborted

This event indicates that the

current running Multistage has
not been performed entirely
(the drive has been shut off or
the tool trigger was released
before the end).

E127

PVT shut off

This event indicates that the

In the Trace monitor, check the
drive was shut off in the
result and change the settings
selftap or prevail phase of the accordingly.
rundown, or the compensate
conditions were not fulfilled.

E128

Trigger lost

When the function Trigger lost For information only.

is activated in the Pset, this
event indicates that the trigger
of the tool was released before
final target.

E129

Torque lower than target

When the function torque

lower than target is activated
in the Pset, this event indicates
that the torque result is below
final target. The torque status
is NOK even if the torque
result was larger than final
torque min.

For information only.

Note: Check also E128 to see if
E129 is issued because the trigger
was released before final target.

E130

Post view torque shut off

Post view torque conditions

were not fulfilled.

In the Trace monitor, check the

result and change the settings
accordingly.

E131

Tool Disconnected

This event code is generated

when the tool is disconnected
(logically or physically) from
the controller. The event code
is also generated when an
attempt to start a disconnected

Acknowledge the event. If the tool X

has been logically disconnected,
disconnect physically also.
Note: The tool can be logically
disconnected if the user requests
disconnection or if the open end
settings are modified.

428

Check the additional information to

see which events occurred.
Follow the procedure for those
events.
If the second parameter in the sub
information is zero (no event is
indicated), activate P244 Alarm on
lost trigger and P246 Alarm on end
time shutoff in the stage in which
the multistage was aborted.

9836 3123 01

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

Procedure

ACK

Cntrl Tool
ready ready

(logically or electrically) tool

is done.
For Pulsor, the tool may be
disconnected from the Tool
Control Box and/or the Tool
Control Box is disconnected
from the controller.
Additional parameter
information:
First integer parameter:
0=locked during tightening,
1=locked during loosening,
2=locked during positioning,
3=locked during motor tuning,
4=locked during open end
tuning.
Second integer parameter
0=Service denied, 1=service
aborted.
A damaged cable can result
in a disconnected tool.

E132

Wrong tool start input setting

T200 Tool start select source

is not corresponding to the

remote start jumper position.

Acknowledge the event.

X
Check the wiring of the remote start
connector.
Verify that the tool trigger is not
pressed during hot swap or system
start-up.

E133

Tool locked by Tools Talk

The tool is prohibited via

Unlock the tool by
ToolsTalk.
sending an Enable tool
Additional parameter
message via ToolsTalk protocol
information:
or
First integer parameter:
using digital input Master
0=locked during tightening,
unlock tool.
1=locked during loosening,
2=locked during positioning,
3=locked during motor tuning,
4=locked during open end
tuning.
Second integer parameter
0=Service denied, 1=service
aborted.

E136

Tool locked by batch OK

This event code is displayed if Unlock the tool by

the tool is locked by the
using the digital inputs Unlock
function P152 Lock at batch
tool or Master unlock tool or
OK..

9836 3123 01

429

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description
Additional parameter
information:
First integer parameter:
0=locked during tightening,
1=locked during loosening,
2=locked during positioning,
3=locked during motor tuning,
4=locked during open end
tuning.
Second integer parameter
0=Service denied, 1=service
aborted.

Procedure

Cntrl Tool
ready ready

sending an Enable tool

message on fieldbus, Open
protocol or ToolsTalk protocol.

E137

Tool locked by fieldbus

The tool is locked by FieldBus. Unlock the tool by

Additional parameter
sending an Enable tool
information:
message via fieldbus or
First integer parameter:
using the digital input Master
0=locked during tightening,
unlock tool.
1=locked during loosening,
2=locked during positioning,
3=locked during motor tuning,
4=locked during open end
tuning.
Second integer parameter
0=Service denied, 1=service
aborted.

E138

Wrong tool start input source

It is only possible to start the

tool from selected tool start
select source.

E139

Tool locked by Open protocol

The tool is locked by open

Unlock the tool by
protocol user.
sending an Enable tool
Additional parameter
message via Open protocol or
information:
using the digital input Master
First integer parameter:
unlock tool.
0=locked during tightening,
1=locked during loosening,
2=locked during positioning,
3=locked during motor tuning,
4=locked during open end
tuning.
Second integer parameter
0=Service denied, 1=service
aborted.

430

ACK

Check the setting for T200 Tool

start select source.
X

9836 3123 01

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

Procedure

ACK

Cntrl Tool
ready ready

E140

Insert user ID card to release tool The tool is locked; the user
Insert a valid ID card.
must insert his ID card in the
card reader to release the tool.
Additional parameter
information:
First integer parameter:
0=locked during tightening,
1=locked during loosening,
2=locked during positioning,
3=locked during motor tuning,
4=locked during open end
tuning.
Second integer parameter
0=Service denied, 1=service
aborted.

E141

Tool locked during work order

Multiple identifiers; tool is

locked during work order. Tool
will be unlocked when all
expected identifiers have been
received in correct order.

E143

Tool locked by system

The controller has detected a Usually this is an operator error.

serious condition and needs to Check configuration in the
lock the tool.
controller.

E145

Tool locked by Timer enable tool The tool is locked by digital

input Timer enable tool when
the Job was not started within
the time set in J320 Max time
to start Job.

Unlock the tool with digital input

Timer enable tool.
If applicable, set J320 Max time to
start Job to a higher value.

E146

No tool cable detected

Ensure that the tool cable is

correctly connected and without
damage.
Replace the cable.

9836 3123 01

Incorrect or damaged cable.

Check the work order settings in the

Options dialog in the Identifier
branch.
Scan the identifiers in the correct
work order without pushing the
trigger.
Unlock the tool by
Restoring of identifier configuration
is done
Reset all identifiers command is
performed via digital input, open
protocol or identifier monitor
Reset latest identifier command is
performed after the first type in the
work order is accepted.
X

431

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

Procedure

ACK

Cntrl Tool
ready ready

E147

Tool locked by click wrench Pset A Pset with click wrench

Use the correct combination of tool
tightening strategy is selected and Pset.
for a tool.
Additional parameter
information:
First integer parameter:
0=Locked during tightening,
1=locked during loosening
Second integer parameter
0=Service denied, 1=service
aborted.

E149

Tool locked disable loosening at

OK

The function C220 Disable

loosening at OK has locked the
tool.
Additional parameter
information:
First integer parameter:
1=locked during loosening
Second integer parameter
0=Service denied, 1=service
aborted.

Unlock the tool by selecting

forward on the tool, or by digital
input Master unlock tool.
Continue tightening.

E150

Job client does not respond

When running a Cell Job, this

event is displayed by the Job
master when one of the Job
members does not respond.
The first parameter contains
Channel ID number [C105] for
the Job client that does not
respond.
The second, third and fourth
parameters are not used.

Check which controller in the Cell

that is not responding.
Check the cables and connections
between the Cell member and the
Cell reference.
Check that the IP addresses in the
Cell group are correct.
Check that IP addresses within the
Cell is not used by someone else.

E151

Job in OFF mode

It is not possible to select a

In the Job monitor, clear the Job off
new Job. The controller in Job check box.
OFF mode.
Select new Job.

E152

PF locked in job mode

Conditions within the job

Activate the controller.
functionality have locked the If possible, disable J302 Lock at Job
tool. E.g. due to not currently done.
active tool in or after job
sequence, or tool not enabled
after job selection etc.
Additional parameter
information:
First integer parameter:
0=locked during tightening

432

9836 3123 01

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

Procedure

ACK

Cntrl Tool
ready ready

Second integer parameter

0=Service denied, 1=service
aborted.
E153

Not Ok to select new job

A Job must be completed or Finish running the present Job.

aborted before selecting a new If needed, abort running Job or
Job. A Job must be selected on select new Job on Job master.
a Job master.

E154

Remote job running

When running a Cell Job, this For information only.

is displayed by the Job
members when a cell Job is
selected on the Job reference.

E155

Remote job aborted

When running a Cell Job, this For information only.

is displayed by the Job
members when a cell Job is
aborted.

E156

Job members lost

When running a Cell Job, this

is displayed by the Job
reference when it has lost
contact with one of the Job
members.
Additional parameter
information:
The first integer parameter
indicates the channel ID for the
lost Job client.

Check cables and connections to

the lost Job client.
In the Controller menu of the lost
Job client, open Network and check
that the Job reference IP-address is
correct, and that the Job member is
part of the same cell as the Job
reference.
In the Job menu of the Job
reference, check that the all PFs are
present in the Job list.

E157

Job reference lost

When running a Cell Job, this

is displayed by the Job
members when they have lost
contact with their Job
reference.

Check cables and connections to

the Job reference.
In the Controller menu, check the
network settings for the Job
reference and the Job clients. All
Job clients and the Job reference
must belong to the same cell.

E158

Invalid Job ID

When the selected Job does not In the Job reference, open the PF
exist.
Map and check the ID of all defined
Jobs.

E159

No Pset In Selected Job

When the selected Job does not In the Job reference, open PF Map
contain any Pset.
> Job, and double-click the selected
Job. Add the correct Psets and store
the settings.

E160

Job select source not valid

Attempt to select a Job with

the wrong input source.

9836 3123 01

In the Job reference PF Map, open

Controller>Configuration.

433

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

Procedure

ACK

Cntrl Tool
ready ready

In the Select source view, check the

settings for C201 Job.
E161

Line Control Alert 1

The line control has been

For information only.
activated, and the first control
alert limit has been reached.

E162

Line Control Alert 2

The line control has been

activated, and the second
control alert limit has been
reached.

E166

Job aborted

Job has been aborted.

For information only.
Additional parameter
information.
First integer parameter:
2 Digital input
3 Ethernet/serial (PC
5 Field bus
6 Keyboard
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
9 Manual mode (the current
active job is aborted and a new
job becomes active when
selected from digital input)
10 Timer 1 (max time to start
job)
11 Timer 2 (max time to
complete job)
12 Deleted (a pending job is
deleted from PF database)
13 Job off mode
14 Line control Alarm 2
15 Job override

E167

Max coherent Not OK tightenings When the number of NOT OK For information only.
reached
tightenings in a row is reached,
then the tool will be locked
and can be unlocked only via
a digital input (reset NOK
counter).

E168

ST scanner settings not production Issued at ST scanner power-on For information only.
default
if scan engine settings are not
the same as production
defaults.

434

For information only.

9836 3123 01

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

Procedure

E169

ST scanner settings not at highest Issued at ST scanner power-on For information only.
security level
if scan engine settings are not
at the highest security level.

E175

Configuration will be erased at

next reboot

The controller will erase the Accept or reject the memory reconfiguration in the controller configuration.
memory and the RBU since the
memory setup has been
changed.

E177

Functionality not in RBU

The user is trying to use

functionality that is not
enabled in the RBU.

Replace the RBU or use another

functionality.

E178

Memory allocation error

The user is trying to allocate

more memory than exists in
the controller.

Check settings for Controller >

Memory.
Decrease the number of results,
Psets or Jobs until the memory
usage is below 100%.

E179

Totally configurable memory

needed

Not possible to configure this Save the controller configuration to

functionality without function file.
"totally configurable memory Open Controller > Memory.
C600 Memory type must be set to
Totally configurable memory.
Reboot controller, the controller
memory is remapped and erased.
Reload the configuration without
the memory settings.

E180

Euchner Ident System only

The protocol settings for the
supports Siemens 3964R protocol serial COM port 1 is not set to
3964R, it is not possible to use
the Euchner Ident System with
this configuration.

E181

Not possible to read ID card

It was not possible to read the

ID card inserted in the Euchner
system

E182

Pulse filter condition detected

Pulse filter is tagged during

Monitoring setup when the
pulse filter is inactivated.

E183

Tightening data timeout

Maximum tightening time

exceeded. Maximum time is
set in Cycle abort timer
(P144), default is 30 seconds.

9836 3123 01

ACK

Cntrl Tool
ready ready

435

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

E184

Tightening with a Pset without a

Tool Setup

A tightening has been

performed with a Pset without
a Tool Setup.

E186

Relative torque variation high in

Monitoring setup

Monitoring Setup has relative

torque variation outside the
interval 85% - 115%.

E187

Target torque and measured torque Information: the measured

differs more than 5%.
torque differs more than 5 %
from the target torque.

E188

Tool torque and measured torque Warning: the measured torque

differs more than 15%.
differs more than 15 % from
the tool torque. Consider remeasuring.

E189

Monitoring setup pulse limit

exceeded

The tightening has more than

300 pulses and will be
truncated.

E190

Wrong ST scan source

Attempt to scan from wrong

source.

E191

ST scanner overheated

The ST scanner temperature Disconnect the tool.

has exceeded max temperature. Let the scanner cool for 15 minutes.

E192

Air pressure sensor error

Tool pressure sensor reading

is not normal. The cause of this
may be technical problems
with the sensor or a bad air
sensor tuning. Air sensor
tuning is performed by Atlas
Copco Tools service
personnel.

E193

Too many tightenings performed

in Monitoring setup

More than the maximum 50

tightenings have been
performed in Monitoring
Setup. Further results will be
discarded.

E194

Setup aborted due to exchange of The tool was exchanged during

tool
Tool Setup or Monitoring
Setup.

436

Procedure

ACK

Cntrl Tool
ready ready
X

Open PF Map > Accessories >

Tool bus and double click
Configuration.
In the Tool bus configuration dialog
box, click ST scanner.
Ensure that the Scanner source item
list selection is applicable.

9836 3123 01

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

E195

Monitoring setup contains invalid Monitoring Setup contains

tightening parameter
tightenings with invalid result
for one or more parameter.

E196

Spin error

Sometimes the tool has pulses

which are not distinct enough
to be measured. If this happens
at the pulse where the system
shuts off, it is probably due to
lack of oil in the pulse unit.
Check oil level according to
tool instruction manual
(product information).

E197

Target torque not reached within

pulse count shutoff limit

Tightening was aborted

because the number of pulses
has exceeded the specified
max number of pulses in a
tightening. This limit can be
changed by editing parameter
P690, Pulse Count Shutoff
Limit.

E198

Start final angle exceeded

The second pulse exceeded the

start final angle value with
more than 20% during tool
setup. There is a risk that the
angle measurement will not be
correct.

E199

Not possible to store Reference

Trace

If You try to store the

Reference Trace (In Multiple
Traces menu), but it does not
exist anymore.

22.2.3

Procedure

Cntrl Tool
ready ready

Make new tightenings and find a

new Reference Trace and press
store again.

E200-E299 User input events

Event
Code

Event name

Description

E206

Pset number invalid

An attempt was made to do a

Check parameter C200 Pset and
tightening with the wrong Pset. select a Pset from the correct
Additional parameter
source.
information:
First integer parameter:
0=Locked during tightening,
1=locked during loosening

9836 3123 01

ACK

Procedure

ACK

Cntrl Tool
ready ready
X

437

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

Procedure

ACK

Cntrl Tool
ready ready

Second integer parameter

0=Service denied, 1=service
aborted.
E207

Wrong Pset Select Source

Attempt to select Pset from a

Check parameter C200 Pset and
source not specified in the Cset select a Pset from the correct
(Pset select source, C200).
source.

E208

Not Ok to select new Pset

It is not allowed to select new

Pset when a Pset is already
autoselected by Job.

Proceed in the Job order until

the Job is finished.
To select a new Job or Pset;
Select C202 Job override, select
new Job, or select Job off.

E209

Pset configuration updated

The configuration of the Pset

has been changed.

For information only.

E210

Identifier source disabled

An Identifier source is disabled. Switch back to Automatic Mode

All Identifiers sent by a disabled to enable the Identifier source.
source are discarded.

E211

Wrong Identifier input source

Wrong input source for an

identifier string.

E212

Pset/Multistage stored

Event displayed every time a

For information only.
Pset or Multistage is stored or
restored.
Additional parameter
information:
First integer parameter: Pset or
Multistage number
Second integer parameter
0=Pset, 1=Multistage

E213

Pset number not present

An attempt to start a Job

Choose correct Job or reprogram
containing a Pset not present in the Job.
the controller has been
performed.

E220

Fastener broken

Displayed if fastener (screw or Ensure that more than one

nut) breaks during yield control. comparison is obtained before
yield is reached.
In ToolsTalk, open the trace
monitor and analyze the
tightening.
Change the applicable
parameter.

438

Open Identifier>Type setup and

check that the input source is
correct.
Scan the identifier string.

9836 3123 01

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

E221

Too few samples for yield control Too few samples for mean
torque calculation in yield
algorithm.

E222

Soft start angle torque max

reached

P271 Soft start angle torque max

First target angle max reached

P273 First target angle max was

E223

Procedure

ACK

Cntrl Tool
ready ready

Increase parameter P262

Window angle or reduce speed
during yield control.

was exceeded.
exceeded.

E233

Final Target range error

This event code is displayed

when an attempt is made to
tighten with a final target out of
range (larger than tool max
torque or 9999).
Additional parameter
information:
First parameter: Pset number
Second parameter: Parameter
number with an incorrect value
Third parameter: Parameter in
second integer is dependent on
this parameter
Fourth parameter: Parameter in
second integer violates this
limit.

Change the value for Final

Target to a value within tool
limits.
Store and try again.

E234

Start final angle range error

This event code is displayed

when an attempt is made to
tighten with a P120 Start final
angle out of range.
First parameter: Pset number
Second parameter: Parameter
number with an incorrect value
Third parameter: Parameter in
second integer is dependent on
this parameter
Fourth parameter: Parameter in
second integer violates this
limit.

Change the value for P120 Start

Final Angle to a value within tool
limits.
Store and try again.

E235

Incompatible system
configuration

Some configurations are not

Usually this is an operator error. X
compatible. Some combinations Check configuration in
of devices, tools and accessories controller.
can not be configured.

9836 3123 01

439

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

E236

Configuration set inconsistent

This event code is displayed if Acknowledge the event.

X
one device on the I/O bus has Ensure that the ID and the type
the correct ID but incorrect type of I/O device are the same.
specified (for example a Selector
is connected and an RE-Alarm
is configured).
Additional parameter
information:
First integer parameter: Number
of I/O device with configuration
problems.
Second integer parameter 2=I/Oexpander or Operator panel,
3=RE-alarm, 5=Four-position
socket selector, 6=Eight-position
socket selector.

E237

Strategy configuration error

No valid control strategy was

chosen for the stored Pset.
Additional parameter
information:
First parameter: Pset number
Second parameter: Parameter
number with an incorrect value
Third parameter: Parameter in
second integer is dependent on
this parameter
Fourth parameter: Parameter in
second integer violates this
limit.

Change control strategy valid

for used tool.
Check that the Pset parameters
are correct and store the Pset.

E238

Not possible to run a Multistage

with a Click Wrench Pset

An attempt was made to perform

a Multistage tightening
containing at least one Pset with
a click wrench strategy.

Open the Multistage.

Remove the click wrench Pset.
Add an applicable Pset and store
the settings.

E239

Serial number missing

Tightening and loosening

prohibited due to missing
serialnumber

E240

Password incorrect input source

The password is entered from

an invalid source according to
the configuration.

E250

Max time for first tightening run This message is displayed and
out (job)
the Job is terminated if the first
tightening is not performed
within the specified time.

440

Procedure

ACK

Cntrl Tool
ready ready
X

TNR

Enter the password from

ToolsTalk or change parameter
C801 Entry.
If needed, open PF Map > Job
> Timer and change the
parameter J320 Maxtime to start
Job, or set to 0 to shut off timer.
Store Job and try again.

9836 3123 01

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

Procedure

E251

Max time to complete Job run out This message is displayed and
the Job aborted if it is not
completed within the specified
time.

E260

Number of tightenings in
Monitoring Setup below the
recommended

E281

Identifier not accepted, the length The length of the incoming

is not correct.
barcode string is wrong.

Open PF Map > Identifier and

check that the string Length
matches the scanned string, and
that the scanned string does not
exceed 100 characters.

E282

Identifier not accepted, does not

match any type

The incoming barcode string

does not match any type.

Open PF Map > Identifier and

check Input source, string
Length and Significant position
are correctly configured.

E285

Bypass Identifier not possible

The Type 1 identifier can not be Open PF Map > Identifier and
bypassed when an optional Type remove optional Type if not
exists.
used.

E286

Reset Identifier not possible

Reset latest identifier is not

Use digital input Reset all
possible when a complete Work identifiers.
Order has been accepted.

E287

All Result Parts can not be stored All Result Parts can not be
stored.

9836 3123 01

ACK

Cntrl Tool
ready ready

If needed, open PF Map > Job

> Timer and change the
parameter J321 Maxtime to
complete Job, or set to 0 to shut
off timer.
Store Job and try again.

A Monitoring Setup with fewer

tightenings than recommended
has been performed. The
recommendation is at least ten
tightenings.

Make sure that the Job Master

and all of the Job Members have
the same number of Result Parts
in the configuration.
Make sure that the Sync Master
and all of the Sync Members
have the same number of Result
Parts in the configuration.

441

Event codes

22.2.4

E300-E399 Statistical events

Event
Code

Event name

Description

E300

Xucl relative torque

The last subgroup relative torque mean

value is larger than the upper control
limit.

E301

Xlcl relative torque

The last subgroup relative torque mean

value is lower than the lower control
limit.

E302

Rucl relative torque

The last subgroup range relative torque

value is larger than the upper control
limit.

E303

Rlcl relative torque

The last subgroup range relative torque

value is lower than the lower control
limit.

E304

Cp relative torque

The relative torque Cp is lower than 2.

E305

Cpk relative torque

The relative torque Cpk is lower than

1,33

E306

7inc x relative torque

Trend alarm, the subgroup relative

torque mean value has increased 7
times consecutively.

E307

7dec x relative torque

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup

relative torque mean value has
decreased 7 times consecutively.

E308

7inc r relative torque

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup

relative torque range value has
increased 7 times consecutively.

E309

7dec r relative torque

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup

relative torque range value has
decreased 7 times consecutively.

E310

7above x relative torque

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup

relative torque mean value has been
above the average mean value of the
average of the last ten subgroups 7
times consecutively.

E311

7below x relative torque

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup

relative torque mean value has been
below the average mean value of the
average of the last ten subgroups 7
times consecutively.

442

Procedure

9836 3123 01

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

E312

7above r relative torque

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup

relative torque range value has been
above the average range value of the
average of the last ten subgroups 7
times consecutively.

E313

7below r relative torque

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup

relative torque range value has been
below the average range value of the
average of the last ten subgroups 7
times consecutively.

E314

2sigma x relative torque

Trend deviation alarm, the last

subgroup relative torque average is
outside Xrt-bar-bar-2 sigma.

E315

2sigma r relative torque

Trend deviation alarm, the last

subgroup relative torque range average
is outside Rrt-bar-bar-2 sigma.

E316

Xucl line pressure

The last subgroup mean line pressure

value is larger than the upper control
limit.

E317

Xlcl line pressure

The last subgroup mean line pressure

value is lower than the lower control
limit.

E318

Rucl line pressure

The last subgroup range line pressure

value is larger than the upper control
limit.

E319

Rlcl line pressure

The last subgroup range line pressure

value is lower than the lower control
limit.

E320

Cp line pressure

The line pressure Cp is lower than 2.

E321

Cpk line pressure

The line pressure Cpk is lower than

1,33

E322

7inc x line pressure

Trend deviation alarm , the subgroup

line pressure mean value has increased
7 times consecutively.

E323

7dec x line pressure

Trend deviation alarm , the subgroup

line pressure mean value has decreased
7 times consecutively.

9836 3123 01

Procedure

443

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

E324

7inc r line pressure

Trend deviation alarm , the subgroup

line pressure range value has increased
7 times consecutively.

E325

7dec r line pressure

Trend deviation alarm , the subgroup

line pressure range value has decreased
7 times consecutively.

E326

7above x line pressure

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup

line pressure mean value has been
above the average mean value of the
average of the last ten subgroups 7
times consecutively.

E327

7below x line pressure

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup

line pressure mean value has been
below the average mean value of the
average of the last ten subgroups 7
times consecutively.

E328

7above r line pressure

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup

line pressure range value has been
above the average range value of the
average of the last ten subgroups 7
times consecutively.

E329

7below r line pressure

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup

line pressure range value has been
below the average range value of the
average of the last ten subgroups 7
times consecutively.

E330

2sigma x line pressure

Trend deviation alarm, the last

subgroup line average is outside Xlinebar-bar - 2 sigma.

E331

2sigma r line pressure

Trend deviation alarm, the last

subgroup line pressure range average
is outside Rline-bar-bar - 2 sigma.

E333

Not allowed subscription

The requested statistic subscription is Change the subscription.

not allowed. For example it is not
allowed to set an angle statistic
subscription for a Pset using only the
torque control strategy.

E334

No statistic available for this The Pset strategy is not suitable to

Pset
calculate statistics (no strategy is
chosen, click wrench).

444

Procedure

For information only.

9836 3123 01

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

Procedure

E335

Not enough data

Not enough data is available to

calculate the statistic control limits.

Do more tightenings to get enough

data.
Calculation used: nbrofsubgroups *
subgroupsize * (1 + subgroup
frequency)
Check and if necessary change P503
No of subgroups.

E336

Mem alloc fail

It is not possible to allocate enough

Open Controller > Memory and set
memory for the statistic subscription. C600 Type to Totally configurable.
Check settings.

E340

Xucl tq

The last subgroup mean torque value

is larger than the upper control limit.

The statistic events give an indication

of irregularities in the tightening
process.
If needed:
Check the programming.
Check the tool status.
Check the tightening material and joint
components.
Check the work station set-up and
procedure.

E341

Xlcl tq

The last subgroup mean torque value

is lower than the lower control limit.

See E340 Xucl tq

E342

Rucl tq

The last subgroup range torque value

is larger than the upper control limit.

See E340 Xucl tq

E343

Rlcl tq

The last subgroup range torque value

is lower than the lower control limit.

See E340 Xucl tq

E344

Cp tq

The torque Cp is lower than 2.

See E340 Xucl tq

E345

Cpk tq

The torque Cpk is lower than 1,33

See E340 Xucl tq

E346

7inc x tq

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup

torque mean value has increased 7
times consecutively

See E340 Xucl tq

E347

7dec x tq

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup

torque mean value has decreased 7
times consecutively.

See E340 Xucl tq

E348

7inc r tq

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup

torque range value has increased 7
times consecutively.

See E340 Xucl tq

E349

7dec r tq

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup

torque mean value has decreased 7
times consecutively.

See E340 Xucl tq

9836 3123 01

445

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

E350

7above x tq

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup See E340 Xucl tq

torque mean value has been above the
average mean value of the average of
the last ten subgroups 7 times
consecutively.

E351

7below x tq

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup See E340 Xucl tq

torque mean value has been below the
average mean value of the average of
the last ten subgroups 7 times
consecutively.

E352

7above r tq

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup See E340 Xucl tq

torque range value has been above the
average range value of the average of
the last ten subgroups 7 times
consecutively.

E353

7below r tq

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup See E340 Xucl tq

torque range value has been below the
average range value of the average of
the last ten subgroups 7 times
consecutively.

E354

2sigma x tq

Trend deviation alarm, the last

See E340 Xucl tq
subgroup torque average is outside Xrtbar-bar-2 sigma.

E355

2sigma r tq

Trend deviation alarm, the last

subgroup torque range average is
outside Rrt-bar-bar-2 sigma.

E360

Xucl ang

The last subgroup mean angle value is See E340 Xucl tq

larger than the upper control limit.

E361

Xlcl ang

The last subgroup mean angle value is See E340 Xucl tq

lower than the lower control limit.

E362

Rucl ang

The last subgroup range angle value is See E340 Xucl tq

larger than the upper control limit.

E363

Rlcl ang

The last subgroup range angle value is See E340 Xucl tq

lower than the lower control limit.

E364

Cp ang

The angle Cp is lower than 2.

See E340 Xucl tq

E365

Cpk ang

The angle Cpk is lower than 1,33

See E340 Xucl tq

E366

7inc x ang

Trend deviation alarm , the subgroup See E340 Xucl tq

angle mean value has increased 7 times
consecutively.

446

Procedure

See E340 Xucl tq

9836 3123 01

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

Procedure

E367

7dec x ang

Trend deviation alarm , the subgroup

angle mean value has decreased 7
times consecutively.

See E340 Xucl tq

E368

7inc r ang

Trend deviation alarm , the subgroup See E340 Xucl tq

angle range value has increased 7 times
consecutively.

E369

7dec r ang

Trend deviation alarm , the subgroup

angle mean value has decreased 7
times consecutively.

E370

7above x ang

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup See E340 Xucl tq

angle mean value has been above the
average mean value of the average of
the last ten subgroups 7 times
consecutively.

E371

7below x ang

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup See E340 Xucl tq

angle mean value has been below the
average mean value of the average of
the last ten subgroups 7 times
consecutively.

E372

7above r ang

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup See E340 Xucl tq

angle range value has been above the
average range value of the average of
the last ten subgroups 7 times
consecutively.

E373

7below r ang

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup See E340 Xucl tq

angle range value has been below the
average range value of the average of
the last ten subgroups 7 times
consecutively.

E374

2sigma x ang

Trend deviation alarm, the last

subgroup angle average is outside
Xang-bar-bar 2 sigma.

See E340 Xucl tq

E375

2sigma r ang

Trend deviation alarm, the last

subgroup angle range average is
outside Rang-bar-bar 2 sigma.

See E340 Xucl tq

E380

Xucl cm

The last subgroup mean CM value is

larger than the upper control limit.

See E340 Xucl tq

E381

Xlcl cm

The last subgroup mean CM value is

lower than the lower control limit.

See E340 Xucl tq

9836 3123 01

See E340 Xucl tq

447

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

Procedure

E382

Rucl cm

The last subgroup range CM value is

larger than the upper control limit.

See E340 Xucl tq

E383

Rlcl cm

The last subgroup range CM value is

lower than the lower control limit.

See E340 Xucl tq

E384

Cp cm

The CM Cp is lower than 2.

See E340 Xucl tq

E385

Cpk cm

The CM Cpk is lower than 1.33.

See E340 Xucl tq

E386

7inc x cm

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup See E340 Xucl tq

CM mean value has increased 7 times
consecutively.

E387

7dec x cm

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup See E340 Xucl tq

CM mean value has decreased 7 times
consecutively.

E388

7inc r cm

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup See E340 Xucl tq

CM range value has increased 7 times
consecutively.

E389

7dec r cm

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup

torque range value has decreased 7
times consecutively.

E390

7above x cm

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup See E340 Xucl tq

CM mean value has been above the
average mean value of the average of
the latest ten subgroups 7 times
consecutively.

E391

7below x cm

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup See E340 Xucl tq

torque mean value has been below the
average mean value of the average of
the latest ten subgroups 7 times
consecutively.

E392

7above r cm

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup See E340 Xucl tq

CM range value has been above the
average range value of the average of
the latest ten subgroups 7 times
consecutively.

E393

7below r cm

Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup See E340 Xucl tq

CM range value has been below the
average range value of the average of
the latest ten subgroups 7 times
consecutively.

448

See E340 Xucl tq

9836 3123 01

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

E394

2sigma x cm

Trend deviation alarm, the last

See E340 Xucl tq
subgroup CM average is outside XCMbar-bar-2 sigma.

E395

2sigma r cm

Trend deviation alarm, the last

See E340 Xucl tq
subgroup CM range average is outside
RCM-bar-bar-2 sigma.

22.2.5
Event
Code

Procedure

E400-E499Communication events

Event name

Description

Procedure

ACK

Cntrl Tool
ready ready

E401

Duplicate device ID:s on IO bus Two IO devices with the same ID

are present on the I/O Bus.

Acknowledge the event.

X
Make sure that all of the devices on
the bus have a unique ID.

E403

IO device not responding

Check IO cables.
Check the configuration of the
accessories on the IO bus and
compare it with the devices on the
IO bus.

E404

Selector is not connected or not The selector is not properly

responding
connected or the ID of the selector
is not the same as the one
configured.

E405

IO Expander is not connected or The I/O expander is not properly

not responding
connected or the ID of the I/O
expander is not the same as the one
configured.

E406

RE-alarm is not connected or not The Remote alarm is not properly

responding
connected or the ID of the Remote
alarm is not the same as the one
configured.

E407

IO device has invalid ID selected An I/O device has selected ID 0,

On the device, select an ID between X
which is invalid.
1 and 15 (in ToolsTalk) or 1-F (on
Additional parameter information: selector)
First integer parameter: Number of
device not responding.

E417

Too many communication

sessions at one time

9836 3123 01

The I/O device is not properly

connected or the ID of the device is
not the same as the one configured.
Additional parameter information:
First integer parameter: Number of
device not responding.

There are too many connections at Wait until the other sessions are
the same time (ToolsTalk, ToolsNet, done and close their connection.
Operator Panel etc.). The most

449

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

Procedure

ACK

Cntrl Tool
ready ready

common problem is that an external

program allocates all the
communication.
E420

ST Accessory not supported.

A device connected to the ST-bus is Acknowledge the event.

not recognized by the controller.
Upgrade controller software.

E421

Safety trigger not supported by

tool software

The tool software version does not

support safety trigger function.

E433

No RBU present

No RBU detected at start-up or RBU Acknowledge the event.

X
found missing at runtime.
Check that there is an RBU and that
it is connected properly.

E434

RBU Timeout

RBU did not respond to command

from the controller.

Acknowledge the event.

Check that the RBU is connected
properly.
Reboot the controller.
If the event reappears, replace the
RBU

E436

RBU file system warning

RBU file system warning because

of download interruption.

Reboot controller.
If the event reappears, replace the
RBU

E437

RBU file system corrupt

RBU file system fault. An attempt

will be made to repair it by means
of erasing the RBU.

Acknowledge the event.

Reboot controller.
Replace the RBU.

E438

RBU file mismatch

A file with incorrect name or size

was returned to a read request.

Acknowledge the event.

Reboot controller.
Replace the RBU.

E440

RBU no files

RBU file system fault

Acknowledge the event.

Reboot controller.
Replace the RBU.

E441

RBU access too busy

RBU has answered to the poll but Acknowledge the event.

the controller is too busy to receive Reboot controller.
the reply.
Replace the RBU.

E442

RBU no such file

RBU file system fault.

Acknowledge the event.

Reboot controller.
Replace the RBU.

E444

RBU packet rejected

RBU responds with an answer not Acknowledge the event.

matching the last request. This is
Reboot controller.
probably due to duplicates sent when Replace the RBU.
the controller does not acknowledge
packages.

450

Acknowledge the event.

Upgrade the tool software.

9836 3123 01

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

Procedure

ACK

Cntrl Tool
ready ready

E445

RBU corrupt

RBU software fault.

Acknowledge the event.

Reboot controller.
Replace the RBU.

E446

RBU read error

RBU read operation failed.

Acknowledge the event.

Try read again.
Reboot controller.
Replace the RBU.

E447

RBU write error

RBU write operation failed.

Acknowledge the event.

Try write again.
Reboot controller.
Replace the RBU.

E448

RBU delete error

Delete operation failed.

Acknowledge the event.

Try delete again.
Reboot controller.
Replace the RBU.

E449

RBU flush error

RBU erase operation failed.

Acknowledge the event.

Try erase again.
Reboot controller.
Replace the RBU.

E450

RBU list error

RBU update operation failed.

Acknowledge the event.

Try update again.
Reboot controller.
Replace the RBU.

E451

RBU Update Failed

Database synchronization between

Pulsor Focus and RBU failed.

Acknowledge the event.

Try update again.
Reboot controller.
Replace the RBU.

E460

Fieldbus type mailbox message Error detected in initialization of

fault
FieldBus.

Contact the Atlas Copco service

representative.

E461

Fieldbus type gen com fault

Error detected in initialization of

FieldBus.

Contact the Atlas Copco service

representative.

E462

Fieldbus mailbox message fault Error detected in initialization of

FieldBus.

Contact the Atlas Copco service

representative.

E463

Fieldbus gen com fault

Error detected in initialization of

FieldBus.

Contact the Atlas Copco service

representative.

E464

Fieldbus hardware fault

The FieldBus module is broken and Acknowledge the event.

has to be replaced.
Contact the Atlas Copco service
representative.

9836 3123 01

451

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

Procedure

E465

Fieldbus dip switch error

The software tries to configure the

value of node address or baud rate,
but the address switch on the
fieldbus module is not in the right
position to enable software setting.

Switch off PF.

See chapter Fieldbus for information
about how to set the switch position.
Correct the switch and turn on PF.

E466

Fieldbus offline

The FieldBus went from online to

offline.

Check if PF is connected to the

network.
Check if the PLC is down.

E467

Fieldbus configuration fault

Error detected in initialization of

FieldBus.

Contact the Atlas Copco service

representative.

E468

Fieldbus hardware mismatch

The FieldBus module installed in

the controller is not the same
FieldBus type as configured with
ToolsTalk. Change FieldBus module
or configuration to get a match.

Check the configured filedbus type.

Check which fieldbus type is
installed in PF.
Reconfigure to match the installed
fieldbus type.

E469

Fieldbus init error

Error detected in initialization of

FieldBus.

Contact the Atlas Copco service

representative.

E470

Fieldbus PCP error

InterBus PCP length error.

Maximum length is 20 bytes.

Check the length of the process data

and the PCP data.
If the data exceeds 20 bytes, then
correct the configuration.

E471

Fieldbus claim area failed, lost

one message

Too much data traffic has caused

one packet lost.

Reduce the data from the PLC that

needs acknowledgement from PF.

E472

Fieldbus release area timeout

Release area command timed out.

Information event.
If the event occurs frequently, then
reduce the data from the PLC that
needs acknowledgement from PF.

E473

Fieldbus communication buffer Communication buffer full due to Check if there is a frequent input
alarm
too many input signals or incorrect signal, or if F200 FB Update Interval
fieldbus update interval.
needs to be changed.
Decrease the input signals and/or
decrease the fieldbus update interval.

E474

Fieldbus monitor buffer alarm

Fieldbus monitor buffer full.

In ToolsTalk, turn off the fieldbus

monitor.

E475

Fieldbus PsetID mismatch

selector lifted socket

Fieldbus selected Pset does not

match the lifted socket.

In the PLC, check the Pset ID.

If the Pset and socket do not
correspond, then lift the correct
socket or change the Pset.

452

ACK

Cntrl Tool
ready ready

9836 3123 01

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

Procedure

ACK

Cntrl Tool
ready ready

E480

Channel ID not valid

The channel ID configured is not

within the limits permitted. The
channel ID must be configured
between 1 and 20.

Acknowledge the event.

Open PF Map > Controller >
Network > Cell and change
parameter C310 Channel ID to be
within 1 and 20 and unique within
the cell.

E481

Cell member registration failed The cell member registration failed Acknowledge the event.
X
because one cell member is already In the cell member, open PF Map >
registered with the same channel ID. Controller > Network > Cell and
change parameter C310 Channel ID
to be within 1 and 20 and unique
within the cell.

E482

SW version not compatible with The application code version differs

cell
from the cell reference. To be able
to run the cell functionality, ensure
that all members in the cell use the
same release as the cell reference.

In the cell members, open PF Map

> Controller > Information and
check C101 Application code version.
Ensure that all cell members have
the same SW version.

E490

Cell ID not valid

The cell ID configured is not within

the limits permitted. The cell ID
must be configured between 1 and
999.

Acknowledge the event.

X
Open PF Map > Controller >
Network > Cell and set C313 Cell ID
to a correct number unique within
the network.

E491

Net member registration failed

The net member registration failed Acknowledge the event.

X
because one net member is already In the Net member, open PF Map >
registered with the same cell ID.
Controller > Network > Cell and set
C313 Cell ID to a correct number
unique within the network.

E492

SW version not compatible with The application code version differs

net cell
from the net reference. To be able
to run the net cell functionality,
ensure that all cell references in the
net use the same release as the net
reference.

Cntrl
ready

Tool
ready

22.2.6

E500-E599 Hardware events (tool)

Event
Code

Event name

Description

E500

New tool connected

A new tool has been connected to the

drive

9836 3123 01

In the cell members, open PF Map

> Controller > Information and
check C101 Application code version.
Ensure that all cell members have
the same SW version.

Procedure

ACK

453

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

Procedure

E501

Tool overheated

The tool is too hot and the drive is

disabled.
Additional parameter information:
First integer parameter indicates at
which stage the tool was locked:
0=Tightening, 1=Loosening,
2=Positioning, 3=Motor tuning,
4=open-end tuning,
Second integer parameter: 0=Service
denied, 1=service aborted.

Let the tool rest until it is cool

enough to run.
If the event reappears, reconsider
the workstation set-up and the
tightening strategy.
Service the tool.

E502

Tool service interval expired Service the tool. See parameter T413
Service interval.
Additional information:
The event appears, for 3 seconds,
every 100 tightenings after T412 No
of tightenings since service exceeds
T413 Service interval, and T411
Service indicator = ON. The alarm
LED indicates tracking during this
period.
The tool is locked if T416 Lock tool on
alarm is checked.

Acknowledge the event.

Service the tool.
Open Tool > Maintenance >
Service, click Service counter reset
and confirm by clicking OK.
Note: To remove the event and
unlock the tool, set T411 Service
indicator to Off.

E503

Calibration date expired

The calibration date has expired.

Use a torque measurement

equipment to calculate a calibration
value.
Update tool calibration value using
T402 Set calibration value.
Update parameter T405 Calibration
alarm date.

E504

Tool wear indicator alarm

Tool wear indicator alarm indicates

that the tool should be serviced.

Service the tool.

Connect tool to ToolsTalk Service
and reset the wear indicator.

E505

Tool rebuilt to/from OEtype

E506

E507

454

Cntrl
ready

Tool
ready

Tool redesigned. E.g. angled tool type For information only.

redesigned to an OE-tool type.

Tightenings prevented by
RBU

Tool locked due to incurred software Change to a RBU that supports the
release and with wrong RBU.All Hea used build.
d build requires a FieldTest RBU to
be able to perform tightenings.

Motortuning performed

A motortuning has been

For information only.
performed.Measured values from the
tool motortuning process are entered
in sub information arguments 1 to 4.

ACK

9836 3123 01

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

Procedure

Cntrl
ready

Tool
ready

E508

Motortuning warning

Measured values from the tool

motortuning process indicates that the
tool is not running optimally. The tool
may run warmer than normal. Values
for supporting this decision are entered
in sub information arguments 1 to 4.
(This event is default off).

The accuracy of the tool is not

influenced by this problem.
However, if the performance of the
tool is considered to be a problem,
send it to motor service.

E510

Tool type not supported by The tool type is not supported by the Acknowledge the event.
RBU
RBU.
Check which RBU-level the tool
requires.
Replace the RBU.

E511

Tool-Power Focus 3000 size Mismatch between the tool and PF

mismatch
3000 controller (for example S4/S7
tool connected to a S9 controller).

E512

Tool revision not supported The tool is not supported by the

Change tool or controller SW
by this drive SW
controller (SW version incompatible)

E513

Tool EEPROM checksum

error

A checksum error has occurred in the Acknowledge the event.

X
tool memory handling.
Reprogram the tool and restore the
memory, using Tools Talk service.

E514

Motortune parameters
invalid - Motortune

Checksum indicates that the motor

tuning or the open-end tuning table is
corrupt.
Additional parameter information:
First integer parameter indicates at
which stage the tool is locked: 0=
tightening, 1= loosening,
2=positioning, 3=motor tuning,
4=open-end tuning, 5=tracking
Second integer parameter 0=Service
denied, 1=service aborted.

E516

Rotor magnet remanens out Rotor magnet remanence out of range. Acknowledge the event.
of range
Service the tool.

E517

Tool max torque invalid

Tool max torque invalid, service tool. Acknowledge the event.

X
Set parameter T102 to an
appropriate value.
For S/DS/ETX tools: use TTPF or
Graph.
Other tools: use TTS.

9836 3123 01

Acknowledge the event.

Replace the PF3000 with the
correct PF3000 or a PF4000, to
match the tool.

ACK

Acknowledge the event.

X
Open Tool>Maintenance and do a
motor tuning or an open-end
tuning.

455

Event codes

Event
Code

Cntrl
ready

Tool
ready

Tool normalization value out of range, Acknowledge the event.

X
service tool.
Use a torque measurement
equipment to calculate a
normalization value.
Use the strategy DS-control during
measurements.
Open Tool > Maintenance >
Calibration and update T403
Normalisation value.

Tool calibration value out

of range

Tool calibration value out of range,

service tool.

Acknowledge the event.

X
Recalibrate the tool, using ACTA.
If the event reappears, replace the
tool.

E520

Wear indicator data in tool

invalid

Data in tool memory used for wear

indicator is invalid. Service tool.

Open Tool > Maintenance > Wear

and set T434 Min wear tightenings
to <100000.

E521

Wear data in tool not

updated

Tool memory or MC software not

responding.

Acknowledge the event.

Check that the tool cable and
connectors are undamaged and
correctly connected.
Reboot controller.

E535

Torque transducer error

Cables to transducer cut off or shorted. Acknowledge the event.

Check that the tool cable and
connectors are undamaged and
correctly connected.
If the event reappears, service the
tool.

E536

No transducer (sensor)

Cables to transducer cut off or shorted. Check that the tool cable and
connectors are undamaged and
correctly connected.

E537

Calibration not OK, offset

outside limits

Calibration offset outside limits.

Service the tool.

E538

Calibration not OK, CalVal Calibration value outside limits.

outside limits

Service the tool.

E539

Calibration not OK, Offset Calibration not OK, offset changed > Try to calibrate again.
changed > 5% of max value 5% of max value since last calibration. If the event reappears, service the
since last calibration
tool.

E540

Calibration not OK, CalVal Calibration not OK, calibration value Service the tool.
changed > 5% of max value changed > 5% of max value since last
since last calibration
calibration.

Event name

Description

E518

Tool normalization out of

range

E519

456

Procedure

ACK

9836 3123 01

Event codes

Event
Code

ACK

Cntrl
ready

Tool
ready

Cables to transducer cut off or shorted. Acknowledge the event.

Service the tool.

E542

Transducer (sensor) lost

When tightening values are lost the
Acknowledge the event.
during tightening from drive process reads the tool register and
Service the tool.
finds out that one or several error bits
have been set. Symptom of failure in
transducer electronics inside the tool.

E543

Transducer (sensor) lost

When tightening values are lost the
during tightening from DSP process reads the tool register and
finds out that NO error bits have been
set. Symptom of failure in connection
between tool and controller.

Acknowledge the event. Check for X

damage connection path between
controller and the tool: sockets and
plugs contact pins, the cable.
Service the tool, the controller or
the cable.

E544

Spindle rotated during

transducer calibration

E550

Radio contact with tool

Radio contact with tool established,
established, tool accessible tool accessible.

For information only.

E551

Radio contact with tool lost, Radio contact with tool lost, tool
tool inaccessible
inaccessible.

Re-establish connection.

E552

Communication error with

tool

An intermittent communication
disturbance between tool and
controller.

For information only.

If occurring frequently, reposition
Serial Port Adapter.
If re-occurring, contact your Atlas
Copco representative.

E553

Pairing attempt with

wireless tool failed

An attempt to pair the controllerwith Set the tool in pairing mode

a wireless tool failed.
according to the pairing procedure.
Perform another pairing attempt.
If the event reappears, replace the
tool.

E554

Command not performed,

wireless tool inaccessible

A command (batch increment, reset Re-establish connection.

batch etc.) could not be performed and Perform the action causing the
was discarded because the tool was
event again.
currently inaccessible.

E555

Condition change not

reflected in tool, wireless
tool inaccessible

A condition change in the controller

(Pset selection, Job selection, Job
aborted etc.) could not be reflected in
the tool. The tool was currently
inaccessible.

Re-establish connection.
The condition change is now
automatically transferred to the
tool.

E556

Tool battery low

Tool battery voltage is low.

Replace the tool battery.

Event name

Description

E541

Transducer (sensor) lost

during tightening

9836 3123 01

Procedure

Rotation of spindle during calibration Make sure that all parts are still
indicates that operator possibly
relative to each other at tool start
strained transducer creating offset/gain
change

457

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

Procedure

ACK

Cntrl
ready

Tool
ready

Place the discharged battery in the

battery charger.
E557

Tool battery empty

Tool battery empty. Tool locked.

E558

Tool software version

mismatch

The implemented protocol version in Upgrade the software in tool or

controller for connected tool differs controller to match each other.
from the protocol version in tool.
Additional parameter information:
First parameter is controller protocol
version. Second parameter is tool
protocol version.

E559

IRC pairing completed

An IRC paring sequence has been

successfully completed.

E560

Tool RBU error

An RBU error was detected by the tool Check that the RBU is correctly
software.
mounted, otherwise service tool.

E561

Tool locked, do Store

standalone

Tool locked since no Pset has been

actively stored in the tool.

E562

Condition change not

reflected in tool, wireless
tool stand alone

A condition change in the controller Make changes in the stand alone

(Pset selection, Job selection, Job
interface instead if the change is
aborted ) could not be reflected in meant to apply.
the tool. The tool was currently stand
alone

E563

IRC configuration mismatch Not possible to establish radio

connection with wireless tool

Check if tool is in correct operation X

mode (Ad-hoc and not
Infrastructure mode);
Also check the PF IRC settings.

E564

Reboot of wireless tool

needed for changes to take
effect

Reboot of wireless tool needed for

changes to take effect

Acknowledge the event on the

controller and power cycle the
wireless tool.

E565

Locked while updating

Pset/Job in tool

The controller has locked the tool

For information only.
while updating the Pset/Job in the (for
instance wireless) tool.

E566

Tool switch off

Tool switched off because of user

Switch on the tool
(push button) or the save battery timer

E567

Certificate expiry date

Information about EAP/TLS expiry

date, not valid or soon expire.

E580

Tool drift alarm relative

torque deviation low

Mean torque deviation below limit.

458

Replace the battery.

The tool is unlocked automatically.

For information only.

Do Store Standalone or deselect

Standalone, parameter T470 Use
Standalone.

For information only

9836 3123 01

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

E581

Tool drift alarm relative

torque deviation high

Mean torque deviation above limit.

E582

Tool drift alarm relative

pulse frequency low

Mean relative pulse frequency below

limit.

E583

Tool drift alarm relative

pulse frequency high

Mean relative pulse frequency above

limit- check oil!

E590

Low oil level in tool pulse

unit

Low oil level in tool pulse unit - see

tool Product Instruction

22.2.7

Procedure

ACK

Cntrl
ready

Tool
ready

ACK

Cntrl
ready

Tool
ready

E600-E699 Hardware events

Event
Code

Event name

Description

Procedure

E601

System voltage low

DC voltage too low. This might be

because line voltage to Pulsor Focus
is too low, or the voltage transformer
in the Pulsor Focus is damaged.

Acknowledge the event.

X
Controller: Verify that the input
voltage is within specified limits
and reboot the system.
STB: Replace battery. If occurring
frequently, check Pset, service tool.

E602

DC-bus HI during rundown DC voltage too high

Acknowledge the event.

Verify that the input voltage is
within specified limits.

E603

Drive overheated

The DC drive is too hot, drive

deactivated.

Let the system cool for 15 minutes.

Continue operation.

E604

24V output error

24 V output disabled (overload or

short circuit)

Acknowledge the event.

X
Check that the cable and connectors
are undamaged and correctly
connected.
Reduce overload by disconnecting
one or more devices.
Connect an external isolated 24V
power source to the 24V DC input
of the devices.

E619

Drive deactivated

DC drive deactivated during operation. Contact the Atlas Copco service

representative.

E620

Tool stall

Tool motor stall.

9836 3123 01

X
X

Check that the tool cable and

connectors are undamaged and
correctly connected.
If possible use a shorter tool cable.

459

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

Procedure

ACK

Cntrl
ready

Tool
ready

Cntrl
ready

Tool
ready

For STB, see E601

E621

Current measurement error

Current measurement error. Current

cannot reliably be measured.

Contact the Atlas Copco service

representative.

E622

Angle transducer error

The controller has received invalid

angle information from the tool.

Acknowledge the event.

Open Tool>Maintenance>Motor
tuning and perform a motor tuning.

E623

Safety current monitoring

error

The torque measured by the torque

transducer is inconsistent with the
torque estimated from the measured
current.

Contact the Atlas Copco service

representative.

E624

Battery failure

DC voltage too high or too low:

battery failure.

Contact the Atlas Copco service

X
representative and send back battery
to Atlas Copco (do not reuse it!)

E640

Drive not enabled

The drive was not enabled by

hardware.

Check the remote start plug

configuration.

There can be a failure in the power

Check tool, cables and drive.
channel, for example, power inverter,
power conductors, connectors and
motor.
E641

Unstable tool trigger signal The signal from the pressed tool
trigger is unstable and caused a
disabled drive.

22.2.8

E700-E799 Hardware events

Event
Code Event name

Description

Procedure

E700

PF started

E701

Backup battery low level The backup battery level is low. The
battery should be changed.

E702

Backup battery empty or The backup battery level is very low Replace the backup battery.
missing
or the battery is missing. A new
battery should be inserted as soon as
possible.

E703

Ground fault in tool

circuit

460

ACK

This event code is only visible in the For information only.

event log and used when the controller
is started.

An earth (ground) fail detected,

probably a tool circuit failure

Replace the backup battery.

Acknowledge the event.

Rebuild the tool.

9836 3123 01

Event codes

Event
Code Event name

Description

Procedure

ACK

Cntrl
ready

Tool
ready

E710

ACTA/QRTT
calibration

An ACTA/QRTT calibration has been For information only.

performed. See below for additional
information.

E720

Protective earth to tool

interrupted

Protective earth between tool and

controller is interrupted.

E721

Tool internal error Service tool

Indicator board overcurrent error. Tool Acknowledge the event.

service needed.
Service the tool.

E722

Illegal ring position

The direction ring is not in a defined Place the direction ring correctly.
position.

E723

Swivel lock activated

There is a mismatch between swivel

lock and tool start source

E724

Wrong gear box

Wrong gear box is mounted on the

tool

E799

Internal info

Internal info in event log info. Only

of interest to design department.

22.2.9

Acknowledge the event.

X
Check tool cable, tool and controller.
X

Mount the correct gearbox.

E800-E899 Software events

Event
Code

Event name

Description

Procedure

ACK

Cntrl
ready

Tool
ready

E805

PF Model unknown

This event indicates that the RBU

revision is not supported by the
controller (for example an RBU
bronze in a PF Graph controller), the
RBU is missing, or the RBU license
file is missing or corrupt.

Acknowledge the event.

Check that the correct RBU is
connected to the controller.
If the event reappears, then upgrade
the controller software.

E808

Error condition detected An error condition was detected in

Controller: Close external programs
by software
software.
connected to the controller.
Controller: The probable cause is that STB: Return tool to service.
an external application has started too
many subscriptions.
STB: Software error

E810

Database is corrupt

Database must be cleared, db version

is not correct

E819

Job abortion; result

request in progress

The system is occupied with

wait until done
requesting results from wireless tool

E820

Job abortion, result

request done

Result request done

9836 3123 01

461

Event codes

Event
Code

ACK

Cntrl
ready

Tool
ready

Tightening initialization phase failed. Acknowledge the event.

Hardware failure.
Contact the Atlas Copco service
representative.

No calibration result

No calibration was received from the Acknowledge the event.

drive during the tightening
Check tool cable.
initialization phase (timeout 100 ms). Reboot the controller.

E824

Cycle abort timeout

No tightening result was received

If necessary, increase the P144 Cycle
from the drive before the cycle abort abort timer in Pset.
timeout.

E831

Autoset wrong angle

Autoset could not be executed. The

calculated angle was too small.

Acknowledge the event.

Program the Pset manually or by
Quick programming.

E833

Autoset tight NOK

result

The Autoset could not be executed,

four NOK tightenings were
performed.

Acknowledge the event.

Program the Pset manually or by
Quick programming.

E834

Autoset rejected Pset in Auto set is only permitted on a CW

CCW direction
Pset.

E840

Feature Not Available

In Software Revision

This event is displayed when an

Reconfigure to an allowed
attempt is made to run Multistage
configuration or an available function.
with a RBU bronze, or handle a Pset
with a PsetID larger than the max
number of Psets.

E841

SW function not
available for this tool
type.

The software function is not available Change to the correct tool type.
for this tool type.

E851

Connection with Tools

Net server lost

The connection with the Tools Net

server is lost and the controller is
trying to reconnect. The Tools Net
server might be down or it might be
an Ethernet cable problem.

E852

Connection with BMW The connection with the BMW IPM

IPM server lost
server was lost, the Pulsor Focus is
trying to reconnect. The BMW IPM

Event name

Description

E822

No Job ACK from

control

E823

462

Procedure

Program the Pset manually or by

Quick programming.
If Quick programming is used, then
change the direction from CW to
CCW after programming.

Check the network configuration and

in particular the ToolsNet IP address,
Subnet mask and Default router.
Check if the ToolsNet server is down.
Check that the Ethernet cables are
OK.
Check that the routers and switches
are correctly connected and without
damage.

9836 3123 01

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

Procedure

ACK

Cntrl
ready

Tool
ready

server might be down or it might be

an ethernet cable problem.
E856

Router unreachable

The router in the configuration setting

could not be reached. Check the
network configuration and in
particularly the subnet mask and the
default router.

Check the network configuration and

in particular the Subnet mask and the
Default router.
Ping the router to see if it is alive.
Check the Ethernet cable.

E857

Reboot needed before

changes take effect

The configuration changes will not

take effect before a system reboot.

Acknowledge the event.

X
Reboot the controller.
If the event reappears, the PF is faulty.
Contact the Atlas Copco service
representative.

E858

IP address already in use The IP address of this controller is

already in use by another system.

Acknowledge the event.Change the

IP-address in the controller.

E859

IP address collision

Check the network settings.

E860

Memory allocation error Configuration changes has not taken Acknowledge the event and reboot
effect

E861

Session handler internal Configuration changes has not taken Acknowledge the event and reboot
error
effect

E862

Ethernet overload Error The Ethernet driver of the controller Check the network.
is temporarily switched off due to an
overloaded network.

E863

IP Port already in use

An attempt was made to bind a TCP Acknowledge the event.

or UDP socket to a port already in
Check all network settings.
use. E.g., a customer protocol is using
the same port as ToolsTalk.

E864

Ethernet echo detected

An Ethernet packet was discarded,

Check the network.
since its source MAC address was
equal to the controllers own MAC
address. Notice that this message only
occurs once during runtime, even if
several such packets are detected.
There is most likely a problem in the
network.

E865

Reboot and new IRC

pairing needed

The configuration changes will not

Acknowledge the event.
X
take effect until after a system reboot Reboot the controller and perform a
and new IRC pairing after that.
new IRC pairing.
If the event reappears, the controller
is faulty. Contact the Atlas Copco
service representative.

9836 3123 01

Another system attempts to use the

same IP address as this controller.

463

Event codes

Event
Code

Event name

Description

Procedure

ACK

E870

Sync member
registration failure

The Sync member registration failed In the sync reference, open PF Map >
because of a mismatch in the sync
Sync > Options > Sync group list
configuration list.
dialog box, and check that all IDs are
correct and unique.
In the sync reference, open Controller
> Network settings, and check that
the IP address and ID are correct.

E871

Sync reference
configuration failure

The channel ID of the Sync reference In the sync reference, open PF Map >
is not first in the Sync list as required. Sync > Options, and check that the
sync reference is at the top of the
Sync group list.

E872

Sync initialization
failure

Tightening synchronization
initialization failed.

E874

Sync members missing Only Sync reference is defined in the Acknowledge the event.
X
Sync group list.
In the sync reference, open PF Map >
Sync > Options and add sync
members to the Sync group list.

Cntrl
ready

Tool
ready
X

Check the I/O bus cable between all

sync members.
Check that all Sync members have the
same active Pset/multistage.
Check the external start bridge.

22.2.10 E900-E999 Events MMI

Event
Code
E901

22.3

Event name

Description

Pro cedure

ACK

Cntrl
ready

Tool
ready

MMI Start-up
Error

Error in MMI detected.

Acknowledge the event.

Reboot the controller.

Subinformation for event codes

Each event code is logged together with four integer parameters. For some event codes these parameters are
used to store extra information about the event.
The following sections contain event codes and explanations of the related integer parameters.

464

9836 3123 01

Event codes

22.3.1

E120

If the first parameter is 1, it means a motortuning failure caused by the tool motor magnet error.
The second parameter is a value that can be used by a PF4000 developer when analysing the fault.

22.3.2

E126

The first integer parameter indicates at which stage that the Multistage was aborted.
The second integer parameter indicates which event occurred. 0= no event occurred.
The third and fourth integer parameters, each containing 32 bits, indicate what went wrong with the
tightening.
Example 1: E126 (2, 113, 9, 8)
The multistage was aborted (E126) in stage 2 (first digit), when the tightening reached current limit (E113
Current limit reached rundown aborted). The third digit, 9, equals 1+8 that correspond to Multistage aborted
and Current limit reached. The fourth digit, 8, corresponds to Final angle max exceeded.
NOTE: Current Limit Reached is one of few event codes for which there is a corresponding tightening error
bit.
Example 2: E126 (3, 129, 1, 16896)
The multistage was aborted (E126) in stage 3 (first digit), when torque lower than target occurred (E129
Torque lower than target). The third digit, 1, means Multistage aborted, and the fourth digit 16896 equals
16384+512, Torque less than target and Current monitoring max exceeded.
First integer

Second integer

Third integer

Fourth integer

The stage when the

Multistage aborted

The event code

Error bits part I

Error bits part II

Dec

Event

Dec

Event

Multistage
aborted

Rundown angle max

exceeded

Rehit

Rundown angle min

not reached

Torque
measurement
possible invalid

Final torque max

exceeded

Current limit
reached

Final angle max

exceeded

Stage n

9836 3123 01

nnn

No of event that
occurred

465

Event codes

First integer

Second integer

Third integer

Fourth integer

The stage when the

Multistage aborted

The event code

Error bits part I

Error bits part II

Dec

Event

Dec

Event

16

Timeout on end
time shutoff

16

Self tap max

exceeded

32

Remove fastener 32
limit

Self tap min not

reached

64

Drive disabled

64

PVT monitoring max

exceeded

128

Transducer lost

128

PVT monitoring min

not reached

256

Transducer short 256

circuit

PVT Compensate
overflow

512

Transducer
corrupt

512

Current monitoring
max exceeded

1024

Sync timeout

1024

Post view torque min

not reached

2048

Dynamic CM
Min Tq

2048

Post view torque max

exceeded

4096

Dynamic CM
Max Tq

4096

Post view torque

angle too small

8192

Angle Max mon

8192

Trigger lost

22.3.3

16384 Yield nut off

16384 Torque less than

target

32768 Yield too few

samples

32768 Tool hot

E128

The first parameter contains the running Pset Id.

The second parameter describes where in the fastening process the trigger signal was lost (for a Power Focus
developer to analyse).

466

9836 3123 01

Event codes

22.3.4

E150

The first parameter contains the Ch ID number [C105] for the job client not responding. The second, third
and fourth parameters are not in use.

22.3.5

E156

The first parameter contains the Ch ID number [C105] for the lost job client. The second, third and fourth
parameters are not in use.

22.3.6

E403, E404, E405 and E406

The first parameter contains I/O-device ID of the not responding I/O-device. The second, third and fourth
parameters are not in use.

22.3.7

E710

ACTA/QRTT calibration information

When an ACTA/QRTT calibration batch is completed, event code E710 ACTA/QRTT calibration is displayed.
Torque result bits show the result of the torque calibration. All bits are sent as an unsigned 16 bit integer.
Angle result bits show the result of the angle calibration. All bits are sent as an unsigned 16 bit integer.
First integer

Second integer

Torque result bits

Angle result bits

Dec

Event

Dec

Event

Batch result
torque OK.

Batch result angle

OK.

Torque min
failed.

Angle min failed.

Torque max
failed.

Angle max failed.

Torque LCLx
failed.

Angle LCLx
failed.

16

Torque UCLx
failed.

16

Angle UCLx
failed.

32

Torque LCLr
failed.

32

Angle LCLr failed.

9836 3123 01

Third integer

Fourth integer

Not used

Channel number

467

Event codes

First integer

Second integer

Torque result bits

Angle result bits

64

Torque UCLr
failed.

64

Angle UCLr
failed.

128

Torque CP >
failed.

128

Angle CP > failed.

512

Torque CPK >

failed.

256

Angle CPK >

failed.

1024

Torque CAM >

failed.

512

Angle CAM >

failed.

2048

T Diff < failed.

468

Third integer

Fourth integer

9836 3123 01

Index

23

Index

Abort Job , 136 , 133

Accessibility
controller parameters , 398
Accessories , 22 , 411
parameters , 411
toolbar , 66
ACTA , 174 , 145
port , 145
tool calibration , 174
ACTA 4000 , 25
Activate
menu list , 62
Ang con/tq mon , 97
Application
under Options , 72
Autoset , 89
Backplane connections , 32
Batch count
FieldBus settings , 243
multistage parameter , 385
Batch size
in Job , 129
Blue LED , 166
Buzzer configuration
tool parameters , 411
Buzzer wave , 163
Bypass
job , 136
CC-Link , 272
Cell , 146
Cell and Net , 146
Cell Job , 129
Cell members , 146
Cell reference , 146
Character string
FieldBus , 230
Click wrench , 100
COM ports , 150 , 396
controller parameters , 396
Combined Zoom step and Ergo ramp , 110
Communication
under Options , 71
Configuration , 426 , 391
controller parameters , 391
of controller , 142
tool parameters , 401
Configuring a tool offline , 81
Connect
9836 3123 01

toolbar , 66
Connecting
controller with cell or net configuration , 146
Connecting devices , 32
Connecting the controller , 28
Control options , 109
Controller , 139 , 391
parameters , 391
toolbar , 66
ControlNet , 264
Cordless tool , 78
Current monitoring , 112
DeviceNet , 248
Diagnostic mode , 227
Diagnostics
tool parameters , 405
Digital inputs , 353 , 41
Digital I/O , 187 , 411
parameters , 411
Digital outputs , 42 , 323
Disconnect
toolbar , 66
Disconnect tool , 176
Display , 152 , 396
controller parameters , 396
DS con , 103
DS con/tq mon , 104
Dynamic job , 129
Edit
menu list , 62
Emergency mode
FieldBus configuration , 228
Ergo ramp , 109
Ethernet connection , 76 , 40
EtherNet/IP , 260
Event code list , 424
Event codes , 421
Event log , 421
Event Monitor , 24
External source
lock tool from , 185
Factory Overview , 24
FieldBus , 221
Fieldbus
parameters , 416
FieldBus
toolbar , 66
FieldBus data , 228
FieldBus selector , 240
FieldBus timing , 234

469

Index
File
menu list , 62
Fixed point number
FieldBus , 232
Flip Flop gate , 284
FL-Net , 270
Focus
menu list , 62
Front connections , 33
Function block , 284
Function buttons
for tools , 165
Functions in Job monitor , 136
General purpose I/O , 22
Get all results , 307
GPIO , 22
Gradient monitoring , 119
Ground bonding , 30
Hardware
in Controller view , 140
Help
menu list , 62
toolbar , 66
Home position forward and reverse , 101
Hot swap , 177
Identifier , 209 , 66
toolbar , 66
Identifier Monitor , 304
Identifier setup
parameters , 415
Illuminator , 166
Indicator box , 23
Information
controller parameters , 391
tool parameters , 399
InterBus/InterBus2MB , 253
I/O Bus , 191 , 44
I/O bus
parameters , 412
I/O Diagnostic , 187
I/O Expander , 23 , 23
sealed , 23
Job
job parameters , 387
parameters , 387
toolbar , 66
Job group , 131
Job Monitor , 133 , 298
Job off , 136
Job override , 133

470

Job status , 136

Joint angle , 90
Line control
in Job , 131
job parameter , 388
Logic Configurator
toolbar , 66
Logic gate , 282
Logical Configurator , 281
MAC-address , 33
Mains power connector , 46
Maintenance
tool parameters , 406
Memory , 153 , 397
controller parameters , 397
Memory reset , 153
Memory setup , 153
Menu list , 62
MiniDisplay , 23
Modbus TCP , 263
ModBusPlus , 256
Monitor mode , 227
Monitors , 295 , 66
toolbar , 66
Motor tuning , 175
Multicast , 145
Multistage , 125 , 384
parameters , 384
toolbar , 66
Multistage programming
parameters , 385
Net reference , 146
Network
controller parameters , 393
settings in controller , 145
Network setup , 146
NOK
in Job , 136
Offline , 80
One stage , 108
Open Protocol , 24 , 145
port , 145
Open-end
start-up , 36
Open-end tuning , 173
Operator Monitor , 299
Operator Panel , 23
Options
menu list , 62
Programming+ , 116

9836 3123 01

Index
Output test , 187
Part Id scan , 209
Password , 157
PF List
menu list , 66
under Options , 75
PF Map , 69 , 66
toolbar , 66
PF 3000 , 17
PF 4000 , 16
Picture Monitor , 302
PLC
FieldBus , 221
Post view torque , 122
Printer , 198 , 413
parameters , 413
Printout
under Options , 74
Product instructions , 13
ProfiBus-DP , 244
Profinet , 266
Profinet IRT , 266
Programming
job parameters , 388
Pset parameters , 367
Sync parameters , 414
Programming+ , 111 , 373
Pset parameters , 373
Pset , 85 , 95
Control strategies , 95
creating/opening , 88
programming , 91
Programming help , 91
toolbar , 66
Pset comment , 153
Pset setup , 123 , 377
Pset parameters , 377
PVT comp with snug , 105
PVT compensate , 115
PVT monitoring , 114
PVT selftap , 113
QRTT , 174
Quick programming
quick programming , 90
Quick step , 109
RBU , 18 , 33
connecting , 33
RE alarm , 23
Read PF from file , 79
Rehit detection , 110

9836 3123 01

Relays , 187
Remote start connection , 45
Remote start input , 116
Restart Job , 136
Result Monitor , 296
Reverse ang , 99
Rotate spindle forward/reverse , 100
Rundown angle , 110
Running Job
menu list , 66
Running Pset
menu list , 66
Safety information , 13
Safety trigger , 162
Selected Controller
menu list , 66
Selection panel , 66
Sensor tracking , 170
Serial connection , 76
Service log , 62
Setup
Job parameters , 387
Simulator
in Logic configurator , 293
Snug gradient , 104
Socket Selector , 23
Socket selector
FieldBus configuration , 240
Software
in Controller view , 140
Sound , 163
Sound configuration
tool parameters , 411
ST scanner , 22
ST selector , 22
Stacklight , 23
Standalone Job , 129
Start-up , 33
Start-up instruction
for open-end tools , 36
Static job , 129
Statistic
toolbar , 66
Statistic programming , ? , 378
Pset parameters , 378
Statistics , 313
Store
FieldBus configuration , 228
Store PF to file , 79
Storing , 78

471

Index
ST-selector connection , 37
Sync , 201 , 414
parameters , 414
toolbar , 66
Sync motor tuning , 175 , 175
activate , 175
SynchroTork option , 202
Tensor tools , 20
Tightening strategy , 108
TLS ST Tag , 22
Tool
connecting , 35
disconnect , 176
disconnecting , 176
parameters , 399
toolbar , 66 , 66
Tool bus , 196 , 413
parameters , 413
Tool configuration , 161
Tool diagnostic , 169
Tool information , 160
Tool lock functionality , 184
Tool maintenance , 171
Tool rotation direction , 116
Tool tightening direction , 116
ToolsNet , 24 , 145
ToolsTalk , 19 , 70
configuring , 70
installing , 61
port , 145
ToolsTalk overview , 61
ToolsTalk PF
starting , 61
Tq con , 96
Tq con/ang con (AND)/ (OR) , 98
Tq con/ang mon , 97
Trace , 309 , 66
toolbar , 66
Tracking Results , ?
Two stage , 108
USB connection , 76
wave , 163
Wear indicator , 174
Windows
menu list , 62
Yield control , 101 , 120
Yield/Tq con (OR) , 102
Zoom step , 110
4-step tq con/4-step ang con , 106

472

9836 3123 01

9836 3123 01
Edition 24 (SW W10.16/W14.3)
2015-06

www.atlascopco.com